iPECS UCP - Dynacom Ltd
iPECS UCP
(Unified Communications Platform)
Feature Description & Operation Manual
Please read this manual carefully before operating system.
Retain it for future reference.
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Revision History
SW version
Issue
Date
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES
1.0
Mar, 2014
First Release
1.1
June, 2014 Updated the minor content according to SW upgrade ; Message
Cascade, Remote control from Mobile phone, Least cost routing,
1.2.X
1.2
June, 2015
Updated and Added the following features:
Emergency page
ARS (Alternative Route Selection) for Digit conversion table
Message Wait Reminder Tone
Call park for internal call
Unified Loop button
Call Re-Routing(CRR)
2.0.x
1.3
Jan., 2016
-
System announcement is changed from 70 to 200.
LIP-9071 NFC for Call forward & Hot desk.
Added Activating/Deactivating/Joining conference group.
Searching Directory in LDAP & System DB, refer to Dial by name.
Moving from Mobile phone to Desktop phone, refer to Mobile
Extension.
Added the Message retrieval for hearing or skipping date/time
prompt while hearing.
Deleted Urgent Text Message Service.
Added Mobile Native Voice Support for UCS Mobile Client.
Updated Message cascade.
Added Station Flexible button default table.
Added Multiple Mailbox Greeting.
Added Lift Handset for Page in Paging.
Added Privacy function in Barge in and Intrusion.
UCP100/UCP600 UVMU basic channel is changed to 8 channels.
VM back up text is deleted in Message storage.
The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice, due to continued progress in
methodology, design, and manufacturing. Ericsson-LG Enterprise shall have no liability for any error
or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
Copyright© 2014 Ericsson-LG Enterprise Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved
This material is copyrighted by Ericsson-LG Enterprise Co., Ltd. (Ericsson-LG Enterprise). Any
unauthorized reproductions, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly
prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws. If you are not the intended recipient, you should
destroy or return this material to Ericsson-LG Enterprise.
iPECS is trademark of Ericsson-LG Enterprise Co., Ltd.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Table of Contents
1. Introduction ...................................................................... 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Manual Application .................................................................. 1
Manual Organization................................................................ 1
Feature Information ................................................................. 1
Buttons &Term Variations....................................................... 2
2. System.............................................................................. 3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
8-Digit Station Numbering Plan .............................................. 3
Account Code ........................................................................... 4
Alarm Signal/Door Bell ............................................................ 6
Authorization Codes (Password) ........................................... 8
Auto Call Recording .............................................................. 11
Auto Call Release................................................................... 13
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)........................................ 14
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing ................................................ 14
ACD Statistics Report ........................................................................ 15
Agents ............................................................................................... 17
2.7.3.1
2.7.3.2
2.7.3.3
2.7.3.4
2.7.3.5
2.7.3.6
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
2.7.7
2.7.8
2.7.9
2.7.10
2.7.11
2.7.12
Agent Auto Connect/Zap Tone .......................................................17
Agent Automatic Wrap-Up .............................................................18
Agent Help Request ......................................................................19
Agent Id Login/Logout....................................................................20
Agent On/Off Duty w/Reason Code................................................ 22
Agent Queued Calls Display ..........................................................24
Announcements ................................................................................ 26
Auto ACD DND Unavailable Service.................................................. 27
Calls-In-Queue routing....................................................................... 28
Calls-In-Queue Page Alert ................................................................. 29
Event Messages ................................................................................ 31
Group Mail Box.................................................................................. 31
Group Name ...................................................................................... 33
Incoming Call Routing........................................................................ 33
Supervisors ....................................................................................... 34
2.7.12.1
2.7.12.2
2.7.12.3
Agent Call Monitor .........................................................................34
Agent Status Control......................................................................35
Group Status Display .....................................................................37
i
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7.12.4
2.7.12.5
2.7.12.6
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
Call Transfer, Outside Line ................................................................ 63
Call Transfer, Station ......................................................................... 64
Call Transfer, System Announcement ............................................... 66
Call Transfer, Voice Mail.................................................................... 67
Call Waiting/Camp-On ........................................................... 68
Conference ............................................................................. 69
2.22.1
2.22.2
2.22.3
2.22.4
2.22.5
2.23
2.24
2.25
2.26
Directed Call Pick-Up......................................................................... 58
Group Call Pick-Up ............................................................................ 59
Pick Up Group Call Pick-Up ............................................................... 60
Call Re-Routing (CRR) ........................................................... 62
Call Transfer ........................................................................... 63
2.20.1
2.20.2
2.20.3
2.20.4
2.21
2.22
Group Parameter Control...............................................................38
Supervisor Help Response ............................................................39
Supervisor Login/Logout ................................................................40
Auto Called Number Redial (ACNR) ..................................... 42
Automatic Pause Insertion.................................................... 44
Automatic Privacy.................................................................. 45
Auto Service Mode Control ................................................... 46
Automatic System Daylight Saving Time ............................ 48
Automatic Time Synchronization ......................................... 49
Call Duration Warning Tone .................................................. 50
Call Forward ........................................................................... 51
Call Forward, Preset .............................................................. 55
Call Park.................................................................................. 57
Call Pick-Up ............................................................................ 58
2.18.1
2.18.2
2.18.3
2.19
2.20
Issue 1.3
Conference Group ............................................................................. 69
Conference Member View & Delete ................................................... 72
Conference Room ............................................................................. 72
Multi-Party Conference ...................................................................... 75
Unsupervised Conference ................................................................. 76
Customer Site Name .............................................................. 78
Data Line Security.................................................................. 79
Delayed Line Ring .................................................................. 80
Delayed Auto Attendant ........................................................ 81
2.26.1
2.26.2
DISA Incoming Line-Russia- .............................................................. 81
Normal Line Ring Assignment ........................................................... 81
ii
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.27
2.28
2.29
2.30
Diagnostics & Maintenance .................................................. 83
Dial-by-Name (Directory Search & Dial) ............................... 84
Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover .............................................. 87
Dialing Restrictions ............................................................... 88
2.30.1
2.30.2
2.30.3
2.30.4
2.31
2.32
table
2.33
2.34
2.35
2.36
AA/VM Group .................................................................................. 111
In-band (DTMF) AA/VM Signaling.................................................... 112
SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface) AA/VM Signaling .......... 113
Voice Mailbox Translation................................................................ 115
Flexible Numbering Plan ..................................................... 116
Forced Disconnect Intrusion .............................................. 117
Headset Compatibility ......................................................... 119
Hold ....................................................................................... 121
2.42.1
2.42.2
2.42.3
2.42.4
2.42.5
2.43
Emergency Call ............................................................................... 104
Emergency Call Caller-Location Support ......................................... 104
Emergency Call –Bomb Threat History ............................................ 106
Emergency Mailbox ......................................................................... 107
Emergency Call Monitor .................................................................. 108
Executive/Secretary Forward.............................................. 109
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail ................................... 111
2.38.1
2.38.2
2.38.3
2.38.4
2.39
2.40
2.41
2.42
Class of Service ................................................................................ 88
Day/Timed & Night Station COS (Class of Service) ........................... 91
Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock ............................... 92
Walking COS (Class of Service) ........................................................ 93
Digit Conversion .................................................................... 95
Alternative Route Selection(ARS) for Digit conversion
97
Differential Ring ..................................................................... 98
DND (Do Not Disturb) .......................................................... 100
Door Open ............................................................................ 102
Emergency Call Service ...................................................... 104
2.36.1
2.36.2
2.36.3
2.36.4
2.36.5
2.37
2.38
Issue 1.3
Automatic Hold ................................................................................ 121
Hold Preference .............................................................................. 122
Hold Recall ...................................................................................... 122
Exclusive Hold ................................................................................. 123
System Hold .................................................................................... 125
Hot Desk ............................................................................... 127
iii
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.44
2.45
2.46
ICLID Call Routing ............................................................... 129
In-Room Indication .............................................................. 130
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail ................................ 131
2.46.1
2.46.2
Integrated AA/VM Overview............................................................. 131
Integrated Auto Attendant ................................................................ 132
2.46.2.1
2.46.2.2
2.46.3
2.46.4
Administrator Mailbox .................................................................. 137
Announce Only Mailbox ............................................................... 138
Call Forward from VM .................................................................. 138
Distribution Lists .......................................................................... 139
E-Mail Notification ........................................................................ 140
Mark a Message as Private.......................................................... 141
Mark a Message for Delivery Confirmation ................................... 141
Message Cascade ....................................................................... 142
Message Retrieval ....................................................................... 143
Message Retrieval Options .......................................................... 146
Message Storage ........................................................................ 147
Outbound Message Notification ................................................... 149
Personal CCR/User Greeting DISA .............................................. 150
Multiple Mailbox Greeting ............................................................ 152
Remote Message Retrieval.......................................................... 154
Send a Message ......................................................................... 155
Voice Mail Class of Service.......................................................... 155
Voice Mailbox Settings................................................................. 156
System Voice Memo........................................................................ 158
IP Bridge Mode ..................................................................... 160
IP FAX Relay, T.38 Support ................................................. 161
IP System DECT ................................................................... 162
IP TRANS-CODING............................................................... 163
IP TRUNKING........................................................................ 164
2.51.1
2.52
2.53
2.54
2.55
2.56
2.57
2.58
Company Directory ...................................................................... 134
Remote Announcement Recording .............................................. 136
Integrated Voice Mail ....................................................................... 137
2.46.3.1
2.46.3.2
2.46.3.3
2.46.3.4
2.46.3.5
2.46.3.6
2.46.3.7
2.46.3.8
2.46.3.9
2.46.3.10
2.46.3.11
2.46.3.12
2.46.3.13
2.46.3.14
2.46.3.15
2.46.3.16
2.46.3.17
2.46.3.18
2.47
2.48
2.49
2.50
2.51
Issue 1.3
H.323 v4 Service ............................................................................. 164
LBC (Loud Bell Control) ...................................................... 165
LCR (Least Cost Routing) ................................................... 166
Linked Station Pairs ............................................................ 168
LNR (Last Number Redial) .................................................. 170
Mobile Extension ................................................................. 172
MOH (Music-On-Hold).......................................................... 175
Multiple Language Support................................................. 177
iv
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.59
2.60
2.61
2.62
2.63
2.64
2.65
2.66
2.67
2.68
2.69
2.70
2.71
2.72
2.73
Multiple Voice Mailbox Support.......................................... 179
Network Security & Priority ................................................ 180
Outside Call Redirect........................................................... 181
Outside Call Time Restriction ............................................. 182
Outside Line Access............................................................ 183
Outside Line Queuing.......................................................... 185
Personal Groups .................................................................. 187
Pre-Defined & Custom Text Display Messages ................ 188
Prefix Dialing Table.............................................................. 192
Redundant System Processor ............................................ 193
Registration & Fractional Module Tables .......................... 195
Prepaid Call .......................................................................... 197
Remote Control from Mobile Phone................................... 198
Ringing Line Preference...................................................... 199
Speed Dial............................................................................. 200
2.73.1
2.73.2
2.73.3
2.73.4
2.73.5
2.73.6
2.74
2.75
2.76
2.77
Call Cost Display ............................................................................. 218
Lost Call Recording ......................................................................... 219
SMDR Call Records ........................................................................ 222
System Administration ........................................................ 225
2.78.1
2.78.2
2.78.3
2.79
2.80
Display Security............................................................................... 200
Speed Dial Pause Insertion ............................................................. 200
Station Speed Dial ........................................................................... 201
System Speed Dial .......................................................................... 204
System Speed Zone (Groups) ......................................................... 206
Flexible Speed................................................................................. 208
Station Call Coverage .......................................................... 211
Station Groups ..................................................................... 213
Station Flexible Button Default Table ................................ 217
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) ....................... 218
2.77.1
2.77.2
2.77.3
2.78
Issue 1.3
Keyset Administration ...................................................................... 225
Multi-Level Admin Access................................................................ 225
Web Administration ......................................................................... 226
System Alarm Notification Control .................................... 228
System Networking.............................................................. 230
2.80.1
Centralized Control T-NET .............................................................. 230
v
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.80.2
Distributed Control Network ............................................................. 231
2.80.2.1
2.80.2.2
2.80.2.3
2.80.2.4
2.80.2.5
2.80.2.6
2.80.2.7
2.80.2.8
2.80.2.9
2.80.2.10
2.80.2.11
2.80.2.12
2.80.2.13
2.80.2.14
2.81
2.82
Net Intercom Call ......................................................................... 232
Net Call Transfer ......................................................................... 233
Net Call Identification Service ...................................................... 235
Network Call back (Call Completion) ............................................ 236
Net Call Camp-On (Call Offer) ..................................................... 237
Net Conference ........................................................................... 238
Net Station Message Waiting ....................................................... 239
Net Call Forward.......................................................................... 241
CO Transit-In ............................................................................... 243
CO Transit-Out ............................................................................ 244
BLF Presentation ......................................................................... 245
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) ........................................... 247
Centralized Voice Mail ................................................................. 248
Networked System Paging ........................................................... 248
System Scenario Call Routing ............................................ 251
Traffic Analysis .................................................................... 252
2.82.1
2.82.2
2.82.3
2.82.4
2.83
2.84
2.85
2.86
2.87
Issue 1.3
Traffic Analysis, Attendant ............................................................... 253
Traffic Analysis, Call Reports ........................................................... 255
Traffic Analysis, H/W Usage ............................................................ 256
Traffic Analysis, Line Reports .......................................................... 257
Universal Night Answer (UNA) ........................................... 259
Wake-Up Alarm, Enhanced ................................................. 260
Wake-up Alarm, Standard ................................................... 263
Web Call Back ...................................................................... 265
Zone Management ............................................................... 266
2.87.1
2.87.2
2.87.3
2.87.4
Holiday Assignment ......................................................................... 266
Inter Zone Connection Limit ............................................................. 266
Remote Devices .............................................................................. 267
Zone Outgoing Call Connection Limit............................................... 268
3. Intercom ....................................................................... 270
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Barge-In ................................................................................ 270
Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) ...... 272
Intercom (ICM) Call .............................................................. 273
Intercom Call Hold ............................................................... 275
Intercom Caller Controlled Signaling................................. 276
Intercom Lock-Out ............................................................... 277
Intercom Step Call ............................................................... 278
vi
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.8
3.9
3.10
Intercom Tenancy Group .................................................... 279
Intercom Transfer ................................................................ 281
Message Wait/Call Back ...................................................... 283
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
3.11
CLI Message Wait ........................................................................... 283
Message Wait Reminder Tone ........................................................ 286
Short Message Service (SMS)......................................................... 287
Station Message Wait/Call Back ...................................................... 289
Paging ................................................................................... 292
3.11.1
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.12
3.13
Issue 1.3
Internal/External & All Call Page ...................................................... 292
Meet Me Page ................................................................................. 294
SOS Paging .................................................................................... 295
Push to Talk Paging............................................................. 296
Emergency page .................................................................. 298
4. Outside (co/ip)lines ...................................................... 299
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
Auto Fault Detection and Recovery ................................... 299
Caller ID Mode ...................................................................... 300
CO Line Flash ....................................................................... 301
CO Line Release Guard Time.............................................. 302
CO Line Ring Detect ............................................................ 303
Dial Pulse Signaling............................................................. 304
Direct Inward Dialing (DID).................................................. 305
DID Line Digit Conversion................................................... 307
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ................................. 308
DTMF Signaling .................................................................... 310
IP Address Dialing ............................................................... 311
IP Trunking ........................................................................... 312
4.12.1
4.12.2
4.12.3
4.13
4.14
H.323 v4 Service ............................................................................. 312
SIP Trunk Service............................................................................ 313
SIP Virtual CO Line (VCOL)............................................................. 314
IP WAN Dialing after Answer .............................................. 316
ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network) ......................... 317
4.14.1
4.14.2
4.14.3
4.14.4
Calling/Called Party Identification .................................................... 317
ISDN AOC (Advice of Charge)......................................................... 318
Keypad Facility ................................................................................ 319
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) ................................................. 320
vii
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.15
ISDN Supplementary Services............................................ 322
4.15.1
4.15.2
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
Issue 1.3
ISDN Call Deflection ........................................................................ 322
ISDN Malicious Call ID Request ...................................................... 323
Line Monitor ......................................................................... 324
Multiple Calling Line IDs ..................................................... 325
Outside Line Groups ........................................................... 327
Outside Line Preset Forward .............................................. 328
Outside Line Ring Assignment........................................... 329
Private Line........................................................................... 330
5. iPECS phone ................................................................ 331
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
Answering Machine Emulation ........................................... 331
Auto Release of [SPEAKER] ............................................... 333
Automatic Speaker Select ................................................... 334
Background Music (BGM) ................................................... 335
Call Log Display ................................................................... 337
Call Profile Routing.............................................................. 338
Call Wait for Internal & External calls ................................ 340
DND –One-Time DND ........................................................... 345
Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment ....................... 347
Flexible LED Flash Rates .................................................... 348
Group Listening ................................................................... 349
Intercom Signaling Mode .................................................... 350
Microphone Mute ................................................................. 352
Off-Hook Signaling .............................................................. 353
On-Hook Dialing ................................................................... 354
Outside Line Name Display................................................. 355
Prime Line Immediate/Delayed ........................................... 356
Ring Tone Selection and Download ................................... 358
Save Number Redial (SNR) ................................................. 359
Serial DSS/BLF Console...................................................... 361
Silent Text Message............................................................. 363
Speakerphone ...................................................................... 364
Station Flexible Buttons ...................................................... 366
Station Individual Call Routing (ICR) ................................. 368
viii
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.25
5.26
5.27
Issue 1.3
Station User Programming& Codes ................................... 370
Two-Way Record .................................................................. 375
Voice Over ............................................................................ 378
6. Attendants .................................................................... 380
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.19
Active CPU (UCP) Display ................................................... 380
Alternate Attendant .............................................................. 381
Attendant Call & Call Queuing ............................................ 382
Attendant Positions ............................................................. 383
Attendant Recall ................................................................... 384
Attendant Station User Program Codes ............................ 385
Cabinet Alarm....................................................................... 389
Call Forward, Attendant ...................................................... 390
Call Forward, Off-Net ........................................................... 391
Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode ............................... 393
DSS/BLF Consoles .............................................................. 395
Disable Outgoing Line Access ........................................... 397
DND Override ....................................................................... 398
Emergency Call Attendant Alert ......................................... 399
Feature Cancel ..................................................................... 401
IP-Attendant.......................................................................... 402
Intrusion................................................................................ 403
LCD Display Format Control ............................................... 404
System Clock Set ................................................................. 405
7. SLT (Single Line Telephone) ....................................... 406
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Broker Call ............................................................................ 406
Howler Tone ......................................................................... 408
SLT Flash Mode ................................................................... 409
SLT Message Wait Indication ............................................. 410
SLT Name Entry ................................................................... 411
Transfer CLI to SLT.............................................................. 412
8. SIP Extension ............................................................... 413
8.1
8.2
SIP Phone Support .............................................................. 413
SIP Phone Provisioning, Ericsson-LG Enterprise Phones416
ix
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
8.3
Issue 1.3
SIP Virtual Mobile Extension .............................................. 418
9. iPECS UCS Client ......................................................... 419
9.1
9.2
9.3
iPECS UCS Premium & Standard Client Support ............. 419
Call Control with UC Client ................................................. 420
Mobile Native Voice Support for UCS Mobile client ......... 421
x
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
Manual Application
This document provides detailed information covering description and operation of the
numerous features available in the iPECS UCP Release system software. The document is
written assuming the system employs the default-numbering plan for North America.
1.2
Manual Organization
Features are arranged alphabetically in nine (9)different major groupings as follows:
 Section 1 Introduction
 Section 2 System Features
 Section 3 Intercom Features
 Section 4 Outside (CO/IP)Lines
 Section 5 iPECS IP & LDP Phones
 Section 6 Attendant
 Section 7 SLT
 Section 8 SIP Extension
 Section 9 UCS Client
1.3
Feature Information
Each section is an alphabetical listing of features with the description and operation of each.
The structure is divided into 6 parts as below:

Description: explains the nature of the feature.

Operation: gives detailed step-by-step operation of the feature for Ericsson LG
phones (LDP digital and LIP IP phones)and SLTs. In some cases a Flexible
button on the Ericsson-LG Enterprise phones can be assigned to activate the
feature. In this case, the procedures to assign the button are provided.

Conditions: explains known feature interactions and constraints related to the
feature.

Programming: lists Web Admin database entries that may influence proper
feature operation.

Related Features: lists related topical information to aid in understanding the
feature.

Hardware: lists hardware required for proper feature operation.
1
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
1.4
Issue 1.3
Buttons &Term Variations
iPECS UCP supports proprietary digital and IP phones. The proprietary models include LDP7000 series, LDP-9000 series, LIP- 7000 series, LIP-8000/8000E series and LIP-9000 series.
Each series employs similar but slightly different designations for the buttons. Details of the
buttons on your phone are provided in the User Guide. For the purposes of this manual,
several of the designations may be used. For example, the button to handle messages is
called either [MSG], [CALL BK], or [MESSAGE/CALLBACK].
Note the fixed button names are enclosed in brackets ‘[ ]’ and Flex buttons are enclosed in
braces ‘{ }’. In addition, some buttons have dual functions; the [HOLD/SAVE] button
places your active call on hold and stores entries you make when assigning Flex buttons.
The description, operation and conditions attempt to use common terms such as “Voice Mail”
or “outside Line” so that a novice installer can understand the contents. The Programming
and Hardware sections however employ terms specific to the UCP as used in the respective
manual such as “VSF” (used for Auto Attendant and Voice Mail) and “CO/IP Lines” for
Outside Lines.
Note the feature code is based on Flexible numbering plan 1 in Operation part. First check
your numbering plan ‘System ID (100)’ and for the detailed feature code about the numbering
plan, refer to Appendix B on Administration & Programming manual.
2
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2. SYSTEM
2.1
8-Digit Station Numbering Plan
Description
The system supports Station Numbering Plans from two to eight digits. The Station number
consists of a Prefix digit string and a suffix called “Add Digit”. A Prefix digit string can be up to
six (6) digits that do not conflict with the system Flexible Numbering Plan used for feature
codes. The Add Digit defines the number of digits from the Station Number that are added as
the suffix to the Prefix digits to form the Station Number. The Add Digits can be 2 to 4 digits in
length using the right most digits of the Station Number and must uniquely identify the station.
Operation
System
Operation of the 8-digit Station Numbering Plan is automatic when configured
Conditions
1. The system employs the complete Station number, 2 to 8 digits, when sending
messages to an external device such as an adjunct Voice Mail and TAPI device
such as ez-Attendant. It is the responsibility of the 3rd party software to support the
defined Station Numbering Plan.
2. When using Keyset Admin to configure the 8-Digit Table, Prefix Usage must be
enabled in the System ID PGM 100.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
8-Digit Table8 Digit String, Add Digit-
Related Features

Station Numbering Plan
Hardware
3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.2
Issue 1.3
Account Code
Description
You may allow tracking of specific calls by entering a non-verified variable length (up to 12
digits) identifier for a call. The identifier or “Account Code” is output as part of the Station
Message Detail Record (SMDR) for the call as discussed in Section 2.73. This is often used
to allocate call costs to a specific account or client.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button for {ACCOUNT CODE} operation
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “84” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To assign a Flex button for {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} operation
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “84” + Account code (up to 12 digits) +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To enter an Account Code using an {ACCOUNT CODE} button prior to placing a call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {ACCOUNT CODE} button.
3. Dial the Account Code (up to 12 digits).
4. Press “*”, Intercom dial tone is heard.
5. Place the outside call as normal.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} button.
3. Place the outside call as normal.
To enter an Account Code using an {ACCOUNT CODE} button during a call
1. Press the {ACCOUNT CODE} button.
2. Dial the Account Code (up to 12 digits).
3. Press “*”.
Or,
1. Press the {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} button.
SLT
To enter an Account Code prior to placing a call
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Flex Numbering Plan code “550”.
3. Dial the Account Code (up to 12 digits).
4. Press “*”.
5. Place the outside call as normal.
4
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To enter an Account Code during a call
1. Momentarily press the Hook-switch.
2. Dial the Flex Numbering Plan code “550”.
3. Dial the Account Code (up to 12 digits).
4. Press “*”.
Conditions
1. When entering an Account Code during a call, DTMF digits are transmitted to the
connected party.
2. A maximum of 1000 {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} buttons may be assigned
in the system.
3. If an Authorization Code is entered as the Account Code, the SMDR record will
show the station number or the index number for a System Authorization Code
rather than the user entered Authorization Code.
4. If the Forced SMDR Account Code attribute of the station is enabled, you must
enter an Account Code prior to placing an outgoing call.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan SMDR Account Code Enter
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Forced SMDR Account Code
Related Features



Authorization Codes (Password)
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Station Flexible Buttons
Hardware
5
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.3
Issue 1.3
Alarm Signal/Door Bell
Description
The system can be configured to recognize the status of an external contact (normally open
or closed). The system will signal assigned iPECS IP and LDP Phones when the contact
activates. This capability is commonly employed to provide remote Alarm or Door Bell signals.
Assigned stations receive the Alarm Signal, either a single tone burst repeated at 1minuteintervals or a continuous tone. The Alarm Signal may be terminated at the phone by
dialing the Alarm Reset code or, if assigned, pressing the {ALARM RESET} button. To rearm
the Alarm function, the alarm condition must be cleared after the Alarm signal is reset.
When used as a Door Bell, assigned iPECS IP and LDP Phones receive a single tone burst
each time the external contact is activated and no reset is required.
Operation
System
At detection of contact operation, the Alarm/Door Bell signal is sent to assigned stations.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as an {ALARM RESET} button to terminate the Alarm Signal
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “565” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To terminate an Alarm Signal, while idle
1. Dial the Flex Numbering Plan code “565”, confirmation tone is received and the
Alarm Signal is terminated. If the alarm condition is cleared, the system will
automatically rearm the alarm monitoring.
Or,
1. Press the {ALARM RESET} button.
Conditions
1. The Alarm contacts must be “dry”, no voltage or current source connected.
2. Only iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned to receive Alarm/Door Bell
signals.
3. The LCD of phones assigned to receive Alarm/Door Bell signals will show “ALARM”
or “DOOR BELL” as appropriate.
4. The Alarm Reset code is also employed to terminate alarm signals from digital and
IP trunks as well as Cabinet alarms.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Alarm Attributes Alarm Enable, Alarm Contact Type,
Alarm/Doorbell Mode, Alarm Signal Mode
6
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
STATION DATA
Issue 1.3
Common Attributes Alarm/Door Bell Attribute
Related Features




Door Open
Station Flexible Buttons
System Alarm Notification Control
Cabinet Alarm


iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Alarm or Doorbell input contact, refer to the iPECS UCP Hardware
Description & Installation Manual to install.
Hardware
7
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.4
Issue 1.3
Authorization Codes (Password)
Description
Authorization Codes provide a means to control access to Voice Mail, Off Premise Call
Forward, Walking COS (Class of Service), or DISA and may be required for outgoing outside
Line or LCR access based on configuration of the system database. When you dial an
Authorization Code that matches an Authorization Code stored in the database, the system
invokes the Station COS (Class of Service) or the COS (Class of Service)assigned to
Authorization code. Each Authorization code has separate Day/Night mode COS (Class of
Service)assignments.
There are two types of Authorization Codes, Station and System. A Station Authorization
Code is specifically related to a given station and intended for a single user. The System
Authorization Codes are intended for use by any station in the system.
The Station Authorization Codes includes the associated station number and the assigned
code. The structure of the System Authorization code can be set as either “*”, or “*” the
Authorization Table index and the code digits. The later allows duplicate codes to be
employed by using the table index to provide a unique identification of the entry.
The Administrator and Attendants are permitted to assign any Authorization code including
codes for another station. Normal users may only assign the Station Authorization code for
the specific station.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign your Station Authorization Code
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “33”, the Authorization Program Code.
3. Dial the Station number.
4. Dial the Authorization Code (1 to 12 digits).
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To enter your Authorization Code when second dial tone is received
1. Dial the Station number for the Station Authorization code or, for a System
Authorization Code, dial “*” or “*” and the Authorization Table index.
2. Dial the corresponding Authorization Code.
3. Place your call as normal.
SLT
To assign your Station Authorization code
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial SLT Program Mode Entry code “561”.
3. Dial Authorization Program Code “33”.
8
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4. Dial Authorization Code (1 to 12 digits).
5. Momentarily press the Hook-switch, receive confirmation tone.
To enter your Authorization Code when second dial tone is received
1. Dial the station number for the Station Authorization code or, for a System
Authorization Code, dial “*” or “*” and the Authorization table index.
2. Dial the corresponding Authorization Code.
3. Momentarily press the Hook-switch.
4. Place your call as normal.
DISA
To enter an Authorization Code when second dial tone is received
1. Dial the station number for a Station Authorization code or, for a System code, “*”
or“*” and the Authorization table index.
2. Dial the corresponding Authorization Code.
3. Place call as normal.
System Attendant
To assign an Authorization Code
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial Attendant Station Program code “031”.
3. Dial the Station number for a Station code or, for system code, “*” or “*” and the
Authorization table index.
4. Dial the corresponding Authorization Code.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. When an outside DISA Line is marked for Authorization Code entry, the caller will
hear fast busy tone and must input a valid Authorization Code to continue. In case
of an entry error, the caller may retry entry of the code.
2. A DISA caller must enter a valid code within the number of attempts assigned as
the FAC(Forced Account Code) Retry Count. The station, if enabled, is placed in
COS (Class of Service) 7 after repeated failure attempts.
3. A user may enter an Authorization Code from any station to place an outside call
using Walking COS (Class of Service).
4. The system provides memory for up to 5200 Authorization codes, 2400 for station
codes and the remaining 2800 are system codes.
5. Outside Line groups may be configured to require entry of a valid Authorization
Code for access. In this case, a second dial tone is provided when the Line group
is accessed. If the code entered is invalid, error tone is returned and the user must
enter a valid code within the FAC Retry Count.
6. If the Check Password option is enabled in the LCR database, when dialed digits
match the LDT Table digits, the system will send second dial tone to request that
you input a valid Authorization code.
7. An Authorization code may include any dial pad digit except “*” and “#”.
8. Duplicate or conflicting System Authorization codes are not allowed when using
9
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
the“*” and code operation. For example, code “*1234” conflicts with code “*123”
and cannot be recognized as a unique code. Since the index operation employs
the System Authorization Table index, codes cannot be duplicated and conflicts
will not occur.
9. Use of Authorization codes varies based on the system Nation Code. In some
regions, particularly the US and UK, a System Authorization code may be required
for DISA access. Entering a Station code on a DISA line will fail in these areas. In
other regions, a System Authorization code can be used with Walking COS (Class
of Service).
10. The system can be configured to require an End of Entry code or simply “End
Code”. If “End Code” is enabled, you must enter “#” after entry of the Authorization
code.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Station Account
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO/IP Group Authorization, DISA Account
Code
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes DISA Retry Count, AUTH Retry Count, Simple
Auth Code Usage, COS 7 When Auth Fail,
End Code(#) usage in System Auth Code
TABLES DATA
LCR LDT (Leading Digit Table)Check Password
Station & System Authorization Code Tables
Related Features









Account Code
Auto Service Mode Control
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Outside Line Groups
Outside Line Access
Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Call Forward
Station User Programming & Codes
Hardware
10
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.5
Issue 1.3
Auto Call Recording
Description
Your iPECS IP or LDP Phone and outside Lines can be configured to automatically record
calls to a Voice Mailbox, the hard disk drive of an UCS Client soft phone or an external call
recording server such as the iPECS IPCR. The type of calls recorded can be set as None, All
calls or Outside Line calls only.
When recorded to a mailbox, you manage the recording through your Voice Mailbox. For
recordings to the UCS Client, recordings are managed directly by the UCS Client with the
ability to listen to, delete or send the recording to others via e-mail. When using an external
server, use the procedures associated with the server.
Operation
Recording of calls is automatic when assigned.
To manage the recordings, use the procedures outlined in the iPECS UCS Client User
Guide, the iPECS IPCR Guide, or third party guide, as appropriate.
Conditions
1. The UCS Client can record one call at a time and must be idle. While recording, if
the UCS Client places or receives a call, recording terminates.
2. When call recording begins, you and the connected party will receive a Call
Recording confirmation tone and the tone may repeat at intervals.
3. The UCS Client used for recording must be operating in a ‘Local’ mode.
4. A third party SIP Voice Mail or recording server may be used to record calls. In this
case, the Recording Destination should be assigned with the Station group of the
SIP server.
5. When you activate call recording to an iPECS IPCR the entire call is recorded as
long as the call is active when you activate recording. It would be expected that
other SIP recording servers would provide similar On-demand recording.
6. The IPCR Agent Table in the iPECS UCP must be configured when using the
IPCR application or a third-party SIP recording server. Assigning an Agent Id
automatically enables Auto Talk Recording.
7. User cannot record individually 1:1 after starting conference in case of add-on
conference.
8. Only supervisor can record the conversation on Conference or Add-on conference.
Programming
STATION DATA
Station Voice Mail Attributes Two-Way Record, Auto Talk
Recording Option, Auto Talk Recording Destination
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes Auto Call Recording Destination
11
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
SYSTEM DATA
System AttributesRecord Warning Tone
System Timers Record Warning Repeat Timer
TABLES DATA
IPCR Agent Table
Issue 1.3
Related Features

iPECS IP or LDP Phone, PC with UCS Client, or Recording server

iPECS IP or LDP Phone, PC with UCS Client, or Recording server
Hardware
12
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.6
Issue 1.3
Auto Call Release
Description
Outside or intercom calls (except Hands-free Answerback), will be released automatically if
you do not complete dialing or, for intercom calls, the called party does not answer after a
pre-determined time. Also, the call (internal or outside) will be released if the time between
dialed digits exceeds the Inter-digit Timer.
Operation
System
Auto Call Release of Intercom calls
1. If you place an intercom call and the called station does not answer in the Intercom
Call Release Time, the call is terminated and you will receive error tone. In addition, if
the Inter-digit Timer expires while dialing, the call is terminated and you will receive
error tone.
Auto Call Release of outside calls
1. If you seize an idle Line and do not dial within the Automatic CO Release Timer, the
call is terminated and you will receive error tone. In addition, if the Inter-digit Timer
expires while dialing, the call is terminated and you will receive error tone.
Conditions
1. If the Automatic CO Release Timer is set to “0”, Auto Call Release is disabled.
2. When the handset is used to place a call, you will receive error tone for several
seconds followed by 30 seconds of Howler tone and the station is placed out-ofservice. If on-hook dialing is used, you receive error tone for one (1) second and
the phone returns to idle automatically.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Howling Tone to Station
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Automatic CO Release Timer, Station Auto
Release Timer, Inter-digit Timer
Related Features

Howler Tone
Hardware
13
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7
Issue 1.3
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description
iPECS ACD incorporates flexible incoming call routing, real-time agent monitoring and
supervision, and call record statistics as well as ACD Event messages for management
reporting.
Calls route to an ACD group directly or otherwise including via call transfer, CCR and ICLID
routing. The caller may receive announcements then route to an available agent. When no
agent is available, calls queue to the group awaiting a free agent. Should the call Overflow
based on number of queued calls or queued duration, the call can be routed to an alternate
destination.
2.7.1 ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing
Description
With Caller Controlled ICLID enabled for the ACD Group, at any time during or within 5
seconds after a Guaranteed Announcement, the system will monitor for digits dialed by the
caller. Received digits are compared to the ICLID Table entries. If a match is found, the call
routes to the destination defined in the ICLID Ring Assignment Table. Available destinations
are a System announcement, system speed dial, a station or a station group. If a match is not
found, the call remains in the queue for normal ACD group routing.
Operation
System
ICLID Routing of ACD group calls is automatic based on the ACD group assignments.
Conditions
1. The conditions of System Announcements and ICLID Call Routing apply.
2. Only the caller-entered digits are employed for ACD Caller Controlled ICLID
Routing, the Caller Id received from the network for the incoming call is not used
for this feature.
3. The ICLID Table routing is only followed if the 1st ACD announcement is
Guaranteed, ICLID Usage is enabled and the digits are entered during the 1st
Announcement.
4. The caller may correct an entry by dialing ‘*’ to erase all digits entered then dial the
correct entry.
14
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group AssignmentACD Group Type
Station Group AttributesEntered Caller ID(ICLID) Usage
ISDN LINE DATA
ICLID Route Table
ICLID Ring Assignment
Related Features



Automatic Call Distribution
ICLID Call Routing
Integrated Auto Attendant
Hardware
2.7.2 ACD Statistics Report
Description
ACD reports can be requested by the Supervisor and can be programmed for periodic output
over the SMDR port or selected TCP/IP port. The system will provide reports for the ACD
Group and Agent statistics as follows:
ACD Group Statistics Report
 Group Number
 Time stamp
 Total calls
 Number of unanswered calls
 Average queue time
 Longest queue time
 Total number of calls placed in queue
 Number of times calls experience all agents busy
 Total time all agents were busy
 Agent statistics for multiple groups
Average ring time before answer
 Group Number
 Agent Number
− Number of ACD calls served
− Number of unanswered ACD Calls
− Average ring time before answer
− Average ACD call service time after answer.
15
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {GROUP STATUS} button at the Supervisor
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “576” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To output ACD Statistics Report
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {GROUP STATUS} button.
[1] ACD STATUS
[2] ACD DATABASE
[3] ACD DUTY
[#] ACD PRINT
3. Dial “#”, the ACD Group Statistics Print code.
4. Press the [MUTE] button to initialize the ACD database after printing; this
eliminates overlap of future reports.
To output the Agent Statistics Report
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {GROUP STATUS} button.
[1] ACD STATUS
[2] ACD DATABASE
[3] ACD DUTY
[#] ACD PRINT
3. Dial “3”, the Agent code, the LCD menu will update.
[1] DUTY STATUS
[2] DUTY ON/OFF
[#] DUTY PRINT
4. Dial “#”, the Agent Statistics Print code.
5. Press the [MUTE] button to initialize the ACD database after printing; this
eliminates overlap of future reports.
Conditions
1. The ACD status can be printed periodically. ACD is output at intervals of the ACD
Print Time. The ACD records contain information for both ACD agents and ACD
groups.
2. The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be
logged into the group to access the Group Status display information.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan ACD Supervisor Status
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes  ACD Print Enable, ACD Print Timer
16
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
STATION GROUP
DATA
Issue 1.3
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Supervisor
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware
2.7.3 Agents
2.7.3.1
Agent Auto Connect/Zap Tone
Description
Calls from an ACD group can automatically connect to agents using a headset. This feature
removes the requirement for the agent to answer ACD calls manually. The Agent receives a
brief tone (Zap Tone), if assigned, and then the call is connected to the agent.
Operation
System
When Zap tone is enabled, operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1. The station must be in the headset mode for this feature to operate.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Zap Tone
Related Features

Station Groups

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
17
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7.3.2
Issue 1.3
Agent Automatic Wrap-Up
Description
When an Agent completes an ACD group call, the Agent automatically enters into the Wrapup state. In this state, an Agent will not receive ACD calls, allowing the Agent to complete
paperwork, etc. The Agent remains in this automatic Wrap-Up state for the duration of the
ACD group Wrap-Up Timer. After the Wrap-Up Timer or by using “Wrap-Up-End” feature, the
Agent returns to available status and can receive ACD group calls.
Operation
Activation is automatic when the Agent completes an ACD Group call
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {WRAP-UP-END} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “585” + ACD Group Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To manually deactivate the Wrap-Up state
1. Dial “585” the Wrap-Up-End code.
Or,
Press the {WRAP-UP-END}Flex button.
Agent SLT
To manually deactivate the Wrap-Up state
1. Dial “585” the Wrap-Up-End code.
Conditions
1. During Wrap-Up, the assigned {WRAP-UP-END} Flex button flashes. The button
LED extinguishes when the Wrap-Up Timer expires or if the button is pressed,
both actions return the Agent to the available state.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan Wrap-Up End
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Wrap-Up Timer
Related Features
Hardware
18
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7.3.3
Issue 1.3
Agent Help Request
Description
Agents request assistance from a Supervisor using the ACD Help Code, default “574”. Using
iPECS IP or LDP Phones, agents with the {HELP}Flex button can request assistance without
interrupting an active conversation.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign {HELP} buttons
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “574” + ACD Group Number (optional) + [HOLD/SAVE]
To request Supervisor assistance while on an active ACD call
1. Press the {HELP}button.
SLT
To request Supervisor assistance while on an active ACD call
1. Hook-flash.
2. Dial “574”, the Agent Help code.
3. Dial the desired ACD Group number.
Conditions
1. Agents receive error tone to indicate there is no active Supervisor.
2. No signals are sent to the active conversation and the connected party is unaware
of the request for assistance using the {HELP} button during a call.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLAN
Flexible Numbering Plan ACD Help Code
STATION GROUPS
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Supervisor
Related Features


Station Groups
Supervisor Help Response
Hardware
19
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7.3.4
Issue 1.3
Agent Id Login/Logout
Description
Stations or 4-digit Agent Ids are assigned as members of an ACD group. A station or Agent
ID can be assigned to a maximum of two (2) ACD groups. Each Agent has a unique 4-digit
Agent Id used to login and logout of active ACD group participation. Agents can login from
any station in the system but only at one station. When an Agent logs in, any active login for
the Agent is terminated and the new login is honored. An Agent may login to two (2) groups,
logging into and out of the primary and secondary group separately.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign {LOGIN} or {LOGOUT} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Login (“581” or “583”) or Logout code (“582” or “584”) +
ACD Group Number (optional) + [HOLD/SAVE]
To Login to a primary group using the Agent Id
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “581”, the ACD Agent Primary Login code, or press the Login Flex button.
3. Dial the ACD group number.
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Logout of the primary ACD Group
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “582”, the ACD Agent Primary Logout code, or press the Logout Flex button.
3. Dial the ACD group number.
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Login to a secondary group using the Agent Id
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “583”, the ACD Agent Secondary Login code, or press the Login Flex button.
3. Dial the ACD group number.
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Logout of the secondary ACD Group
1. Lift the handset or the press [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “584”, the ACD Agent Secondary Logout code, or press the Logout Flex
button.
3. Dial the ACD group number.
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged out of the ACD Group.
SLT
To Login to a primary group using the Agent Id
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “581”, the ACD Agent Primary Login code.
3. Dial the ACD group number.
20
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Logout of the primary ACD Group
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “582”, the ACD Agent Primary Logout code.
3. Dial the ACD group number.
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged out of the ACD Group.
To Login to a secondary group using the Agent Id
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “583”, the ACD Agent Secondary Login code.
3. Dial the ACD group number.
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Logout of the secondary ACD Group
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “584”, the ACD Agent Secondary Logout code.
3. Dial the ACD group number.
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged out of the ACD Group.
Conditions
1. The system outputs ACD events including Login/Logout messages when ACD
Manager Print is enabled.
2. The Agent Id can be any 4-digit number (0000-9999). iPECS does not verify the
Agent Id, other than requiring that four digits be entered.
3. Any Agent Id may be used to login except at a Hot Desk Station where a Station
Authorization code is required.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan ACD Agent Primary Login,
ACD Agent Primary Logout, ACD Agent Secondary Login,
ACD Agent Secondary Logout
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes ACD Manager Print
System Attributes Unified Message Format
Related Features



Station Groups
Hot Desk
Authorization Codes (Password)
Hardware
21
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7.3.5
Issue 1.3
Agent On/Off Duty w/Reason Code
Description
Agents can control their status, On/Off-duty, and assign a Reason code for an Off-duty state.
The system outputs the Reason code as part of the ACD Event Message output. The
Reason code may be any digit (0 ~ 9, * and #). With the exception of Reason code “0”, when
the Agent goes Off-duty manually, the Agent must return to the On-duty state manually.
If assigned as the Auto ACD DND code, using Reason code “0” activates the ACD DND
Wrap-up timer. At expiration of the timer, the Agent is placed back On-duty. This provides the
flexibility of an Agent activated Wrap-up time.
The Agent may assign an {ACD ON/OFF DUTY} button for easy access. The ACD group
number and the Reason code can be assigned in the Flex button for one-button operation. If
the button is assigned Reason code “0”, the Agent will return to On-duty status after the ACD
DND Wrap-up time.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign an {ACD ON/OFF DUTY (GROUP)} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “571” + (optional ACD group number) + (optional Reason
Code) +[HOLD/SAVE]
To toggle to Off-duty state from On-Duty
1. Dial “571”, Agent On/Off Duty Code.
2. Dial ACD group number.
3. Dial Reason Code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”).
Or,
Press {ACD ON/OFF DUTY} button and dial the group number and Reason Code
(“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”) unless assigned in the button.
To return to an On-duty state
1. Dial “571”, Agent On/Off Duty Code.
2. Dial ACD group number.
Or,
Press the {ACD ON/OFF DUTY} button and dial the ACD group number unless
assigned in the button.
To assign an {ACD ON/OFF DUTY, ALL GROUPS} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “58*’ + (optional Reason Code) + [HOLD/SAVE]
To toggle to Off-Duty status to both groups at one time
1. Dial “58*”, the All group On/Off-Duty code.
2. Dial the Reason code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”)
Or,
Press {ACD ON/OFF DUTY ALL GROUPS} button and dial the Reason code (“0”
~ “9”, “*” or “#”), unless assigned in the button.
22
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To return to an On-duty state for both groups at once
1. Dial “58*” the code for the All group On/Off-Duty code.
Or,
Press {ACD ON/OFF DUTY ALL GROUPS} button.
SLT
To toggle to Off-duty state from On-Duty
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial “571”, Agent On/Off Duty Code.
3. Dial ACD group number.
4. Dial Reason Code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”).
To return to an On-duty state
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial “571”, Agent On/Off Duty Code.
3. Dial ACD group the umber.
To return to an On-duty state for both groups at once
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial “58*”, the code for the All group On/Off-Duty code.
To toggle to Off-Duty status to both groups at one time
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial “58*”, the code for the All group On/Off-Duty code.
3. Dial Reason Code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”).
Conditions
1. The system will output an Agent Availability message with the dialed Reason code
when an Agent changes availability status. The message will include the button
type “Wrap” if the ACD DND timer is activated.
2. The {ACD ON/OFF-DUTY} Flex button will flash while the agent is Off-duty for any
reason. The button LED extinguishes when the Agent returns to the On-duty status.
3. While Off-duty, the supervisor's Flex button LED assigned for the Agent’s station
flashes at the DND rate. The supervisor may call the station overriding the Off-duty
status.
4. Only one {ACD ON/OFF-DUTY} button with the Group number can be assigned at
a station.
5. The default value of the ACD DND Wrap-Up Timer is 10 seconds.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan ACD Agent On/Off Duty
Flexible Numbering Plan Agent ON/OFF Duty in ALL GRP
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Auto ACD DND
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Wrap-up Timer
23
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Related Features



Agent Automatic Wrap-Up
Auto ACD DND Unavailable Service
Event Messages
Hardware
2.7.3.6
Agent Queued Calls Display
Description
An Agent can view the queued call status for an ACD group when not on a call, in On-duty
status or Wrap-up status. In addition, an active Agent can view the queued call status for an
ACD group while on a call using a{Display Call Queue} Flex button. The Call Queue display
indicates the ACD group number, the number of calls in queue and the longest queue time.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {DISPLAY CALL QUEUE} buttons
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “575” + ACD Group Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To display ACD Call Queue status when the Agent is idle and On-duty
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “575”, the ACD Call Queue status code.
3. Dial the ACD Group number. The display shows the Queued call status and will
update as the queue status changes. If no calls are in queue, the phone returns to
idle.
4. Hang-up to return to idle and normal display.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {DISPLAY CALL QUEUE} button. The display shows the Queued call
status and will update as the queue status changes. If no calls are in queue, the
phone returns to idle.
3. Hang-up to return to idle and normal display.
To display ACD Call Queue status when the Agent is on a call
1. Press the {DISPLAY CALL QUEUE} button, the queue status displays for several
seconds then returns to the normal call display.
Conditions
1. The Agent cannot display queued call status while the phone is ringing.
2. If there are no queued calls to display and you activate Queued Calls Display, the
phone returns to idle after providing error tone.
24
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan Display ACD Calls In Queue
Status
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Related Features

Station Groups

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
25
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.7.4 Announcements
Description
Each ACD group can provide announcements to incoming callers. Primary and secondary
announcements are available with control timers. The first announcement is played after
1stcontrol timer. The 2nd control timer determines the period between the first and second
announcement. The second announcement can be replayed at defined intervals. If desired,
the primary message can be defined to play in full to all callers as a “guaranteed
announcement” or only for calls that queue.
When enabled, a CIQ (Calls in Queue) announcement is played to callers that are queued to
the ACD group. The CIQ announcement (“Your Call is number xx in Queue”) is played to
queued callers after the 1st announcement is played and again after each time the
2ndannouncement is played. Internal callers using an iPECS IP or LDP phone with Display
also receive the “You are xx in queue” display message.
Operation
System
ACD group announcements are played automatically based on the ACD group
assignments.
System Attendant
To record a System Announcement for an ACD Group
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Announcement number (“01”-“200”)
5. Dial the language type (“1”~”6”), the current announcement is played followed by
the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the announcement.
To delete a recording
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Announcement number (“01”-“200”).
5. Dial the language type (“1”~”6”), the current announcement is played followed by
the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Press the [SPEED] button during playback to erase the announcement.
Conditions
1. ACD group announcements are recorded in the integrated Auto Attendant/Voice
26
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Mail. Up to two hundreds (200) Announcements are available for group
announcement recordings. Announcements 201 and 202 are reserved for MOH
and Multi Language selection announcements, respectively.
2. When equipped to support multiple languages, the Language selection
announcement is played prior to a guaranteed announcement, allowing the caller
to select between the languages equipped in the system (maximum 6).
3. To define a guaranteed announcement, assign 0 seconds to the 1st
announcement control timer.
4. The sequence number for the voice storage device is given in the Administration
and Programming Manual ‘System Overview Web page’.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Entered Caller ID(ICLID) Usage,
CIQ Announcement
Related Features



Integrated Auto Attendant
ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing
Multiple Language Support
Hardware
2.7.5 Auto ACD DND Unavailable Service
Description
An Agent who does not answer a call offered from an ACD group within the ACD No-Answer
timer is placed in a “No response” unavailable status, called ACD DND. In this state, the
Agent is Off-duty and will not receive ACD calls from the group. If the Auto DND Reason
code is “0”, after the ACDDND Wrap timer expires, the Agent returns to available status.
Otherwise, the Agent must return to the On-duty status manually.
Operation
System
Auto ACD DND activates automatically when Reason code “0” is assigned.
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To return to the On-duty status
1. Dial “571”, the Agent On/Off Duty Code.
27
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2. Dial the ACD group number.
Or,
1. Press the{ACD ON/OFF-DUTY} button.
2. Dial the ACD group number unless assigned in the button.
SLT
To return to the On-duty status
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “571”, the Agent On/Off Duty Code.
3. Dial the ACD group number.
Conditions
1. The system will output an Agent Available message with a Reason code when an
Agent changes availability status.
2. At the Supervisor's phone, the LED of a Flex button assigned for an agent’s
Station will flash at the DND rate. The supervisor may call the Station.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan ACD Agent On/Off Duty
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Auto ACD DND
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes No Answer Timer
Related Features

Agent On/Off Duty w/Reason Code
Hardware
2.7.6 Calls-In-Queue routing
Description
When a caller is queued to an ACD Group, various announcements may be played and
music on hold may be sent to the caller. The caller may dial a digit at any time while queued
to exit the queue, except during a Guaranteed Announcement. The dialed digit is compared
to digits defined in the ACD Group CIQ Route Table. If a match is found, the call is routed to
the defined destination (Station, Station Group, etc.). If a match is not found, external callers
receive an error message and are placed back in queue; internal callers are simply placed
back in queue.
28
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic based on caller input.
Conditions
1. ACD CIQ routing is not supported during or within 5 seconds of a Guaranteed
Announcement. Digits dialed during a Guaranteed Announcement use Caller
Controlled ICLID routing to determine routing as discussed in Section 2.7.1.
2. Dialing during ring back tone is not recognized by the system.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes CIQ Route Table
Related Features



Station Groups
Announcements
ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing
Hardware
2.7.7 Calls-In-Queue Page Alert
Description
The administrator can establish CIQ (Calls-In-Queue) thresholds for each ACD Group so that
an assigned System announcement plays over a defined Page zone, if the number of calls in
queue equals or exceeds a CIQ threshold. The message, which is recorded by an Attendant,
plays immediately or after a defined delay. The message repeats at assigned intervals until
the number of Calls in Queue falls below the threshold. The system allows different treatment
and announcements for up to three different Calls-In-Queue thresholds.
Operation
System
When the number of Calls-In-Queue changes, up or down the iPECS
1. Checks CIQ thresholds.
2. Determines if a threshold is reached.
3. Queues announcement for threshold (sets Delay timer).
4. Plays CIQ announcement.
5. Repeats announcement as defined.
29
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
System Attendant
To record a CIQ Announcement for an ACD Group
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the System Announcement number (“01”-“200”)
5. Dial language type (“1”~”6”), the current announcement is played followed by the
“Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the announcement.
To delete a recording
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the System Announcement number (“01”-“200”).
5. Dial language type (“1”~”6”), the current announcement is played followed by the
“Press # to record” prompt.
6. Press the [SPEED] button during playback to erase the announcement.
Conditions
1. Thresholds are assigned as total Calls-In-Queue to activate a Page alert and are
checked from lowest priority (CIQ #1) to highest priority (CIQ #3). Thus, the
highest priority CIQ defined should have the largest threshold and the lowest
priority CIQ should have the smallest threshold.
2. The System has two hundreds (200) announcements employed for Auto Attendant,
ACD groups, CCR, Page Alerts, etc. Two announcements are reserved for MOH
and multi-language support, announcements 201 and 202 respectively.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes CIQ #1,#2,#3 Page Alert
Threshold, Announcement Location ,Page Zone, Announcement
Delay Time, Announcement Repeat Time
Station Group Assignment VSF-VM Group Type
Related Features



Station Groups
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Internal/External & All Call Page
Hardware
30
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.7.8 Event Messages
Description
Each ACD group sends messages for group and agent events over a defined Serial or
TCP/IP port. These event messages are employed by 3rd party applications to provide
enhanced Call Center functionality. Details of the event messages are provided in the iPECS
3rd Party Support Guide.
Operation
System
When enabled, Event messages are sent automatically.
Conditions
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment  ACD Group Type
SYSTEM DATA
Serial Port Selections ACD Package Print
System Attributes ACD Manager Print (Output ACD Event
Message)
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware
2.7.9 Group Mail Box
Description
A Voice mailbox can be associated with a Station Group. Calls to the group are assigned to
over flow and can be otherwise re-routed to the Station Group Mail box where the caller can
leave a voice message.
Messages are retrieved in the same manner as normal voice messages employing the
assigned Message Wait Station number and the defined Group Mailbox Password.
Messages can be retrieved only if a {GROUP MAILBOX} Flex button is assigned to the
station.
31
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {GROUP MAILBOX} Flex button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + VM Station Group + Group Message Wait Station +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To retrieve Station Group Voice Mail
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the{GROUP MAILBOX} button to receive the “Password” prompt.
3. Dial the ACD Group number and Group Mailbox Password. The “Number of
Messages” prompt followed by Voice Mail instruction prompts are played.
4. Dial the desired option from the Voice Mail prompt.
5. At completion of the session, hang-up to return to idle.
To leave a voice message
1. After the Mailbox Greeting and beep, leave the message.
2. Hang up to quit recording or dial “*” for further options.
Conditions
1. The System Administrator or Supervisor may change the Group Mailbox Password.
2. An outside caller cannot access the Group Mailbox to retrieve messages.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment VSF-VM Group Type
Station Group Attributes Mailbox Message Wait Station,
Mailbox Password
Related Features




External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Station Groups
Integrated Voice Mail
Supervisors

iPECS IP or LDP Phones
Hardware
32
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7.10
Issue 1.3
Group Name
Description
Each hunt group is assigned a name of up to 12 characters. The name is employed as the
called party display for internal callers and in the output of group statistics.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment  ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Group Name
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware
2.7.11
Incoming Call Routing
Description
Incoming calls to an ACD group route directly to the station/agent that has been idle the
longest(Uniform Call Distribution) or are corded ACD group announcement. If all agents are
busy, the call is queued to the group or routes to the Alternate Destination. The queued caller
receives ACD group announcements or audio from the defined music source. Callers that
remain in queue receive audio from the defined music source or ring-back tone and, after the
defined Overflow time, route to an Overflow destination.
Agents can be assigned a priority from“0” ~ “9”, “0” being the lowest priority and “9” the
highest. When priorities are assigned, calls are routed to the highest priority Agent that has
been idle the longest.
If there are no Agents active in the group when a call arrives, the call will receive the “No
Member” treatment. Intercom calls receive re-order and external callers are routed to an
Attendant.
33
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
System
Routing of ACD group calls is automatic based on the ACD group assignments.
Conditions
1. The Alternate ACD Destination can be a group or a station but cannot be a
member of the ACD group.
2. The Overflow destination may be any station or group as well as the ACD group
Voice Mailbox, but cannot be a member of the overflowing ACD group.
3. If an agent becomes available during an announcement, except a guaranteed
announcement, the call is passed immediately to the agent.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment  ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Overflow Destination, Overflow
Timer, Music Source, Alternate Destination, Report No
Member, Agent Priority
Related Features

Automatic Call Distribution
Hardware
2.7.12
Supervisors
2.7.12.1 Agent Call Monitor
Description
Agent Call Monitor permits an active Supervisor to monitor an Agent’s call in progress for
training purposes or to assist the Agent. When used, the Supervisor is connected to the call
with the microphone muted, the [MUTE] button LED is ON. If ACD Warning Tone is enabled,
a Warning Tone is provided to the Agent’s call indicating the Supervisor has entered the call.
The Supervisor hears the Agent and connected party and may join the conversation by
pressing the[MUTE] button to activate the microphone.
The Supervisor station must be assigned an {AGENT MONITOR} button to activate the
Agent Call Monitor feature.
34
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign an {AGENT MONITOR} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “577” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To enter an active Agent call from the Supervisor phone
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Call the desired Agent and receive busy tone.
3. Press the {AGENT MONITOR} button, the Supervisor is connected to the active
Agent call with the microphone muted, the [MUTE] button LED is ON.
To converse with the Agent and connected party
1. Press the illuminated [MUTE] button.
Conditions
1. The Supervisor must be active and logged into the Agent’s ACD group to monitor
calls in progress.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering PlanACD Supervisor Monitor
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment  ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Supervisor (1 to 5),ACD Warning
Tone
Related Features

Station Groups

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
2.7.12.2 Agent Status Control
Description
An ACD Supervisor can view and control the status of Agents in the group with a {GROUP
STATUS} button.
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {GROUP STATUS} button at the Supervisor
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “576” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
35
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To view/control Agent Status
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Press the {GROUP STATUS} button.
[1] ACD STATUS
[2] ACD DATABASE
[3] ACD DUTY
[#] ACD PRINT
3. Dial “3”, the Agent Duty code, the LCD menu will update.
[1] DUTY STATUS
[2] DUTY ON/OFF
[#] DUTY PRINT
To view Agent Status
1. Dial “1”, the Agent Status Code.
ACD STATUS : XXX
TOTAL CALLS : XXX
2. Press [VOL UP] or [VOL DOWN] for:
− Number of ACD calls served
− Number of unanswered ACD Calls
− Average ring time before answer
− Average ACD call service time after answer.
3. Press the “*” key to view the status of the next Agent.
To control Agent duty status
1. Dial “3”, the Agent Duty code.
2. Dial “2” to set the Agent’s On/Off-Duty status.
3. Dial “0” or “1”, (“0”: Off-Duty, “1”: On-Duty).
Conditions
1. The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be
logged into the group to access the Group Status display information.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLAN
Flexible Numbering PlanACD Supervisor Status
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment  ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Supervisor1 ~5
Related Features

Station Groups

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
36
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.7.12.3 Group Status Display
Description
An ACD Supervisor may view the status of each of the ACD groups to which the Supervisor
is assigned. The display will give the status of the active ACD group at the time of the request.
The display indicates the following statistics:
 Number of calls in Queue
 Wait time for the call in queue longest and
 Agents in service and available
When a call is queued to the group, the ACD Supervisor is notified, in real-time, by the LED
of the {GROUP STATUS} button. The {GROUP STATUS} button allows access to the ACD
Group Status display or the Group Status code may be used to display the status information.
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {GROUP STATUS} button at the Supervisor
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “576” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To display the Group status when the {GROUP STATUS} button is flashing
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “576”, the Group Status display code.
3. Dial “1” to see the Group Status information.
Or,
1. Press the flashing {GROUP STATUS} button.
2. Dial “1” to see the Group Status display.
Conditions
1. The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be
logged into the group to access the Group Status display information.
2. The {GROUP STATUS} button will flash when the count of Calls-in-Queue
reaches or exceeds the programmed “Supervisor Call Count ”after the
programmed ‘Supervisor Timer’.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering PlanACD Supervisor Status
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment  ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Supervisor1 ~5,Supervisor Timer,
Supervisor Call Count
Related Features

Station Groups
37
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
2.7.12.4 Group Parameter Control
Description
An ACD Group Supervisor can adjust several of the ACD Group routing parameters in realtime. A {GROUP STATUS} button is required. Adjustable parameters are:
 Overflow Destination
 Overflow Time
 Wrap-up Time
 ACD Voice Mailbox Password
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {GROUP STATUS} button at the Supervisor
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “576” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To use the Supervisor Status Menu
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {GROUP STATUS} button.
[1] ACD STATUS
[2] ACD DATABASE
[3] ACD DUTY
[#] ACD PRINT
3. Dial ACD Database Code “2”.
4. Select database item, scrolling with the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button.
Overflow Destination-Station (Net station) (1), Group (2), VSF Announcement (3),
or System speed dial (4)
Overflow Time- xxx seconds
Wrap-Up Time- xxx seconds
Mailbox Password- up to 12 digits
5. Enter new data.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be
logged into the group to access the Group Status display information.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
Flexible Numbering PlanACD Supervisor Status
38
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
&NUMBERING PLAN
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment  ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Supervisor (1 to 5)
Related Features

Station Groups

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
2.7.12.5 Supervisor Help Response
Description
An Agent may request assistance from a Supervisor using the ACD Group Help Code,
default “574” or {HELP} button. The Supervisor is then notified of the Help request in the
phone display and a flashing {HELP RESPONSE} button. The Supervisor can respond using
the Help Response button, which is required, and be connected to the Agent’s active call with
the microphone muted. The Supervisor hears the Agent and connected party and may join
the conversation by pressing the [MUTE] button to activate the microphone.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {HELP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “574” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To request Supervisor assistance
1. Press the {HELP} button.
SLT
1. Hook-flash and dial “574”, the Agent Help code.
2. Dial the desired ACD Group number.
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {HELP RESPONSE} button
1. [TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “574” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To respond to a Help request, at the Supervisor Phone
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the flashing {HELP RESPONSE} button, the Supervisor is connected to the
active Agent call with the microphone muted, the [MUTE] button LED is ON.
To converse with the Agent and connected party
1. Press the illuminated [MUTE] button.
39
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Conditions
1. The Agent Help request is sent to the lowest numbered available Supervisor
station for the associated ACD Group.
2. If no Supervisor is available, the Agent receives error tone.
3. A Warning Tone, if enabled, will be sent to the Agent as the Supervisor is
connected to the conversation.
4. Only one active Help request is allowed at a time, a second help request will
cancel any active help request.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLAN
Flexible Numbering PlanACD Supervisor Status
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment  ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Supervisor1 ~ 5,ACD Warning
Tone
Related Features


Automatic Call Distribution
Agent Help Request

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
2.7.12.6 Supervisor Login/Logout
Description
Each ACD group is assigned up to five (5) Supervisors to monitor and control real-time status
of the ACD group and Agents assigned to the group. A Supervisor can be assigned to
multiple groups. The Supervisor login/logout feature provides a means for a supervisor to log
into one or more ACD groups and monitor calls.
Each Supervisor has a unique 4-digit Agent Id used to login and logout of active ACD group
participation. Supervisors can login from any station in the system but only at one station at a
time. If a Supervisor logs into a group from a station while logged in at another station, the
active login is terminated and the new login is honored.
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign {LOGIN} or {LOGOUT} buttons
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Login or Logout code (“572” or “573”) + ACD Group
Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
40
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To log in
1. Dial “572”, the ACD Supervisor Login code.
2. Dial the ACD group number.
3. Dial the Supervisor Id code (“0000”-“9999”).
Or
1. Press the Supervisor {LOGIN} button.
2. Dial the Supervisor Id code (“0000”-“9999”).
To Log out
1. Dial “573”, the ACD Supervisor Logout code or press the Logout Flex button.
2. Dial the ACD group number.
3. Dial the Supervisor Id code (“0000”-“9999”).
Or
1. Press the Supervisor {LOGOUT} button.
2. Dial the Supervisor Id code (“0000”-“9999”).
Conditions
1. The system will output a Login or Logout message when a Supervisor logs-in or
out.
2. The Supervisor Id can be any 4-digit number (“0000”-“9999”).
3. The system does not verify the Supervisor Id codes, other than requiring four digits
are entered.
4. Any Supervisor Id may be used to login through stations not assigned as a Hot
Desk.
5. The ACD Supervisor phone can be assigned an ACD Group Status Flex button
used to view the activity for the group when the Supervisor logs in to multiple
groups.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLAN
Flexible Numbering PlanACD Supervisor Login, ACD
Supervisor Logout
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment  ACD Group Type
Station Group Attributes Supervisor1 ~5
Related Features


Automatic Call Distribution
Hot Desk

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
41
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.8
Issue 1.3
Auto Called Number Redial (ACNR)
Description
This feature allows you to request and have the system retry a busy or no answer external
call until the call is connected or the feature is cancelled.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate ACNR while receiving busy, no answer
1. Press the [REDIAL] button.
2. Hang-up handset, or press [SPEAKER].
To cancel ACNR while idle
1. Press flashing [REDIAL] button.
To cancel ACNR during an ACNR attempt
1. Lift the handset or press the [MUTE].
SLT Phone
To activate ACNR while receiving busy, no answer
1. Place the outside call as normal.
2. If the called party is busy or does not answer, press and release the hook-switch,
intercom dial tone should be heard.
3. Dial “58#”, the ACNR code.
4. Wait Off-hook until the call is answered.
System
1. The system initiates the ACNR process, starting the ACNR Pause Timer.
2. At expiration of the timer, the system activates the station’s speakerphone with the
microphone in the mute mode.
3. The system attempts the previous call.
4. When the called party answers, the user may answer by lifting the handset or
pressing the [MUTE] button to communicate with called party.
Conditions
1. Four timers and a retry counter can be programmed.
ACNR Pause Time Time allowed between ACNR attempts.
ACNR Delay Timer At expiration of Pause Timer, if no Line is available,
the system will wait for delay timer before
attempting to access a Line.
ACNR Tone Detect After dialing, the system will abandon the attempt if
42
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
no tone or answer is detected within the Tone
Detect time.
ACNR Retry Count Count determines the number of times system will
attempt the call before ACNR is automatically
cancelled.
2. The call will be placed on the same outside Line as originally used. If the Line is
busy, an available Line in the same Line group will be seized.
3. The ACNR Retry Counter decrements by one when the system completes the
dialed number.
4. When the ACNR Pause Timer expires, if the station is in a busy state, the ACNR
Delay Timer is invoked.
5. Upon completion of dialing, the system will monitor the call for progress signals.
6. To preserve ACNR feature in the activate state, SLT users must stay in the Offhook state.
7. While in the ACNR dialing or waiting state, if the SLT user goes On-hook, SLT
ACNR is deactivated, automatically.
8. While ACNR is active for a SLT, the SLT user cannot receive or place a call.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan SLT ACNR
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers ACNR Delay Timer, ACNR Pause Timer,
ACNR Retry Counter, ACNR Tone Detect Timer
Related Features



LNR (Last Number Redial)
Speakerphone
Mute

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
43
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.9
Issue 1.3
Automatic Pause Insertion
Description
The system will automatically pause when dialing a Speed Dial number to allow for potential
connection delays.
The pause will be inserted when any of the following occur:

After a Flash is encountered in a Speed Dial number.

After a PBX access code is encountered in a Speed Dial or redial number.

After a Pulse to Tone Switchover is encountered in a Speed Dial or Redial number.

When a connect message is received on an ISDN Line.
Operation
System
The system automatically pauses dialing after an appropriate event.
Conditions
1. An automatically inserted pause is not counted as a digit in a Speed Dial number.
2. The LCD of an iPECS IP or LDP Phone will show a "P" when a pause is
encountered. This indication is not shown if the system inserts the Pause
automatically.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Pause Timer
Related Features





Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Auto Called Number Redial (ACNR)
LNR (Last Number Redial)
Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover
Hardware
44
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.10 Automatic Privacy
Description
Privacy is insured on all communications in the system. If desired, the customer may elect to
disable the Automatic Privacy feature, allowing you to join in an existing external
conversation uninvited. In such a case, a conference is established.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To intrude into a call when Privacy is disabled
1. Press a busy (lit steady) individual outside Line access button, you are connected
to the call with the existing internal station user.
Conditions
1. With Automatic Privacy disabled, privacy is still assured on all intercom and
conference calls.
2. To override privacy, Privacy must be disabled and the intruding Station must have
Override enabled as well as a direct appearance for the outside Line.
3. Only one station can intrude on an active call.
4. An intrusion tone can be provided to the call indicating another station has
accessed the Line.
5. If either internal party presses another {LINE}, a {DSS}, {PAGE}, [CONF] or other
conflicting button, the party is removed from the “Conference” and must press the
outside Line button to reenter the conversation.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Override Privilege
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Automatic Privacy, Privacy Warning
Tone
Related Features


Multi-Party Voice Conference
Station Flexible Buttons

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
45
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.11 Auto Service Mode Control
Description
The service mode defines different ring assignments, COS (Class of Service) and answering
privileges for the external network connections and Stations in the system based on the timeof-day. The service mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the Auto Ring
Mode Selection Table, which defines the time of day for the Day, Night and Timed shift
modes for each day of the week.
The Attendant may change the service mode selection from automatic to manual selecting
the Day, Night, timed or Scenario mode.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Station COS
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
Common Attributes CO Line COS (Class of Service)
SYSTEM DATA
DISA COS (Class of Service)
External Control Contact
PBX Access Codes
Attendant Assignment
SMDR Attributes  Long Distance Call Digit Counter, Long
Distance Code
TABLES DATA
Toll Exception Table
Authorization Codes Table
Auto Ring Mode Table
Related Features







Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Off-Hook Signaling
Authorization Codes (Password)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
System Clock Set
Outside Line Ring Assignment
46
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual


LBC (Loud Bell Control)
Dialing Restrictions
Hardware
47
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.12 Automatic System Daylight Saving Time
Description
The system can automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time (DST). When DST is enabled,
the system will adjust the system time forward one (1) hour at the DST Start time and back
one(1) hour at the DST End time. The system time is sent for display to all devices and
terminals and is the basis of the various time-based features (Auto Service Mode, Wake-up
Alarm, etc.).
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1. The DST Start and End times are set through the Web Admin interface only.
2. The interval between the DST Start and End times must be at least 7 days.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Data &Time  Time, Date
DST (Daylight Saving Time) Mode, DST Start Time, DST
End Time
Related Features



Auto Service Mode Control
Automatic System Time Synchronization
System Clock Set
Hardware
48
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.13 Automatic Time Synchronization
Description
When enabled, the system automatically determines and sets the time of day employing
Network Time Protocol (NTP) or ISDN time messages. When using NTP, the system, at
ten(10) minute intervals, requests the time from the specified NTP time-server and receives
GMT(Greenwich Mean Time) time. If the time deviates more than two (2) seconds, the
system clock is adjusted to match the NTP server.
When using ISDN, the system receives the time of day in ISDN messages and automatically
adjusts the time if the time in the system deviates from the ISDN time.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1. NTP packets are expected over UDP port 123. Assure this port is open and
available.
2. A secondary NTP server address can be defined should the first server not
respond.
3. The system adjusts for the local time-zone assigned in the system as the Standard
System Time as well as Daylight Savings Time (DST), if set.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Network Time & Date
NTP Attributes Network Time & Date, NTP Primary, Server
Address, NTP Secondary Sever Address, Standard Time
Zone, NTP Server Service, DDoS Protector
Related Features



Auto Service Mode Control
Automatic System Daylight Savings Time
System Clock Set
Hardware
49
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.14 Call Duration Warning Tone
Description
While on an outside call, you may receive a tone indicating the duration of a call has reached
the Elapsed Call time.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned.
Conditions
1. Warning tone is received 15 seconds prior to expiration of the timer and is
repeated at intervals equal to the Elapsed Call Timer.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Call Time Tone
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Elapsed Call Timer
Related Features

Outside Call Time Restriction
Hardware
50
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.15 Call Forward
Description
You can have selected incoming calls re-routed to other stations (local or networked), station
groups, the integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail, or over a system outside Line (Off-Net).
You select the type and condition under which calls will forward by entering a Call Forward
code as follows:
Code 0
Remote Call Forward, forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, activated
from a remote station, Call Forward, Follow-me.
Code 1
Unconditional, all calls to the station, except recalls, forward internally or
externally immediately upon receipt.
Code 2
Busy, if the station is busy, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected
station.
Code 3
No Answer, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected station when the
station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
Code 4
Busy/No Answer, forwards calls if the selected station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
Code 5
Attendant Off-Premise, forwards incoming outside calls to an outside number.
Code 6
Off-Net Unconditional, all calls to the station, except recalls, forward internally
or externally, only SLT.
Code 7
Off-Net Busy, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected station when
station is busy, only SLT.
Code 8
Off-Net No Answer, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected station
when the station does not answer within the No Answer timer, only SLT.
Code 9
Off-Net Busy/No Answer, forwards calls if the selected station is busy or does
not answer within the No Answer timer, only SLT.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Call Forward, (Unconditional, Busy, No Answer, or Busy/No Answer)
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button or Soft key. For the LIP8002, the [DND] button is used to
activate Forward.
3. Dial desired Call Forward code (“1”~“4”).
4. Dial the station or station group to receive calls.
Or, Dial an outside Line access code (9, 8xx, 88xx) and the desired external phone
number.
Or, Dial 587 (for Station ICR).
Press the[SPEED] button and dial the desired bin number.
51
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5. Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Remote (Follow-me)
1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] button to receive dial-tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button or Soft key. For the LIP8002, the [DND] button is used to
activate Forward.
3. Dial Call Forward code “0”.
4. Dial the station’s Authorization Code (Station number and password).
5. Dial the Forward condition (“1”~“4”).
6. Dial the destination station or station group.
Or,
Dial an outside Line access code (“9”, “8xx”, “88xx”) and the desired external
phone number.
Or,
Press the[SPEED] button and dial the desired bin number.
7. Replace the handset, return to idle.
To deactivate Call forward
1. Press flashing [FWD] button, Call Forward will deactivate and the [FWD] button
LED is off.
Or, for an iPECS IP Phone.
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive dial-tone.
2. Press the [FWD] Soft button. For the LIP8002, the [DND] button is used to
activate Forward.
3. Press the # dial pad button.
To activate / deactivate Call forward on LIP-9071
1. Tag a NFC card to 9071 NFC module.
2. NFC menu is displayed in 9071 display with NFC information.
3. NFC menu is chosen, NFC information is sent to system.
4. Call forward feature is activated or deactivated.
SLT
To activate Call Forward,(Unconditional, Busy, No Answer, or Busy/No Answer)
1. Lift the handset to receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forward feature dial code “554”.
3. Dial desired Call Forward code (“1”~“4”).
4. Dial the destination station, station group, or dial CO access code (9, 8xx, 88xx).
and desired external phone number or, dial 587(for Station ICR).
5. Momentarily press the hook-switch and receive confirmation tone.
6. Replace the handset to return to idle.
To activate Call Forward to a Speed number
1. Lift the handset to receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forward feature dial code “554”.
3. Dial the Call Forward code (“6”~“9”).
4. Dial the Speed Dial bin number.
5. Replace handset to return to idle.
52
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To activate Call Forward, Remote (Follow-me)
1. Lift the handset to receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forward feature code “554”.
3. Dial the Remote Forward code “0”.
4. Dial the station’s Authorization Code (Station and Password).
5. Dial the Forward condition (“1”~“4”).
6. Dial the destination station, station group, or dial CO access code (9, 8xx, 88xx)
and desired external phone number.
7. Momentarily press the hook-switch and receive confirmation tone.
8. Replace handset return to idle.
To deactivate the Call forward
1. Lift the handset and receive stutter dial-tone.
2. Dial the Call Forward feature dial code “554”.
3. Dial “#” to cancel Call Forward.
Conditions
1. A station receiving a forwarded call can transfer the call to the forwarding station.
2. A station, denied the use of Call Forward, will receive error tone in response to
attempts to activate Call Forward.
3. A forwarded intercom call will signal the receiving station in the Tone Signaling
mode, regardless of the Intercom Signaling Mode at the station.
4. You cannot forward calls to a station in DND and, if attempted, error tone is
returned.
5. Attempting activation of Call Forward will automatically deactivate any activate
Display Text Message or DND status at your phone. Active Call Back or Queue
requests are not canceled.
6. When Call Forward is active, you can make outgoing calls (internal or external)but
cannot activate a Call back or Queue request.
7. Your private lines calls will forward if the receiving station has a direct appearance
button for the Private line or if you forward to a Voice Mail group.
8. For outside calls, manually activated Call Forward will override any Preset Call
Forward assignment.
9. You may forward calls to the integrated Voice Mail without recording a greeting, in
which case, calls still forward to your Mailbox but callers receive the "No
announcement recorded" message before they can leave a voice mail.
10. Call Forward status is maintained in the system’s non-volatile memory for
protection from power outage.
11. A station in a Station Hunt Group (ACD, Circular or Terminal) can be assigned to
receive incoming hunt calls, overriding any Call Forward. That is, the system
recognizes the Forward condition for normal calls but routes hunt calls to the
station.
12. Off-Net Call Forward of incoming outside calls is essentially an automated DISA
call that establishes an Unsupervised Conference. Such calls are subject to the
conditions of a DISA call and Unsupervised Conference, and may require entry of
an Authorization Code.
53
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
13. Off-Net forward calls are not answered by the system until the system completes
dialing of the external call. The caller is then connected to the outgoing call.
14. If the Speed Dial number used in Off-Net Call Forward contains a Flash, only digits
prior to the Flash are dialed.
15. An unlimited number of stations may be set-up in a Call Forward chain, forwarding
calls from one station to the next. However, a station cannot forward calls to a
station already a part of the chain.
16. Calls to a Call Forward chain will progress as appropriate through the chain to the
last station. If the last station enters DND, outside calls revert to the previous
station while intercom calls receive DND tone.
17. No Answer forward employs the Station No Answer Forward Timer unless it is set
to zero in which case the System No Answer Timer is used.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common AttributesCall Forward
Station Timer Station Call Forward No Answer Timer
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Call Forward No Answer Timer
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Attributes Allow Forward Member
Related Features













Call Forward, Attendant
Authorization Codes (Password)
DND (Do Not Disturb)
DND - One Time DND
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Unsupervised Conference
Dialing Restrictions
Station Groups
Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Intercom Signaling Mode
Call Forward, Preset
Station ICR(Individual Call Routing)
Hardware
54
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.16 Call Forward, Preset
Description
With Call Forward, Preset, your calls forward to a pre-determined destination assigned in the
system database. Preset Call Forward can define separate treatment of outside and intercom
calls. In addition, separate busy and no-answer treatments are defined.
Treatments available are:
 Unconditional, all calls immediately forward,
 Internal Busy, Intercom calls that encounter busy, forward immediately.
 Internal No-Answer, Intercom calls that are not answered in the No-Answer time,
forward. Note calls to a busy station also forward after the No-Answer time.
 Internal DND, if your phone is in the DND state, Intercom calls route to preset
forward destination.
 External Busy, external calls that encounter busy forward immediately.
 External No-Answer, external calls not answered in the No-Answer time, forward.
Note calls to a busy station also forward after the No-Answer time.
 External DND, if your phone is in the DND state, incoming calls route to Preset
Forward destination.
Operation
System
Operation of Preset Call Forward is automatic.
Conditions
1. A station receiving a forwarded call can transfer the call to the forwarding station.
2. Manual Forward has higher priority than Preset Forward and overrides any Preset
Forward setting.
3. Calls to a Preset Call Forward chain will progress as appropriate through the chain
to the last station. If a station in manual Call Forward or DND is encountered, it is
by passed and the next station in the chain is signaled. If the last station has
entered DND, outside calls revert to the previous station, signaling until answered
or abandoned.
4. Internal Busy or No-Answer will only operate when the internal call encounters a
busy state or no answer, respectively. External Busy or External No-Answer will
only operate when the external call encounters a busy state or no answer,
respectively.
5. Preset call forward status is not shown in the LCD of the Station.
6. A station in a Station Hunt Group (ACD, Circular or Terminal) can be assigned to
receive incoming hunt calls, overriding any Call Forward. That is, either the system
recognizes the Forward condition and bypasses hunt calls around the station or
routes hunt calls to the station based on the system database.
55
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
7. No Answer forward employs the Station No Answer Forward Timer unless it is set
to zero in which case the System No Answer Timer is used.
Programming
STATION DATA
Preset Call Forward
Station Timer Station Call Forward No Answer Timer
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Call Forward No Answer Timer
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Attributes Allow Forward Member
Related Features







Call Forward
Off-Hook Signaling
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
DND (Do Not Disturb)
DND - One Time DND
Private Line
Hardware
56
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.17 Call Park
Description
You may place an active Internal & External call in a special holding location called a Park
Orbit for easy access from any station in the system. There are 200Park Orbits allowing
multiple calls to be parked simultaneously.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To park an active Internal & External call
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the Park Orbit number (#601~#800).
3. Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial the Park Orbit number (#601~#800).
SLT
To park an active Internal & External call
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Park Orbit number (#601~#800).
3. Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Park Orbit number (#601~#800).
Conditions
1. If the selected Park Orbit returns a busy signal, the user may simply dial another
Park Orbit without the need to disconnect.
2. Intercom calls cannot be placed in a Park Orbit.
3. A Parked call will recall to the station that parked the call should the Call Park
Timer expire. The normal Hold Recall process is then initiated.
4. A Parked call will indicate busy at all appearances.
Programming
STATION DATA
SYSTEM DATA
Flexible buttons  Programming (Numbering plan)  Park
Orbit number
System Timers Call Park Recall Timer
Related Features


Hold Recall
Attendant Recall
Hardware
57
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.18 Call Pick-Up
2.18.1
Directed Call Pick-Up
Description
You may answer (“Pick-Up”) incoming and transferred intercom and outside calls ringing at
another station. All ringing calls are subject to Directed Call Pick-Up except Private Line calls,
queue Callbacks and recalls from hold.
iPECS IP and LDP Phone users may assign a Flex button as a {DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP}
button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “*77” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “*77”, the Directed Call Pick-Up feature code.
3. Dial the number of the ringing station.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the[SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP} button.
3. Dial the ringing station’s intercom number.
SLT
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “*77”, the Directed Call Pick-Up code.
3. Dial the number of the ringing station.
Conditions
1. To pick-up an outside call, you must have an idle appearance button available.
2. When several calls are ringing at a station simultaneously, Call Pick-Up will
connect the oldest highest priority call (System Data Ringing Line Preference
Priority).
3. Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick-Up and such
attempts receive error tone.
4. Hands free announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station. Only
ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick-up.
58
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
RLP (Ringing Line Preference) Priority
Related Features




Intercom Signaling Mode
Ringing Line Preference
Group Call Pick-Up
Private Line
Hardware
2.18.2
Group Call Pick-Up
Description
You can answer (“Pick-Up”) incoming and transferred intercom and outside calls ringing at
another station in the same Station group. All ringing calls, except Private Line calls, queue
Callbacks and recalls from hold, are subject to Pick-Up by other stations in the same group.
iPECS IP and LDP Phone users may assign a Flex button as a {GROUP CALL PICK-UP}
button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “**” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station
1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “**”, the Group Call Pick-Up feature code.
Or,
Press the {GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button.
SLT
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “**”, the Group Call Pick-Up code.
Conditions
1. To pick-up an outside call, you must have an idle appearance button available.
2. When several calls are ringing simultaneously, Call Pick-Up will connect the oldest
59
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
highest priority call (System Data Ringing Line Preference Priority).
3. Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick-Up and such
attempts receive error tone.
4. Hands free announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station. Only
ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick-Up.
5. When a station belongs to multiple groups, calls to the group with the lowest
number are answered first.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment Group Type, Pick-up Attribute
SYSTEM DATA
RLP (Ringing Line Preference) Priority
Related Features





Intercom Signaling Mode
Ringing Line Preference
Directed Call Pick-Up
Station Groups
Private Line
Hardware
2.18.3
Pick Up Group Call Pick-Up
Description
You can answer (“Pick-Up”) incoming and transferred intercom and outside calls ringing at
another station in the same Pick-up Group. All ringing calls, except Private Line calls, queue
Callbacks and recalls from hold are subject to Pick-Up by other stations in the same Pick-Up
group.
iPECS IP and LDP Phone users may assign a Flex button as a {PICK UP GROUP CALL
PICK-UP} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {PICK UP GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “588” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station in the same Call Pick-Up group
1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] button.
60
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2. Dial “588”, the Pick-Up Group Call Pick-Up feature code.
Or,
3. Press the {PICK UP GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button.
SLT
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station in the same Call Pick-Up group
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “588”, the Pick-Up Group Call Pick-Up feature code.
Conditions
1. Pick-Up Group Call Pick-up applies to stations within the same Pick-Up Group and
does not apply to other types of Station Groups where Group Call Pick-Up may be
used.
2. To pick-up an outside call, you must have an idle appearance button available.
3. When several calls are ringing simultaneously, Call Pick-Up will connect the oldest
highest priority call (System Data Ringing Line Preference Priority).
4. Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick-Up and such
attempts receive error tone.
5. Hands free announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station. Only
ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick-up.
6. When a station belongs to multiple Pick-Up Groups, calls to the group with the
lowest number are answered first.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment Group Type, Pick-Up Attribute
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Pick-Up by Flex Button
SYSTEM DATA
RLP (Ringing Line Preference) Priority
Related Features





Intercom Signaling Mode
Ringing Line Preference
Directed Call Pick-Up
Pick Up Group
Private Line
Hardware
61
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.19 Call Re-Routing (CRR)
Description
The system can be assigned to route outside incoming calls based on the called number and
the Line group receiving the call. Calls can be rerouted to an outside telephone number, a
networked system or, using DISA to a Station. The reroute can be assigned for calls on a
Line group or on all Line groups. The received called number is compared to entries in the
database and, if a match occurs, the call is rerouted. The database called number entries
may include an “*” as a wild card digit, any digit will match the wild card entry.
Operation
System
Operation of Call Re-Route is automatic once configured.
Conditions
Call Re-Routing employs a Table with up to 170 entries.
Programming
SYSTEM
CO Call Rerouting (PGM252-Web only)
Related Features
Hardware
62
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.20 Call Transfer
2.20.1
Call Transfer, Outside Line
Description
If allowed in the system database, you may transfer an outside call over an external line to
another destination, establishing an Unsupervised Conference between the two external
parties.
If the receiving party is called through an ISDN or VoIP path, the Transfer Hold Recall Timer
is initiated and, if it expires, Hold Recall is initiated.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To transfer an active call with Screened Call Transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM]button.
2. Place the outside call to the destination in normal manner.
3. At answer, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM]button.
2. Place the outside call to the destination in normal manner.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
SLT
To transfer an active call with Screened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Place the outside call to the destination in normal manner.
3. At answer, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with, Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Place the outside call to the destination in normal manner.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Conditions
1. For this feature, at least one of the two outside Lines (transferred or receiving)
must provide detection of disconnect supervision and lost loop condition.
2. Calls on digital or IP Lines provide “Answer Supervision”, thus the iPECS system
can provide Transfer Recall.
63
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3. If, during the transfer to an external party, you press the outside Line of the original
call, the outgoing call is disconnected and the original call is connected to your
phone.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Off-Net Forward
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Off-Net Prompt Usage, CO to CO
Unsupervised Conference Time Extension
System Timers Unsupervised Conference Timer, Transfer
Recall Timer
Related Features



Hold Recall
Call Transfer, Station
Unsupervised Conference
Hardware
2.20.2
Call Transfer, Station
Description
After answering an outside call, you can send the call to another station in the iPECS system.
Calls can be transferred announcing the call (screened) or without an announcement
(unscreened).
When a call is transferred, the Transfer Recall Timer is initiated. If the timer expires before
the call is answered, the Hold Recall process is initiated.
A Flex button on iPECS IP and LDP Phones can be assigned for the DSS/BLF (Direct station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field) function, which allows One-button Transfer.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {DSS/BLF} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Station Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To transfer an active call with Screened Call Transfer
1. Press the[TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the station to receive the transfer.
3. At answer or splash tone, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
64
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Or,
1. Press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
2. At answer or splash tone, announce the call.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Press the[TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the station to receive the transfer.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Or,
1. Press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
2. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
SLT
To transfer an active call with, Screened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Station number to receive the transfer.
3. At answer or splash tone, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Station number to receive the transfer.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Conditions
1. The transferring station may camp a call on to a busy station.
2. The LED of a {LOOP} or {POOL} button will display the status of an outside call
until the station no longer has call supervision i.e.; the call is successfully
transferred.
3. To prevent Toll abuse, outside Lines without an active call (either incoming or
dialed digits on outgoing) cannot be transferred.
4. For outgoing calls on analog Lines, the system will monitor the Line for dial tone to
prevent Toll abuse.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Ringing Line Preference
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Transfer Recall Timer
Related Features




Hold Recall
Call Transfer, CO/IP
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Station Flexible Buttons
Hardware
65
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.20.3
Issue 1.3
Call Transfer, System Announcement
Description
You can transfer outside calls to a System announcement allowing the system to play the
announcement and, if configured, the party can then dial digits to route the call further.
After transferring to a System announcement, the system establishes DISA (Direct Inward
System Access) service for the outside party.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To transfer an active call to a System announcement
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM]button.
2. Dial ‘55*’ and the System announcement (01-200).
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
SLT
To transfer an active call to a System announcement
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Dial ‘55*’ and the System announcement number.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Conditions
1. Only an outside call can be transferred to a System announcement.
Programming
Related Features




DISA
CCR
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Integrated Voice Mail

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
66
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.20.4
Issue 1.3
Call Transfer, Voice Mail
Description
If permitted, you may transfer outside calls directly to another station’s Voice Mailbox, either
the integrated or an external Voice Mail system.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To transfer an active call to a user’s Voice Mailbox
1. Press the[TRANS/PGM]button.
2. Press the[MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button.
3. Dial the Station number or press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Conditions
1. The LED of a {LOOP} or {POOL} button will display the status of a call until the
station no longer has call supervision i.e.; the call is successfully transferred.
Programming
STATION DATA
Preset Call Forward Transfer to Mail Box
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Transfer Recall Timer
Related Features




Hold Recall
Call Waiting/Camp-On
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Integrated Voice Mail

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
67
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.21 Call Waiting/Camp-On
Description
Call Waiting is used to notify a busy station that a call is waiting to be answered. The busy
station is notified of the waiting call by a “Camp-On” tone. For users of an iPECS IP or LDP
Phone, the LED of the [HOLD/SAVE] button will flash.
After receiving a busy signal, the calling station camps on to the called station.
The called station can respond by:

answering the waiting call, which places the active call on hold first,

sending a silent text or voice message,

activating One-Time DND, or,

ignoring the Camp-On tone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate a Camp-On while receiving Intercom busy tone
1. Press the “*” button, the called and calling stations receive Camp-On tone.
SLT
To activate a Camp-On while receiving Intercom busy tone
1. Press the “*” button, the called and calling stations receive Camp-On tone.
Conditions
1. The user may only Camp-On to a station in the busy mode. A user may not CampOnto a station in DND, in a conference, receiving a Page, etc.
2. The Camp-On procedure is also employed by an Attendant or Secretary of an
Executive/Secretary pair to activate DND Override.
3. A Camp-On tone is sent each time the calling user presses the “*” button.
4. You can respond to a Camp-on by activating a Pre-defined or Custom Text
Message, or a System prompt can be configured to play to the calling Station.
Programming
Related Features





Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Intercom Call (ICM Call)
Silent Text Message
Voice Over
Hardware
68
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.22 Conference
2.22.1
Conference Group
Description
You can arrange stations and external contacts in groups so that you may create a
conference with all members of the group through a single call. Each conference group can
have up to 32members, including you, that can be a station or an external telephone number.
Conference groups are assigned in the iPECS User Portal (Station Web Admin) by assigning
members to a conference group.
Once the group is established, placing a call to the Conference Group initiates the
Conference Group call. The system calls each member and a System announcement, which
you pre-record, is played to members receiving the group call. Initiation of a Group call can
be password protected with a 5-digit password that you assign when the group is created.
There are two (2) types of Conference Groups, Station and System. The Station Conference
group is created by the station user. The user is assigned as the group supervisor, and is the
only member that can initiate a Conference group call. The System Conference Group is
created by an Attendant or system administrator and any member of the group can initiate
the Conference Group call. The member initiating the call becomes the supervisor for that
group call.
The supervisor can manage membership in the conference and can monitor the status of
each member, in/out of conference. The Supervisor can remove members from the
conference or add a non-member to the conference. An Absent Supervisor timer terminates
the conference if the supervisor is not in the conference for the timer interval. Setting the
interval to “0” disables this feature.
Once a group is created, the supervisor imitates the conference by calling the conference
group. The system then attempts to call each member of the group either simultaneously or
in turn using the Interval timer assigned for the group. Members that answer the call receive
the recorded voice announcement, if any, and can enter the conference, dial “1”, or reject the
conference, hang-up. The system will attempt to contact a busy or no-answer member based
on the assigned Retry Count. A call is consider no-answer using the No-answer timer set
when the group was created.
Operation
To create a conference group from the iPECS User Portal
1. Access Station Program in the Web Admin.
2. Select Conference Group button.
3. Create the Conference group entering:
− The name of group : up to 12 character,
− The password: Passwords must be 5-digits.
− Announcement number for the group: (pre-recording the announcement is
69
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
required),
− The Absent Supervisor timer,
− The No answer timer,
− The busy/no-answer Retry count,
− The Interval time: Each member is called in turn at expiration of the interval
timer.
4. Set the Member Attributes by entering:
− Index number
− Type: Station, CO Line, CO Group, Loop or Transit-out code (access loop
for networking call).
− CO value: the supervisor can select a specific CO line or CO group for
calling external members.
− Dial number: The station or external party number.
5. Press the Save button to store the Conference Group configuration.
To activate conference group
1.
Press [PGM] + “552”.
2.
Dial system conference group number.
3.
Dial password of the system conference group.
To deactivate conference group
1.
Press [PGM] + “553”.
2.
Dial system conference group number.
3.
Dial password of the system conference group.
To join system conference group
1.
Dial “Room Type Conf Group Join (5*0)” code.
2.
Dial system conference group number.
3.
Dial password of the system conference group.
Operation
IPECS phone & LDP Phones
To assign a {GRP MONITOR} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “55” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To initiate a Conference Group call
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “68”xxx, the Conference Group code and group number (xxx).
3. Enter the Conference group password, if assigned, members receive the
Conference Group call.
To enter a Conference Group call
1. Answer the ringing call and receive recorded announcement, if assigned and
recorded.
2. Dial “1” to enter the conference or hang-up to reject the conference. For iPECS
70
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
UCS clients, use Accept or Deny when notified of the conference.
To monitor conference member status or delete members while in the conference
1. Press the {GRP MONITOR} button, the state of the first member is displayed.
2. Press [VOL UP]/{VOL DOWN] button to display the state of other members.
3. Press the [DND] button to delete a participant from the conference.
To monitor the Group member conference status while Not in the conference
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “55”, the Monitor Conference Group code.
3. Press [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN]button to display the state of other members.
To add a non-member to the Group
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to place the conference on hold.
2. Call the desired party.
3. Press the [CONF] button.
Conditions
1. The conditions associated with Multi-Party Voice Conference apply.
2. Members using the UCS client Soft phone may view the state of other members in
the conference.
3. A maximum of 100 Station Conference Groups can be created by any system user
and 160 System Conference Groups can be created in the iPECS UCP system.
4. The user must have access to the Station Web Admin with the proper password
(Authentication code).
5. If there are insufficient Conference channels available when initiating the
conference group call, the initiator receives error tone.
6. Two-way record can be used to record the Conference Group call.
7. An MCIM is required to support 32 party conferences. With the MCIU, the number
of parties in the conference cannot exceed the number of MCIU channels (6 to 18).
Refer to the iPECS UCP Hardware Description and Installation Manual for MCIU
capacities.
Programming
Related Features



Multi-Party Voice Conference
Conference Room
System Admin Programming
Hardware
71
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.22.2
Issue 1.3
Conference Member View & Delete
Description
When you establish a Multi-Party conference, you are the Conference supervisor. As the
Supervisor, you can view, add, and remove parties from the conference. An iPECS IP or LDP
Phone with 3-Soft buttons is required.
Operation
IPECS phone & LDP Phones w 3-Soft buttons
To view and modify the Conference members, while in the conference
1. Select the {VIEW} Soft button, the LCD displays the first Conference Member.
MEMBER 01
STA 101
BACK
ADD
DELETE
2. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to scroll the list of members, use the
[ADD]button to add a member to the Conference, [DELETE] removes the member
from the Conference. The [BACK] button returns the display to the normal
Conference display.
Conditions
1. Only supervisor of Multi-Party conference can use this feature.
2. Only the iPECS IP and LDP phones with 3-Soft buttons can use this feature.
Programming
Related Features

Multi-Party Voice Conference

IPECS IP or LDP Phone models w/3-Soft buttons
Hardware
2.22.3
Conference Room
Description
In addition to ad-hoc Multi-party conferencing, you may open a Conference Room. Other
internal and external parties are invited to the conference and can join the conference without
further action by you, the Conference Room Supervisor. A Conference Room can be
72
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
password protected so that only parties that enter the password are allowed to join the Room.
As parties enter the Conference Room, a tone is provided notifying members that a party has
entered the conference.
Up to nine (9) Conference Rooms can be set-up and up to 32 parties with the g.711 or g.729
codec, or 24 parties with the g.722 or g.723 codec can be join a Conference Room.
Conference Rooms employ channels from an MCIM (Multi-party Conference Interface
Module) or the MCIU built-in the iPECS UCP100 and UCP600.
A system Attendant can view the list of participants in an active Conference Room and close
any Conference Room.
Operation
Attendant Phone
To view Room participant list
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “054”.
3. Dial Room number (“1”~”9”).
To delete a Conference Room
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “055”.
3. Dial Room number (“1”~”9”).
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To open a Conference Room
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “53” to create a Conference Room.
3. Dial the desired Conference Room number (“1”~”9”).
4. If desired, enter a password (exactly 5 digits) for the Conference Room.
5. Press [HOLD/SAVE]button to open the Room.
To join a Conference Room
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “59”, the Conference Room entry code.
3. Dial the Conference Room Number.
4. Dial the Conference Room password, if required.
To close a Conference Room
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “54”, the close Conference Room code.
3. Dial the Conference Room number (1~9)
4. Dial the Conference Room password.
5. Press [HOLD/SAVE] to delete the Conference Room.
To transfer an active call to a Conference Room
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “59”, the Conference Room entry code.
73
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3. Dial the Conference Room Number.
4. Dial the Conference Room password.
5. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
SLT
To open a Conference Room
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “53”, the Create Conference Room code.
4. Dial the desired Conference Room number (“1”~”9”).
5. Dial the Conference Room password.
6. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
To join a Conference Room
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “59”, the Conference Room entry code.
3. Dial the Conference Room Number.
4. Dial the Conference Room password.
To close a Conference Room
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “54”, the close Conference Room code.
4. Dial the Conference Room number (“1”~”9”).
5. Dial the Conference Room password.
6. Momentarily press the hook-switch, receive confirmation tone.
Conditions
1. Once established, a Conference Room will remain opened until the Room is
closed.
2. iPECS UCS Client, DECT, etc. may also create, delete and join a Conference
Room. For operation, refer to the soft phone User Guide.
3. An MCIM is required to support 32 party conferences. With the MCIU, the number
of parties in the conference cannot exceed the number of MCIU channels (6 to 18).
Refer to the iPECS UCP Hardware Description and Installation Manual for MCIU
capacities. Note the capacity of the MCIU is reduced by approximately 1/3 when
transcoding of complex Codecs is needed.
Programming
Related Features



Multi-Party Conference
Automatic Speaker Select
Hold Recall
Hardware
74
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.22.4
Issue 1.3
Multi-Party Conference
Description
The system allows multiple internal and external parties to be connected on a call,
conference.
An unlimited number of 3-party conferences can be established by iPECS Phones. In
addition, up to 32 parties with the g.711or g.729 codec and 24 parties with the g.722 or g.723
codec can be connected to a single voice conference using MCIM (Multi-party Conference
Interface Module).
The MCIM will support any combination of parties and conferences to the maximum total
number of parties in conference. Multiple MCIMs are installed to support multiple multi-party
conferences with a maximum of 32 parties in any single conference.
You can place a Conference on hold, allowing you to accomplish other tasks while permitting
the other parties to continue to converse.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To establish an ad-hoc conference
1. Establish the first call.
2. Press the [CONF] button. The LED will light, the connected party is placed on
exclusive hold and you receive dial tone.
3. Place the second call.
4. When connected, press [CONF], the new call is placed on exclusive hold.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 above to add additional conference parties.
6. Press the[CONF] button to establish conference.
To place a conference on hold
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, the [CONF] button LED will flash.
To retrieve held conference
1. Press the flashing[CONF] button, all parties reconnected.
SLT
To establish an 3-party conference
1. Establish the first call.
2. Momentarily press the hook-switch, the connected party is placed on exclusive
hold and you receive dial tone.
3. Place the second call.
4. When connected, momentarily press hook-switch twice in 2 seconds to connect all
parties.
Conditions
1. The [CONF] button remains illuminated at the initiators phone for the duration of
75
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Issue 1.3
the conference.
If the system receives a disconnect signal and no internal parties remain in the
conference, the conference is terminated and all parties are disconnected. If an
internal party is still connected when a disconnect signal is received, the
connection to remaining parties is maintained.
The normal Hold Recall process is applied to a conference on hold using the
Unsupervised Conference recall Timer for recall timing.
If while setting up a conference, system error tone is received, the initiator must
press the [CONF] button to regain Intercom dial tone; a SLT user must hook-flash.
A station that is busy, in DND or other non-idle state cannot be added to a
conference.
A SLT user can establish a 3-party conference only, but can be a member of other
multi-party conferences.
An MCIM is required to support 32-party conferences. With the MCIU, the number
of parties in the conference cannot exceed the number of MCIU channels (6 to 18).
Refer to the iPECS UCP Hardware Description and Installation Manual for MCIU
capacities. Note the capacity of the MCIU is reduced by approximately 1/3 when
transcoding of complex Codecs is needed.
Programming
Related Features





Automatic Speaker Select
Hold Recall
Unsupervised Conference
Broker Call
Conference Room

MCIU or MCIM for more than 3-party conference
Hardware
2.22.5
Unsupervised Conference
Description
Using your iPECS IP or LDP Phone, you may establish a conference with external parties
and exit the conference while allowing the external parties to converse privately without the
system supervising the connection through your phone. In this case, the system monitors the
outside Lines to determine if either party disconnects. In addition, the Unsupervised
Conference timer is initiated when an Unsupervised Conference is established. Fifteen
seconds prior to expiration of the timer, a Warning Tone is provided and at expiration, the call
disconnects.
76
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
If enabled, either party in an Unsupervised Conference can extend the Unsupervised
Conference beyond the timer expiration. The party enters the Timer Extension feature code
and a digit“1” to “9” indicating the Timer extension multiplier. The system extends the timer
based on the dialed digit multiple of the Timer. For example, if the Unsupervised Conference
timer is 5minutes and the user dials the digit 4, the timer will extend to 20 minutes (4
multiplied by 5minutes).
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To set up an Unsupervised conference
1. Establish a conference with external parties as normal.
2. Press the [CONF] button. The [CONF] button LED flashes to indicate the
Unsupervised Conference state.
To reenter the Unsupervised conference
1. Press the flashing [CONF] button.
Conference Party
To extend the Unsupervised Conference from a connected party
1. Dial “# #”.
2. Dial the Timer extension multiplier (“1”~”9”).
Conditions
1. The Unsupervised Conference Timer also applies to an external call placed by a
DISA line in the system.
2. An Unsupervised Conference will be terminated if the system receives a
disconnect signal or the Unsupervised Conference Timer expires.
3. An Unsupervised Conference will not recall the user.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan Unsupervised Conference Timer
Extension Code
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Off-Net Forward
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes  CO to CO Unsupervised Conference
Time Extension
System Timers Unsupervised Conference Timer
Related Features


Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Multi-Party Voice Conference

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
77
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.23 Customer Site Name
Description
A Name, up to 24 characters, may be entered into the system database as the Site name.
The Site Name, which is displayed on the SMDR and database outputs as well as during an
Admin session, is commonly used as a site identifier.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when a name is assigned.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
System ID Site Name
Related Features
Hardware
78
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.24 Data Line Security
Description
Data from an analog Modem or FAX transmitted over analog Lines is subject to distortion and
errors if system tones such as Camp-On and Override are applied during transmission. To
eliminate such errors, stations that use analog data (modems or Fax) can be assigned to
block incoming system tones.
Operation
System
System tones are automatically blocked when Data Line Security is assigned.
Conditions
1. Stations or an Attendant attempting to Camp-On or Override a station with Data
Line Security will receive error tone.
2. When Data Line Security is enabled, the system will not apply audio gain to the
call.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Data Security
Related Features



Call Waiting/Camp-On
DND Override
Intrusion
Hardware
79
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.25 Delayed Line Ring
Description
Ring signals for an incoming call on a “Normal” type outside Line can be sent to Stations
immediately upon detection or after an assigned ring cycle delay. The delay can be up to nine
(9) system ring cycles, thus allowing other Stations to answer the call. Note a “Normal Line is
a standard non-DID/DISA line which uses “Ring Assignment ”to determine the Station(s) to
receive the call.
Operation
System
Delay Ring operation is automatic when assigned.
Conditions
1. Outside Lines must be assigned an immediate ring destination. As a default all
incoming outside calls ring to the Attendant Station 1000 and, if no immediate
destination is assigned, the Attendant will receive ring for the call.
2. Delay Ring can be assigned for a Station or Station Group.
3. If zero delay is entered when programming Ring assignments, the Station will
receive immediate ring. If no delay is entered, the Ring assignment for the station
is deleted.
4. Private Lines may be assigned with delayed ring.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
Related Features



Private Line
Station Groups
Line Ring Assignment
Hardware
80
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.26 Delayed Auto Attendant
2.26.1
DISA Incoming Line-Russia-
Description
If the Country Code for the system is assigned as Russia, an incoming DISA call will be
answered after the DISA Answer Timer expires. After the DISA Delay Timer expires, the
caller is connected to the Auto Attendant System announcement “001”.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned.
Conditions
1. The DISA Answer and Delay Timers are only applicable when the Country Code is
set to Russia.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes DISA Answer Timer, DISA Delay
Timer
Related Features


DISA Service Attribute
DID Service Attribute
Hardware
2.26.2
Normal Line Ring Assignment
Description
An incoming outside call on a “Normal” outside Line can ring to the integrated Auto Attendant
either immediately upon detection or after a delay of up to 30 seconds. This allows other
stations assigned immediate ring the opportunity to answer before the call is routed to the
Auto Attendant. Once routed to the Auto Attendant the pre-recorded system announcement
plays and the routing associated with the announcement will apply.
Note a “Normal” outside Line is a standard non-DID/DISA line that employs “Ring
81
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Assignment” to route the call.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned.
Conditions
1. When Delayed Auto Attendant Ring is assigned, after the delay, the call will no
longer ring the assigned stations and will only ring to the Auto Attendant.
2. If no delay is entered, the call will ring to the Auto Attendant immediately.
3. To assign Delayed Auto Attendant ring, at least one Station or Station Group must
be assigned immediate ring.
4. Ring is assigned to a System announcement (01-200) or the AA Ring Time can be
set. In the former case, the call is immediately routed to the announcement. In
the latter case, the call will notify Stations assigned ring for the duration of the AA
Ring time, then the call is routed to System announcement number ‘001’.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
Related Features

Line Ring Assignment
Hardware
82
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.27 Diagnostics & Maintenance
Description
The system software incorporates various diagnostic and maintenance routines that may be
“called” remotely or locally through the systems RS-232 serial ports, a TCP/IP connection
using a Web browser established over IP networks or a PPP connection over ISDN. Routines
that can be accessed include trace functions at the device level, commands for diagnostics,
database and software upload and download, maintenance, and tools for manipulation at the
OS level.
Operation
Conditions
Programming
Related Features
Hardware
83
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.28 Dial-by-Name (Directory Search & Dial)
Description
A name, up to 16 characters, may be assigned to each station, and Station and System
Speed dial. In addition, each station may be assigned a 20-character name. When Names
are assigned, if using an iPECS IP or LDP phone, you may place an intercom call to another
station or select a Station or System Speed dial using the Name.
You select from one of three Dial-by-Name directories and enter characters employing two (2)
dial pad buttons for each character. The system finds and displays the nearest match to your
entries. You may continue entering characters or scroll the directory at any point using the
[VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button and selecting a name to call. The number associated with a
selected name is displayed by using the [TRANS/PGM] button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To use Dial by Name using a [SPEED] button
1. Press the [SPEED] button twice.
2. Dial the desired directory, 1: Intercom, 2: User Speed Dial, 3: System Speed Dial.
3. Search the directory using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button or by entering
characters. See Station Speed Dial for character entry procedure.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to place the call.
To use Dial by Name using the LIP-8000/8000E/9000 series w/3-soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Dial the desired directory, 1: User Speed Dial, 2: System Speed Dial 3: Intercom.
3. Search the directory using the Navigation buttons or by entering two digits for each
character, refer to Station Speed Dial for the Character Entry Chart.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to place the call.
To toggle between the name and number display
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
To program your Station User Name
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “071”, the Attendant User Name Program code.
3. Dial the Station number.
4. Dial the name, up to 12 characters; refer to Station Speed Dial for The Character
Entry Chart.
5. Press [HOLD/SAVE].
To search name through LDAP
1. Press the [DIR] soft button on LIP-8000/8000E/LIP-9000 that have soft &
navigation buttons.
2. Dial ‘4’.
84
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3. Enter the desired name for searching.
4. Press [Search] soft button.
Matched name is displayed on LCD.
The name can be scrolled by using navigation key.
5. To display the number of the searched name, press [DETAIL] soft button.
6. Press [SEND] soft button to call.
To search name by System DB and LDAP
1. Press the [DIR] soft button on LIP-8000/8000E/LIP-9000 that have soft&
navigation buttons.
2. Dial ‘5’.
3. Enter the desired name for searching.
4. Press [Search] soft button.
Matched name that is in system DB is displayed on LCD.
The name can be scrolled by using navigation key.
If there is no result for searching name, the [LDAP] soft button will be displayed.
If the user presses [LDAP] soft button, the name will be searched in LDAP server.
5. To display the number of the searched name, Press [DETAIL] soft button.
6. Press [SEND] soft button to call.
Conditions
1. Available characters are A to Z, space and period.
2. The LCD will display multiple names, one per LCD line up to 20characters.
3. If you select a directory with no entries or there is no match to the entry, the “No
Entries” message is displayed and error tone is provided.
4. Dial-by-Name is only available to iPECS IP and LDP Phones with a display. Other
users will receive error tone if an attempt is made to access Dial-by-Name.
5. You may both scroll and enter characters to search a directory.
6. The search feature is functioned for only LIP80xx/80xxE/90xx phone with 3 soft
button and navigation buttons.
7. After inputting digits more than 3, the searching is enable.
8. When a name is searched in LDAP server, maximum 40 names can be searched.
9. Maximum 50 keysets in UCP can be the searched name list(from LDAP) state at
the same time.
10. Maximum 50 keysets in UCP can be the searched name list(from internal
directories) state at the same time.
11. The search is possible only from the first character of a name.
Ex) if the user searches “bcd”, the “bcdmfg” is searched. But the “kmbcda” is not
searched.
12. If no action in directory/searching menu for a 30 seconds, the phone will go to the
idle state.
85
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
STATION DATA
Common AttributesSpeed Dial Access
Related Features


Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial

iPECS IP or LDP Phone models w/Display
Hardware
86
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.29 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover
Description
On a pulse dial outside Line, you can request the system to change the signaling mode from
pulse to DTMF. This allows you to access outside facilities that require DTMF signals such as
banking services, Voice mail, etc.
Operation
To switch from pulse to DTMF while on a pulse Line
1. Dial “*”, the signaling changes to DTMF.
Conditions
1. This command is only recognized for analog pulse dial CO lines.
2. Dial pulse to tone switchover is not available when using Redial to repeat a Speed
Dial number.
3. When “*” is the first digit of a dialed number, the Display Security feature is
enabled or is dialed as a normal digit based on the System Attribute. Otherwise,
when the system encounters an “*” in a Speed Dial digit string, dialing will pause
then the remaining digit are sent using DTMF signaling.
4. For VoIP calls, pulse dialing is not available thus; switchover is not required or
supported.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO Line Type
Analog Attributes CO Line Signal
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes First digit * in SPD
Related Features
Hardware
87
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.30 Dialing Restrictions
2.30.1
Class of Service
Description
Dialing privileges can be assigned for each station, DISA line and Authorization Code. Dialing
privileges are assigned in “Allow” and “Deny” Exception tables that are associated with a
COS. The dialing privileges are the result of the interaction of the Station and CO Class of
Service (COS)assignments and Exception Tables as shown in the charts below. Users
placing an outgoing call or dialing after answering a call will be allowed the dialing privileges
assigned.
Station Class of Service – There are eleven (11) Station Class of Service assignments, which
also apply to DISA and Authorization Code users based on the assigned COS.
Station COS
Dialing Restriction
1
No restrictions are placed on dialing.
2
Assignments in Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
3
Assignments in Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
4
Assignments in Exception Tables A & B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
5
6
7
The leading digit cannot be a Long Distance code and assignments in Exception Table
C apply.
Number of digits cannot exceed LD digit count and assignments in Exception Table C
apply.
Intercom and Emergency number calls are allowed. Incoming and transferred calls are
allowed.
8
Assignments in Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
9
Assignments in Exception Table E are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
10
11
The assignments in the Exception Table D & E are monitored for allow and deny
numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table A & B and D & E are monitored for allow and
deny numbers.
CO Class of Service – There are five (5) CO line COS assignments.
COCOS
Dialing Restriction
1
Dialing privileges are governed by the Station COS only.
2
Assignments in Exception Table A govern dialing privileges for Station COS 2 & 4.
3
Assignments in Exception Table B govern dialing privileges for Station COS 3 & 5.
4
No LD calls (LD code & digit count) and assignments of Exception C apply to Station COS
2 & 6 only.
88
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
COCOS
5
Issue 1.3
Dialing Restriction
No dialing restrictions applied, overrides Station COS 2 through 6.
Station and CO COS Interaction – The following chart displays the dialing capabilities based
on the interaction between the Station COS and CO line COS assignments.
Restriction
Station COS
(Class of
Service)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CO COS 1
CO COS 2
No restriction
No restriction
Exception Table
Exception Table
A
A
Exception Table
B
CO COS 3
No restriction
No restriction
No restriction
CO COS 4
No LD calls &
Table C
No LD calls &
Table C
Exception Table
No LD calls &
B
Table C
Exception Table
Exception Table
Exception Table
No LD calls &
A&B
A
B
Table C
Local call & Table Local call & Table Local call & Table No LD calls &
C
C
C
Table C
Local call & Table Local call & Table Local call & Table No LD calls &
C
C
C
Table C
Intercom only
Intercom only
Intercom only
Intercom only
Exception Table
Exception Table
D
D
Exception Table
Exception Table
E
E
Exception Table
Exception Table
D&E
D&E
Exception Table
Exception Table
A, B, D & E
A, B, D & E
No restriction
No restriction
No restriction
No restriction
No LD calls &
Table C
No LD calls &
Table C
No LD calls &
Table C
No LD calls &
Table C
CO COS 5
No restriction
No restriction
No restriction
No restriction
No restriction
No restriction
Intercom only
No restriction
No restriction
No restriction
No restriction
PBX Dialing Codes – Four (4) one or two-digit PBX Trunk Access Codes can be defined in
the system database. When dialed as the first digit(s), these codes signal the system to apply
the appropriate COS. If not dialed, the call is treated as an internal PBX call and dialing is not
restricted.
Exception Tables – Each Exception Table permits entry of 50 Allow codes and 50 Deny
codes. Each code can contain up to 20 digits including digits 0-9, “#” as a wild card (any digit)
and “*”as the end of entry mark. Reference the previous charts for application of the
Exception Tables.
Exception Table process – As digits are dialed, they are compared to entries in the
appropriate Exception Table. Based on the Allow and Deny entries, the system applies the
following rules to allow or deny the call.
89
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Rule 1
Rule 2
Rule 3
Rule 4
Issue 1.3
If a table has no entries, no restrictions are applied.
If there are only Deny entries, restrictions are provided as Deny only.
If there are only Allow entries, restrictions are provided as Allow only.
If there are both Allow and Deny entries, the Deny entries are searched. If the
dialed number matches a Deny entry, and it is not part of an Allow entry the call
is restricted; if no match is found the call is allowed.
For example, if 2223 is
assigned in the Allow Table and 222 is assigned in the Deny Table numbers
starting with 222 are denied except for 2223.
Operation
System
The system automatically applies the assigned COS.
Conditions
1. The dialing privileges are based on the CO and Station COS.
2. When you enter an Authorization code, the COS associated with the code may be
selected for the call.
Programming
STATION DATA
Station COS (Class of Service)
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO Line COS
SYSTEM DATA
DISA COS (Class of Service)
PBX Access Codes
SMDR Attributes Long Distance Call Digit Counter, Long
Distance Call Code
TABLES DATA
Toll Exception Tables
Related Features




Day/Timed & Night Station COS (Class of Service)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Hardware
90
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.30.2
Issue 1.3
Day/Timed & Night Station COS (Class of Service)
Description
Each station, DISA line and Authorization code is assigned a COS (Class of Service) for two
modes: Day, which includes Timed, and Night service modes. The service mode is generally
controlled by the System Attendant or automatically and, based on the mode, appropriate
dialing privileges are established.
Operation
System
Dialing restrictions are automatically applied based on COS assignments.
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Station COS (Class of Service)
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes  CO Line COS (Class of Service)
SYSTEM DATA
DISA COS (Class of Service)
PBX Access Codes
SMDR Attributes  Long Distance Call Digit Counter, Long
Distance Call Code
TABLES DATA
Toll Exception Tables
Related Features







Authorization Codes (Password)
Class of Service
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Auto Service Mode Control
Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Hardware
91
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.30.3
Issue 1.3
Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock
Description
You or an Attendant can change the Station’s Class of Service to COS 7, temporarily
preventing unauthorized outside calls from the station, i.e. “lock the station”. The Station can
still place internal calls and Emergency number calls.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Temporary COS
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “21”, the Temp COS code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To restore the assigned COS
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “22”, the restore COS code.
3. Dial Authorization Code (station number and code).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
SLT
To activate Temporary COS
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “21”, the Temp COS code.
4. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
To restore the assigned COS
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “22”, the restore COS code.
4. Dial Authorization Code (station number and code).
5. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
System Attendant
To activate Temporary COS
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “021”, the Temp COS code.
3. Dial the Station range. If only one Station is to be assigned Temp COS, dial the
Station number twice.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To restore the assigned COS
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “022”, the restore COS code.
92
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3. Dial the Station range. If only one Station is to be assigned Temp COS, dial that
Station number twice.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. When the COS of a Station is restored the Station COS is changed to the COS
assigned for the active service mode, Day, Night, or Timed.
Programming
STATION DATA
Station COS (Class of Service)
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO Line COS (Class of Service)
SYSTEM DATA
DISA COS (Class of Service)
PBX Access Codes
SMDR Attributes Long Distance Call Digit Counter, Long
Distance Call Code
TABLES DATA
Toll Exception Tables
Station/System Authorization Codes Table
Related Features





Class of Service
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Auto Service Mode Control
Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Authorization Codes (Password)
Hardware
2.30.4
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Description
You may temporarily override the toll restriction of a Station to make outside toll calls from a
normally toll restricted Station. You must input an Authorization Code in order to activate
Walking COS (Class of Service) and are subject to the COS of the Authorization Code. The
COS associated with the Authorization Code is applied for the next call.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Walking COS
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
93
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2. Dial “23”, the Walking COS code.
3. Dial the Station number and Authorization code, “*” and System Authorization
code or“*”, the code index and System Authorization code.
4. Place your call as normal.
SLT
To activate Walking COS
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “23”, the Walking COS code.
4. Dial the Station number and Authorization code, “*” and System Authorization
code or“*”, the code index and System Authorization code.
5. Place your call as normal.
Conditions
1. The Station COS applied for Walking COS is the COS of the Authorization code
entered.
2. Walking COS applies the COS for only one call. Terminating the call returns the
station to the assigned Station COS. The user may reactivate Walking COS to
place another call or use Flash to maintain the Walking COS.
3. Use of Authorization codes varies based on the Country Code assigned in the
system database. In some regions, particularly the US and UK, a System
Authorization code may be required for DISA access. Entering a Station code on a
DISA line will fail in these areas. In other regions, a System Authorization code can
be used with Walking COS.
Programming
STATION DATA
Station COS (Class of Service)
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes  CO Line COS (Class of Service)
SYSTEM DATA
DISA COS (Class of Service)
PBX Access Codes
SMDR Attributes  Long Distance Call Digit Counter, Long
Distance Call Code
TABLES DATA
Toll Exception Tables
Station/System Authorization Codes Table
Related Features




Class of Service
Auto Service Mode Control
Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Authorization Codes (Password)
Hardware
94
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.31 Digit Conversion
Description
When a system receives digits from station, CO line, the dialed digits are converted
according to the Digit Conversion Table before the Numbering Plan is checked.
When you place an outside call the digits you dial are compared with the Digit Conversion
Table. If a match is found, the digits are converted as defined in the table. Within the table
are 32 sub-tables with up to 200 entries of up to sixteen digits for each sub-table for UCP.
Different conversion can be assigned for the same dialed number based on the system
service mode and LCR configuration. Conversion can also be limited to outside calls from a
station or an outside Line. The latter may be used in networked environments where a
system in the network employs Lines from another system to place a call.
Operation
CO.
Called party(DID) number is changed with digit conversion table.
Then, system analyze converted number with DID process.
Station
Dialed digit from user is changed with digit conversion table.
Then, system analyze converted number with outgoing process.
Conditions
1. Each Station, CO line can have a Digit Conversion Tables.
2. Emergency code takes priority over digit conversion.
3. Dummy dial tone can be provided during digit conversion
95
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4. There are two (2) special entries for configuring digit conversion:
− X: Mask Digit, any digit is accepted
− F: Ignore Digit
Programming
TABLE DATA
Digit conversion Table (PGM 270)
STATION DATA
Common Attribute Digit conversion table
CO LINE DATA
Common Attribute Digit conversion table index
Related Features
Hardware
96
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.32 Alternative Route Selection(ARS) for Digit
conversion table
Description
This feature is enabled if there are several paths in order to connect toward a destination
System when a user use digit conversion feature.
If a selected path is not available for some reason (All Busy, Line Fault, etc) after digit
conversion, Alternative Route Selection (ARS) will connect calls using predefined designated
path in digit conversion table.
Operation
If set, Alternative Route Selection operation is automatic.
Conditions
1. ARS is optional and ARS digit in digit conversion table must be programmed to be
operational.
2. ARS digits should be contained in the CO Group Access Code
3. ARS can be used in coordination with Last Number Redial, Station Speed Dial,
and System Speed Dial.
Programming
TABLE DATA
Digit conversion Table (PGM 270)
STATION DATA
Common Attribute Digit conversion table
CO LINE DATA
Common Attribute Digit conversion table index
Related Features
97
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.33 Differential Ring
Description
Differential Ring allows any one of 14 different audible Ring signals to be assigned to iPECS
IP Phonesand15 Ring signals for the LDP Phones, allowing you to determine which phone is
ringing and the type of call (Intercom or external). When the phone receives an incoming call,
the selected ring signal is provided over the speaker. Different selections are assigned for
Intercom and outside calls.
Eight different tones are stored in the iPECS IP Phones. Four of these tones are permanent
while the other four are downloaded from the 10 ring-tones in the iPECS system. Note the
system ring-tones may be replaced with any eight (8) second *.wav file through the iPECS
Web Maintenance.
In addition, each outside Line can be configured to provide one of twelve different ring tones
so that you can determine which outside Line is ringing.
Operation
iPECS IP Phones
To select the desired ring tone
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “1” for Ring Selection.
3. Dial “1” for Intercom or “2” for outside Line ring.
4. Dial Ring Tone selection “1”-“8”, the ring tone is received.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To download a Ring tone from the system to an iPECS IP Phone
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 1 for Ring selection.
3. Dial 5 for Ring tone download.
4. Dial the Ring tone storage bin “5”-“8”.
5. Dial the Ring tone selection, “0”-“9”, the tone is received.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
LDP Phones
To select the desired ring tone
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “1” for Ring Selection.
3. Dial “1” for Intercom or “2” for outside Line ring.
4. Dial Ring Tone selection “1”-“15”, the ring tone is received.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. To employ one of the system Ring tones, it must first be downloaded to a Ring
98
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
tone storage bin in the iPECS IP Phone.
2. The iPECS UCS Client Soft phones do not have access to the system Ring tones.
In the iPECS UCS Client phones multiple tones are available and you may load an
*.wav file for use as a Ring tone.
3. In case of LDP Phones, 15 ring tones can be served from the memory in the
phone.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
99
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.34 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Description
You can activate DND at your phone to prevent incoming calls from ringing at the station.
This can be useful, for example, when you are in a meeting or busy. DND will also block
Page announcements.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate DND
1. Press the [DND] button, the [DND] button LED illuminates.
To remove DND
1. Press the [DND] button, the [DND] button LED extinguishes.
SLT
To activate DND
1. Dial “553”, the DND feature code; stutter dial tone is received.
To remove DND
1. Dial “553”, the DND feature code, dial tone is received.
Conditions
1. A station will receive error tone if not allowed access to DND.
2. If DND is allowed, pressing the [DND] button while ringing will activate One-Time
DND.
3. Only the Secretary of and Executive/Secretary Pair or an Attendant may override
DND at the Executive’s station.
4. An Attendant may cancel DND for other stations.
5. DND service is not available to Attendants.
6. Recalls for outside calls will override the DND feature.
7. A station in DND is out-of-service for all incoming calls including Station Group
calls.
8. A station in DND is bypassed by calls forwarded to the Station. If the last Station in
a Call Forward chain is in DND, the call will ring to the previous Station in the chain.
9. When calling a Station in DND, an iPECS IP or LDP Phone display will indicate the
DND status.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes DND
Related Features
100
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual







Feature Cancel
Intrusion
Call Forward
DND Override
Executive/Secretary Forward
Station Groups
DND - One Time DND
Hardware
101
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.35 Door Open
Description
The iPECS UCP modules are equipped with relays that activate External Control Contacts.
The contacts can be assigned to one of several functions including a Door Open Contact.
When used as a Door Open Contact, the contact is connected to a door-lock release
mechanism. When assigned stations receive the Door Bell signal, the user may dial the Door
Open code to activate the contact.
iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned a Flex button as a {DOOR OPEN} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {DOOR OPEN} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Door Open code (“#*1” or “#*2”) + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate the relay contact
1. Lift the handset or press the[SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial the Door Open code, “#*1” in UCP100 or “#*1”to “#*4” in UCP600 and
UCP2400.
3. Hang-up to return to idle.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the[SPEAKER].
2. Press the {DOOR OPEN} button.
3. Hang-up to return to idle.
Conditions
1. The UCP100 has a single External Control Contact while the UCP600 and
UCP2400 each have four (4) External Control Contacts. Please refer to the iPECS
UCP Hardware Description and Installation Manual for installation directions.
2. The Door Open feature dial code is based on the assigned External Contact as
below:
 External Contact 1 = “#*1”
 External Contact 2 = “#*2”
 External Contact 3 = “#*3”
 External Contact 4 = “#*4”
3. The contacts are rated at 1 amp, 24 VDC.
4. A station will receive error tone if not allowed access to the Door Open feature in
Station Data Common Attributes.
Programming
STATION
Common Attributes Door Open
SYSTEM DATA
External Control Contacts
102
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
System Timers Door Open Timer
Related Features


LBC (Loud Bell Control)
Alarm Signal/Door Bell

External Control Contact connected to a door-lock release mechanism.
Hardware
103
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.36 Emergency Call Service
2.36.1
Emergency Call
Description
Regardless of a Station’s dialing restrictions (Class of Service), the user may dial any
assigned Emergency numbers.
Operation
System
The system will automatically override any toll restrictions and process an assigned
Emergency number call.
Conditions
1. If there is no idle outside Line for the emergency call, a busy Line will be forced to
release the current call and used for emergency call.
2. An emergency call can be placed without a Line access code, except Australia. If
an emergency number conflicts with the Station Numbering Plan, emergency calls
must use a Line access code. For example, if the emergency number is “112” and
the Station Numbering Plan is 100~, you must dial a Line access code before
dialing the emergency number “112”.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Emergency CO or Group
TABLES DATA
Emergency Code Table
Related Features
Hardware
2.36.2
Emergency Call Caller-Location Support
Description
Emergency Call - Caller Location Support integrates the iPECS UCP with a PBX ANI Link
unit, such as from Tone Commander, to provide Caller Id and location information to an
Emergency Call Center. When an Emergency call is placed from a Station, an assigned
104
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
emergency outside Line is used to connect the ANI Link unit. The iPECS sends the Station
number, up to eight (8) digits, to the unit as DTMF digits. The ANI Link unit places a call to
the Emergency Center over a connected CAMA trunk. Caller Id and location information from
the ANI Link unit database is sent to the Emergency Center in the proper format and the
Station is connected to the call.
This feature also provides a means to identify a Power Failure signal from the ANI Link unit.
Typically, an ANI Link unit will incorporate a normally open contact that closes when power to
the unit fails. If a Power Failure signal is detected, iPECS routes emergency calls via outside
lines other than those marked for emergency call use until the Power Fail signal is removed.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes  Emergency CO or Group, Proctor
Monitoring Power-Failure
CO LINE DATA
Analog Attributes  PROCTOR SERVICE ON/OFF
TABLES DATA
Emergency Code Table
Conditions
1. The system analog CO Lines connected to the ANI Link unit must be assigned to a
separate Line group and the individual Lines assigned for emergency service.
2. The ANI Link unit must be properly connected to a SLT port, an analog CO Line
port and on the same LAN as the iPECS UCP module.
3. The ANI Link unit must be properly installed and connected to a CAMA trunk from
the carrier service provider to send location information to the local Emergency
Center.
4. It is the Customer’s responsibility to maintain the ANI Link unit number and
location database; there is no integration provided between the iPECS database
and the ANI Link unit.
5. During a power failure, if the ANI Link unit Power Fail normally open contacts are
connected to a system SLT port, the iPECS will recognize the fault and emergency
calls are not sent to the ANI Link unit. In this situation, emergency calls are sent
over normal outside lines connected to the system and the station digits are not
sent.
6. SMDR output will identify any call made via the Emergency Call feature, including
the success or failure of such calls.
Related Features


Emergency Call
Emergency Call Attendant Alert
105
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Hardware




2.36.3
Tone Commander PBX ANI Link unit or equal
CAMA Trunk
SLT port connected to ANI Link unit
Analog Line connected to ANI Link unit
Emergency Call –Bomb Threat History
Description
When a station user is talking with an outside party, the user can save the telephone
number of outside party to the Threat History log and record the call in the Emergency
Mailbox.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a{Bomb Threat History} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] button + 8*3 + [HOLD/SAVE]]
To activate a{Bomb Threat History}while on an outside call
1. Press the{Bomb Threat History} button, the telephone number of outside party is
saved and the call is recorded to the built-in Voice Mailbox of the assigned
Emergency Mailbox Station.
Attendant iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To view the history log
1. Press {Bomb Threat History} button, information on latest Bomb Threat log
displays with the telephone number and the time when the button was pressed.
Conditions
1. The UCP system can save up to eight (8)Bomb Threat History records. When the
log is full,, the oldest of the eight records will be deleted then the new record is
saved to the log.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Emergency Mailbox Station
Related Features
Hardware
106
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.36.4
Issue 1.3
Emergency Mailbox
Description
When a station makes an Emergency call or the Threat History button pressed, the call can
be recorded. If a station number is assigned as the Emergency Mailbox Station in System
Attributes, the emergency call will be recorded to built-in Mailbox of the station.
All stations with an {Emergency Mailbox} button are notified of the recording and can
access the Mailbox using the button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a{Emergency Mailbox} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Built-in VM Group number + Station Number +
[HOLD/SAVE]]
To listen to the Emergency Mailbox recording
1. Press the flashing {Emergency Mailbox} button.
2. Follow the normal Voice Mail procedures to listen to the Mailbox recordings.
Conditions
1. VSF/UVM must be installed and the VSF VM Station Group assigned in the UCP
system for recording to the Emergency Mailbox Station.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Emergency Mailbox Station
Related Features
Hardware
107
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.36.5
Issue 1.3
Emergency Call Monitor
Description
When a Station places a call to an assigned Emergency number, the System Attendant
receives an alerting tone and can monitor the Emergency call.
Operation
Attendant iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To Monitor an Emergency call after the Alert tone
1. Press the [MONITOR] soft button, then the Attendant is connected to the
Emergency call.
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Emergency CO or Group
TABLES DATA
Emergency Code Table
Related Features

Emergency Call
Hardware
108
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.37 Executive/Secretary Forward
Description
iPECS IP and LDP Phones can be assigned as Executive/Secretary pairs. By activating DND,
the Executive also activates Unconditional Call Forward to the Secretary, which will forward
Executive calls to the Secretary. With the “CO Call to Secretary” option enabled, all outside
calls to the Executive forward to the Secretary regardless of the Executive’s station status. In
addition, if the Secretary is in DND, Executive calls sent to the Secretary route back to the
Executive if the “Call Exec If Sec in DND” option is enabled.
Each Executive can be assigned a “Grade” (01, highest ~12, lowest). Executives with a
higher grade can call lower grade Executives overriding the Executive/Secretary forward. In
addition, Executives can be assigned to an Executive Group to allow all Executives in the
group to place calls to other Executives in the group overriding Executive/Secretary Forward.
With the “ICM Call to Secretary” option enabled, all intercom calls to the Executive, except for
calls from a higher or same grade executive, forward to the Secretary regardless of the
Executive’s station status.
Callers to an Executive in DND can leave a Message Wait indication. The message waiting
indication is given to the Executive or Secretary station based on the system database and
Executive’s User Programming options.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate/deactivate Executive/Secretary Forward from the Executive
1. Press the [DND] button to toggle Executive/Secretary Forward.
Conditions
1. Up to 100 Executive/Secretary pairs can be configured in the iPECS UCP.
2. An Executive may have multiple Secretaries and a Secretary may have multiple
Executives. Each forms a separate Executive/Secretary pair.
3. If the Secretary is busy when a call is received for the Executive in DND, the caller
will receive busy tone.
4. The Secretary may override the DND status of the Executive to Camp-On and
transfer calls to the Executive.
5. A chain can be constructed by assigning the Secretary of one pair as an Executive
of another. Although a chain may be constructed, a loop back is not allowed.
6. If an Executive has multiple Secretaries, calls will automatically route to the
Executive’s first idle Secretary.
7. The Executive may use Call Forward to send calls to stations other than the
Secretary.
8. Messages are left at the Executive or Secretary based on assignment of “Left
109
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Message Exec”. When enabled (ON), messages are left at the Executive’s station.
9. The Executive Grade can be assigned only for Country Code “82”, Korea.
10. The Executive can call to another executive in the same Group even though they
are assigned a lower grade.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes DND, Left Message to Executive
TABLES DATA
Executive/Secretary Executive Station, Secretary Station,
CO Call to Secretary, Call Exec If Secretary in DND,
Executive Grade, ICM Call to Secretary, Secretary Auto
Answer, Executive Group
Related Features






DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call Forward
Call Waiting/Camp-On
CLI Message Wait
Message Wait/Call Back
Call Transfer

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
110
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.38 External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
2.38.1
AA/VM Group
Description
The system provides support for an adjunct Auto Attendant/Voice Mail system via connection
to SLT ports or SIP extensions. When a call arrives for the External AA/VM Group, the
system will search the group for an idle port or SIP extension and deliver the call.
For AA/VM systems that employ SLT ports, signaling information between the iPECS and
external AA/VM system may be assigned for in-band DTMF signaling or the SMDI (Simplified
Message Desk Interface) signaling protocol over the assigned iPECS system RS-232 port.
SIP based external AA/VM systems employ standard SIP signaling, and require a SIP server
license and a license for each simultaneous call the AA/VM system will support.
Operation
The system will interface with the External AA/VM based on database assignments.
Conditions
1. Selection of SMDI or in-band signaling can be configured using Virtual Dip Switch
settings under the Maintenance admin.
2. Only one built-in AA/VM Group (VSF Group) can be defined in the system. Multiple
definitions will cause erroneous system operation.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment, VSF Group, Station Group
Attributes
TABLES DATA
Voice Mail Dialing Table
MAINTENANCE
TRACE
Trace Virtual Dip Switch SMDI Setting
Related Features






In-band (DTMF) Signaling
SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface)
Auto Call Recording
Two-Way Record
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
SIP Phone Extension
111
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Hardware

2.38.2
External AA/VM system
In-band (DTMF) AA/VM Signaling
Description
The system may employ in-band signaling to communicate with an External AA/VM system.
When a call is routed to the AA/VM SLT port, the system will send DTMF signals informing
the AA/VM of the characteristics of the call. DTMF digit strings are assigned to various
functions allowing the AA/VM to respond appropriately to the call. These definitions are
entered in the Voice Mail Dialing Table.
Operation
System
The system will interface with the External AA/VM based on database assignments.
Conditions
1. Selection of SMDI or in-band signaling can be configured using Virtual Dip Switch
settings.
2. Only one AA/VM Group (Internal or External) can be defined in the system.
Multiple definitions will cause erroneous system operation.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment, Station Group Attributes
TABLES DATA
Voice Mail Dialing Table
MAINTENANCE
TRACE
Virtual Dip Switch SMDI Setting
Related Features





AA/VM Group
SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface)
Auto Call Recording
Two-Way Record
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

External AA/VM system
Hardware
112
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.38.3
Issue 1.3
SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface) AA/VM Signaling
Description
The system may employ SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface) protocol to communicate
with an adjunct AA/VM system. When a call is routed to an AA/VM SLT port, the system will
send SMDI messages over the assigned SMDI RS-232 port, informing the AA/VM of the
characteristics of the call.
SMDI Protocol
There are three types of SMDI messages. Within each message is an “Action Code”, which
defines the function or required action of the AA/VM system. Fields within the messages also
define the called/calling station and station status. The various message types and definition
of the fields are shown in the chart below.
Type I message
cr lf MD ggg mmmm a xxxxxxxxx sp yyyyyyyyy sp cr lf^Y
Type II message
cr lf MD ggg mmmm a xxxxxxxxx sp sp cr lf^Y
Type III message
cr lf MD ggg mmmm a sp yyyyyyyyy sp cr lf^Y
Field
cr
lf
MD
ggg
mmmm
a
xxx...x
yy…y
sp
^Y
Description
carriage return
line feed
Message Desk
Message desk number, AA/VM system, default 001
Message Desk terminal, 0001-9999, VM port
action code
called station number or station calling the VM group
calling station number
ASCII space character
end of SMDI message, control + Y (0x19)
The following table provides detailed information on the meaning and function of the various
SMDI action codes.
Table SMDI Messages
Action
Code
Reason
Purpose
Message
Type
SMDI Message
MD 001 0001-
A
Unconditional forward to VM
Put Mail
II
A xxxxx yyyyy
B
Called Station busy
Busy Mail
II
B xxxxx yyyyy
C
Disconnect, connected party
disconnect
II
C xxxxx yyyyy
D
Direct Fwd to VM group
Get Mail
II
D xxxxx yyyyy
E
Error, invalid number
Error
II
E xxxxx yyyyy
H
Two-way Record
record
II
H xxxxx yyyyy
113
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Table SMDI Messages
Action
Code
Reason
Purpose
Message
Type
SMDI Message
MD 001 0001-
I
DND
DND
II
I xxxxx yyyyy
N
No Answer
No Answer
II
N xxxxx yyyyy
R
Direct ring to VM group
AA
III
R xxxxx yyyyy
Operation
System
The system will interface with the External AA/VM based on database assignments.
Conditions
1. Selection of SMDI or in-band signaling can be configured using Virtual Dip Switch
settings in (Maintenance  Trace Virtual Dip Switch SMDI Setting).
2. Only one AA/VM Group (Internal or External) can be defined in the system.
Multiple definitions will cause erroneous system operation.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment, Station Group Attributes
TABLES DATA
Voice Mail Dialing Table
MAINTENANCE
TRACE
Trace Virtual Dip Switch SMDI Setting
Related Features





AA/VM Group
In-band (DTMF) Signaling
Auto Call Recording
Two-Way Record
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

External AA/VM system
Hardware
114
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.38.4
Issue 1.3
Voice Mailbox Translation
Description
Your Station can be assigned to employ a Voice Mailbox number that is different from your
Station number. When a call is routed to voice mail, your Mailbox number, which is assigned
separately from your Station number, is sent to the Voice Mail system. The Voice Mailbox
number can be any 8-digit number(“00000001” to “99999999”). An entry of 00000000 or
blank sends the Station number to the VM system.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. Voice Mailbox Translation applies to External Voicemail systems.
Programming
STATION DATA
Station VM Attributes  VMID Number
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment, Station Group Attributes
TABLES DATA
Voice Mail Dialing Table
Related Features




AA/VM Group
SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface)
Two-Way Record
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
115
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.39 Flexible Numbering Plan
Description
Your access to the iPECS system resources and features is accomplished through feature
codes or Flexible buttons on your iPECS IP or LDP Phone. The Administrator selects from
one of the eight (8) different standard numbering plans and, if desired, assigns codes for
individual features in the Flexible Numbering Plan. The feature codes are defined in the
Flexible Numbering Plan; refer to the iPECS Admin and Programming Manual.
Operation
System
System implements feature activation based on the Flexible Numbering Plan.
Conditions
1. Feature codes can be one to four digits in length.
2. During programming, conflicts in the Numbering Plan are not allowed. The existing
on-conflicting Numbering Plan is used until correctly updated.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
System ID
Flexible Station Number
Flexible Numbering Plan
Related Features
Hardware
116
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.40 Forced Disconnect Intrusion
Description
You can force a busy outside Line or station to disconnect an active call, and connect to your
phone. Prior to connecting, the outside Line is returned to idle. When connecting to a station,
the station will receive a short warning tone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + [7#] + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate Forced Line Disconnect:
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the busy Line button or dial a Line access code, you will receive busy tone.
3. Press the {Forced Disconnect} button.
Or
Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “7#”, the Forced Seize Busy code.
4. The call on the busy Line is terminated, the connected station receives error tone
and you are connected to the Line.
To activate forced intrusion to a busy station
1. Place an intercom call to the busy station and receive busy tone.
2. Press {Forced Disconnect}button.
Or
Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “7#”, the Forced Seize Busy code.
3. The call on the busy Station is terminated, the station receives warning tone and
you are connected to the station.
SLT
To activate forced Line disconnect feature
1. Lift the handset
2. Dial the Line access code of a busy Line, you will receive busy tone.
3. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
4. Dial “7#”, the Forced Channel Seize code.
5. The call on the busy Line is terminated, the connected station receives error tone
and you are connected to the Line.
Conditions
1. If the station was talking to other station or CO line, the call is disconnected when
the station receives forced Intrusion call.
2. A Forced Intrusion call is not possible to a station in DND state.
3. A Forced Intrusion call is not possible to an Attendant.
4. Any station with a Forced Intrusion button can activate this feature.
117
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5. If ‘Privacy’ option is ON, then any person can’t intrude into my conversation by
barge-in and forcely disconnect the feature.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes  Privacy
Related Features
Hardware
118
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.41 Headset Compatibility
Description
You can use an industry standard headset with iPECS IP and LDP Phones in place of or in
addition to the handset. The station must be programmed for Headset operation.
In the Headset mode, pressing the [SPEAKER] button will send audio to the Headset instead
of the speakerphone. In addition, when in the Headset mode, ring signals can be delivered to
the speaker or the headset as defined in the system database.
As an iPECS IP or LDP Phone users, you may assign a Flex button to select Headset or
Speakerphone operation. The {HEADSET SELECT} button may be used to toggle the
operation of the phone between Headset and Speakerphone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button for {HEADSET SELECT}
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “61” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To change operation from Speakerphone to Headset
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “61”, the Speaker/Headset/Bluetooth Mode Selection Code.
3. Dial “1” to select Speaker, “2” to select Headset or “3” to select Bluetooth.
4. Press[HOLD/SAVE] button.
To change the device to receive ring signals
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “62”, the Speaker/Headset Ring Selection Code.
3. Dial “1” for Speaker, “2” for Headset or “3” for both.
4. Press [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To place/answer calls using the headset when Headset mode is active
1. Press the [SPEAKER]button with the phone in Headset mode.
Conditions
1. The Intercom Signaling Mode can be set in the Headset mode as with the
Speakerphone mode.
2. The station always receives Page announcements over the speaker of iPECS IP
and LDP Phones.
3. Although the phone is in the Headset mode, the system will monitor the hookswitch status. If the user lifts the handset to go off-hook, audio is delivered to the
handset.
4. If you are using a LIP-8012D, 8024D or 8040L phone in the Headset mode, the
{SPEAKER}Soft button is available during an active call. You can switch to the
speakerphone for the duration of the active conversation. If you take further action,
119
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
such as pressing another feature or {LINE} button, the mode switches back to
Headset.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Headset Ring, Speakerphone, Headset
Usage
Related Features


Speakerphone
Paging
Hardware
120
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.42 Hold
2.42.1
Automatic Hold
Description
While on an active outside call, the system will place the call on hold automatically if you
press the [FLASH], [CONF], {DSS/BLF} or other feature button. In addition, your station can
be programmed to support Line to Line Automatic Hold. In this case, pressing an outside Line
button while on an outside call will place the active call on hold and access the selected Line.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To use Automatic Hold while on an active outside call
1. Press the desired feature button or {LINE}; the active call is placed in the preferred
Hold state.
Conditions
1. Outside Lines placed on hold with Automatic Hold are placed in the assigned
preferred Hold state and are subject to the normal Hold Recall process.
2. There is no limit on the number of calls that can be placed on hold using Automatic
Hold.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Automatic Hold
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Hold Preference
Related Features


Hold Preference
Hold Recall

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
121
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.42.2
Issue 1.3
Hold Preference
Description
Hold Preference defines either Exclusive Hold or System Hold as the preferred hold state,
which is activated on the first depression of the [HOLD/SAVE] button. Pressing the
[HOLD/SAVE] button twice in succession, places the call in the non-preferred hold state. The
selection of the preferred hold state is the assigned Hold Preference in the system database.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate the Preferred Hold while on a call
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, the connected party is placed in the preferred
hold state.
2. Press the button a second time for non-preferred hold.
Conditions
1. A transferred call is placed in the Exclusive Hold state fort the receiving station
regardless of the assigned Hold Preference.
2. Hold Preference is not available to an SLT.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Hold Preference
Related Features



Call Transfer, Outside Line
Exclusive Hold
System Hold

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
2.42.3
Hold Recall
Description
When you place an outside call on hold, a hold timer is activated. If the timer expires, the held
call will recall your station for the I-Hold Recall time. If the call remains unanswered, the
Attendant also receives recall for the Attendant Recall time and, if the call is on Exclusive
hold, the call is placed on System Hold. If still unanswered after the Attendant Recall time,
122
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
the call is disconnected and the appropriate circuits returned to idle.
Operation
Hold Recall operation is automatic.
Conditions
1. Separate timers are assigned for the various types of hold: System, Exclusive,
Transfer, Call Park, etc.
2. If the I-Hold timer is set to zero, the station will not receive recall. If the Attendant
Recall timer is set to zero, the Attendant will not receive recall.
3. If the specific Hold timer is set to zero, recall is disabled.
4. In case of Private Lines, recall ring is served only to the station that held the call
and will recall until answered or abandoned.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Hold Preference
System Attributes Attendant Recall Timer, Exclusive Hold
Recall Timer, I-Hold Recall Timer, System Hold Recall
Timer, Transfer Recall Timer
Related Features



Call Transfer, Line
Exclusive Hold
System Hold
Hardware
2.42.4
Exclusive Hold
Description
Outside lines may be placed in a waiting state such that other stations in the system are
unable to access the line. Only the station placing the line on Exclusive Hold can access the
held line.
If the call remains on hold at expiration of the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer, normal Hold
Recall will apply.
123
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place a call on Exclusive Hold
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button twice.
To access a call on Exclusive Hold from the holding station
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the held line button.
Or,
Dial “8#”, the Held Call Access code.
3. Dial the line number.
SLT
To place a call on Exclusive Hold
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
To access a call on Exclusive Hold from the holding SLT
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “8#”, the Held Call Access code.
3. Dial the line number.
Conditions
1. When an outside Line is placed on Exclusive Hold, the button LED will flash at 120
ipm at the holding station and will be ON at all other stations.
2. All transferred outside calls are placed on Exclusive Hold for the receiving station.
3. The LED of {LOOP} and {POOL} buttons will display the active outside line status.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Hold Preference
System Attributes Attendant Recall Timer, Exclusive Hold
Recall Timer, I-Hold Recall Timer, System Hold Recall
Timer, Transfer Recall Timer
Related Features




Call Transfer, Line
Hold Preference
Hold Recall
System Hold
Hardware
124
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.42.5
Issue 1.3
System Hold
Description
Outside Lines may be placed in a waiting state such that other stations in the system are able
to access the Line. Stations must have access to the Line in the system database to access
the held call.
If the call remains on hold at expiration of the System Hold Recall Timer, normal Hold Recall
will apply.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place a call on System Hold
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To access a call from System Hold
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the outside Line button.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “8#”, the Held Call Access code.
3. Dial the line number.
SLT
To place a call on Exclusive Hold
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “560”, the System Hold feature code.
To access a call from System Hold
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “8#”, the Held Call Access code.
3. Dial the line number.
Conditions
1. When an outside Line is placed on System Hold, the button LED will flash at 30
ipm wink at the holding station and will flash at all other stations.
2. A call on System Hold can be retrieved from any station allowed access to the Line
in the system database using the Line button or the Held Call access code.
3. The LED of {LOOP} and {POOL} buttons will display the active outside Line status.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Hold Preference
System Attributes Attendant Recall Timer, I-Hold Recall
Timer, System Hold Recall Timer
125
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Related Features




Call Transfer, Outside Line
Hold Preference
Hold Recall
Exclusive Hold
Hardware
126
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.43 Hot Desk
Description
The iPECS IP Phones can be assigned as Hot Desk phones allowing users (Agents) to login
with the iPECS. The Hot Desk will become active and will take on the attributes defined for
the Agent’s Station number. When the Agent logs off, the Hot Desk phone becomes inactive
and the Agent’s calls are forward to the user-entered destination. A different Agent may then
login through the inactive Hot Desk phone.
Operation
iPECS IP Phones
To login through an inactive Hot Desk
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “*0”.
3. Dial the Agent’s Station number and authorization code.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, Agent is logged in.
To logout through the active Hot Desk
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “* *” or press the {AGENT LOGOUT} Flex button.
3. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to select the call forward destination for
Agent calls (speed dial, joined mobile phone, Internal or External VM group).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To login / logout on LIP-9071
1. Tag a NFC card to 9071 NFC module.
2. NFC menu is displayed in 9071 display with NFC information.
3. NFC menu is chosen, NFC information is sent to system.
4. Hot desk feature is activated or deactivated.
Conditions
1. Only iPECS LIP phones can be configured for Hot Desk.
2. An active (logged in) Agent can login to another inactive Hot Desk. However, this
will log the Agent off the previously active Hot Desk.
3. A user may only logout from the Agent’s active Hot Desk phone. Attempting to
logout using a different Hot Desk phone will return error tone.
4. The Flex button map of the Hot Desk station is fixed and does not take on the
configuration associated with the Agent’s station.
5. When logged off, the Agent’s active database, including the following items, are
saved.
 Station Number
 Station Attributes
127
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.
7.
8.
9.
Issue 1.3
 CO Routing, Ring Assignments, DID Routing, etc.
 Voice Mail
 Station Group Assignment
The number of Hot Desk phones and Hot Desk users is limited to the system
capacity. Each Hot Desk phone and Hot Desk user (Agent) requires a separate
station channel in the system.
To identify the station number, only Station Authorization codes may be used for
Hot Desk login.
An ACD Agent must use the Agent Login procedure as defined under the ACD
feature description.
An agent that takes no action for the Hot Desk Auto Logout time is logged out of
the Hot Desk and must login to use the Hot Desk.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Hot Desk Station
SYSTEM DATA
Hot Desk Attributes  Auto Logout Timer
Related Features



Station Groups
Automatic Call Distribution
Call Forward

iPECS IP Phone
Hardware
128
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.44 ICLID Call Routing
Description
The system can employ ICLID (Incoming Calling Line Id) to determine the routing of incoming
outside calls. Each outside Line, including DID Lines, may be assigned to employ ICLID
routing. The system will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Routing Table
and, if a match is found, will route the call to the destination defined in the ICLID Ring
Assignment Table. Destinations can be a System announcement, integrated or external
Voice Mail, a station or a station group.
An ACD group may be assigned to route calls employing the ICLID Tables. When configured,
ACD calls re-route based on the “Caller Entered ICLID”.
Operation
System
System implements routing automatically based on database entries and the received
ICLID.
Conditions
1. If the received ICLID does not match an entry in the ICLID Route Table, the call is
routed based on the type and other programming (Ring assignments, etc.) for Line.
2. For analog CO Lines, the system will await receipt of valid ICLID for the ICLID
Ring Timer. At expiration of the timer, if ICLID is not received, the call is routed
based on the type and other programming (Ring assignments, etc.).
3. The ICLID received from the Line must be a telephone number to match an ICLID
Route Table entry.
4. If ICLID routing is enabled for a DID Line, DID Call Wait is disabled.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Analog Attributes ICLID Ring Timer
ISDN LINE & ICLID
ROUTING DATA
ICLID Route Table
ICLID Ring Assignment
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Attributes, ACD Group-Entered Caller
ID(ICLID) Usage
TABLES DATA
Flexible DID conversion
Related Features



Outside Line Ring Assignment
Automatic Call Distribution
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Hardware
129
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.45 In-Room Indication
Description
As an In-Room Supervisor, you can notify other station users that you are in the room and
the phone is idle by using a Flexible button on your phone. Activating the In-Room indicator
illuminates the LED of the In-Room Indicator button assigned to the other stations. This
feature is often used in small call centers or where the Supervisor’s office is not visible by the
supervised employees.
Up to ten (10) In-Room Supervisors can be assigned with up to twenty notified stations for
each Supervisor.
You may assign a Flex button for In-Room indication however; the In-Room Supervisor can
only be assigned in the system database.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign an “In-Room Indication button”
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “9*” + In-Rom Bin No (01~10) +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To Active or Deactivate the In-Room Indication from the Supervisor phone while idle
1. Press the {In-Room} button.
2. Press the[HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The In-Room Indication button operates only while the Supervisor’s phone is idle.
2. If the In-Room button at a station other than the Supervisor’s is pressed, error tone
is heard.
3. The Supervisor must press the [HOLD/SAVE]button within 5 seconds of pressing
the In-Room button to activate the indication otherwise; the station goes back to
the idle state.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
In-Room Indication
Related Features
Hardware
130
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.46 Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
2.46.1
Integrated AA/VM Overview
Description
The integrated AA/VM application is provided through the Voice Store and Forward (VSF)
Gateway incorporated in the iPECS UCP Module. The iPECS UCP100 provides eight (8)
channels and basic voice storage memory of four (4) hours expandable with license to 14
hours. The UCP600 provides eight (8) channels with six (6)hours of basic storage
expandable to 16 hours. iPECS UVM modules may be included in the system and provide up
to 8 channels expandable with license to 16 channels and 50 hours of storage expandable
with license to 200 hours. The UVM is supported with all iPECS UCP systems.
The storage memory is employed to store user-recorded System announcements, Voice mail
greetings and messages, and various system prompts. The system prompts (time, date, etc.)
are employed by the Auto Attendant and Voice Mail applications as well as other system
features.
Operation
System
Operation of the integrated AA/VM is automatic based on configuration.
Conditions
Programming
Related Features










Station Groups
Automatic Call Distribution
Delayed Auto Attendant
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Remote Message Retrieval
Multiple Language Support
MOH (Music-On-Hold)
Integrated Auto Attendant
Integrated Voice Mail


UCP VSF, AA/VM 16 hour with VM Memory Expansion License
UCP-UVM gateway
Hardware
131
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.46.2
Issue 1.3
Integrated Auto Attendant
Description
Incoming outside calls may be routed directly to one of 200 user recorded System
Announcements to function as an Auto Attendant announcement. Each System
announcement has a corresponding CCR (Caller Controlled Routing) Table. As an Auto
Attendant, the announcement instructs the caller to dial a digit for a specific route (“for sales
dial 2”). The CCR Table defines the routing for each digit the caller may dial.
The routing may be a:
 Station
 Station group
 Speed Dial number
 Page Zone
 Voice Mail
 System Announcement
In addition, the system may monitor digits for a station number. If the user dials a station
number, the Auto Attendant will complete an unsupervised call transfer to the station.
If multiple languages are support, the Language selection prompt plays prior to the system
announcement then the system announcement for the selected language is played to the
caller.
Operation
System Attendant
To record an Auto Attendant Announcement
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Announcement number (01-200).
5. With Multi Language support, enter the Language number (1~6), the current
announcement is played followed by the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the message.
To delete a recording
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Announcement number (01-200).
5. With Multi Language support, enter the language number (1~6), the current
announcement is played followed by the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. Press the [SPEED] button during playback to erase message.
132
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
System
Operation of the CCR Audio Text Tables and Auto Attendant are automatic.
Conditions
1. There are no individual time limits on an Auto Attendant or other System
announcement.
2. The external caller may experience ring-back tone before the system answers and
plays the System announcement.
3. A wav format audio file may be uploaded to the system for use as an Auto
Attendant or other System announcement.
4. The System Attendant must “Save” a recording before returning to the on-hook
state, otherwise, the existing recording is used.
5. To record or delete an Auto Attendant message, all of the AA/VM channels must
be in the idle state.
6. The external caller may dial at any time during an Auto Attendant announcement
and must dial prior to the expiration of the CCR Inter-digit timer.
7. If the external caller dials an invalid selection or station, the system will play the
“Invalid Entry” prompt and allow re-entry. The DISA Retry Counter determines the
number of times the caller may retry entries.
8. If the external caller dials more than a single digit, the call is routed based on the
Station Numbering Plan. The CCR Table must be configured to allow multiple digit
analysis.
9. Calls answered by an Auto Attendant (CCR) Announcement are interactive DISA
calls and are subject to conditions of a DISA call.
10. The “*” digit is reserved in the CCR Tables to repeat the current or previous Auto
Attendant announcement.
11. The “#” digit is reserved for callers to access their Voice Mailbox remotely.
12. A System Announcement may be programmed to disconnect after playing.
13. The Auto Attendant Announcement feature is supported for DISA and DID calls as
well as Normal Ring assigned outside Lines.
14. When an iPECS UVM gateway is employed, each System announcement should
be recorded in both the built-in VSF gateway and the UVM gateway. In addition,
each Station and outside Line Mailbox should be associated with one of the
gateways.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes VSF Access
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
DID Service Attributes
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment
Station Group Attributes
SYSTEM DATA
Common Attributes DISA Retry Counter, DID/DISA
Destination
133
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
System Timers CCR Inter-Digit Timer, VSF User Maximum
Record Timer, VSF Valid User Message Timer
TABLES DATA
CCR (Customer Call Routing) Tables
Flexible DID Conversion
Related Features









Station Groups
Automatic Call Distribution
Delayed Auto Attendant
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Remote Message Retrieval
Multiple Language Support
MOH (Music-On-Hold)
Outside Line Ring Assignment
Hardware
2.46.2.1 Company Directory
Description
The integrated AA incorporates a Company Directory. A caller that reaches a configured
CCR or Flexible DID Table can select to Dial-by-Name and is prompted to spell the last three
characters of the desired station user name using the dial pad. If the entry matches a Name
in the database, the call is transferred to the station. If multiple matches exist, the system
plays the name greeting for the first nine (9) matches and the caller can select the
appropriate station to receive the call. If no matches exist, the caller is prompted to reenter
the name (three characters). The caller may retry the name entry based on the DISA Retry
counter.
To be included in the directory, you must record a “Name Greeting” and your first and last
name must be assigned in the system database.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To record a Company Directory Name
1. Dial “563”, the Company Directory Name record code.
2. Dial “1” to record your Name.
3. After the beep, state your name.
134
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To delete Company Directory Name
1. Dial “563” the Company Directory Name record code.
2. Dial “2” to delete the Name recording.
SLT
To record a Company Directory Name
1. Dial “563” the Company Directory Name record code.
2. Dial “1”, to record your Name.
3. After the recording prompt, state your Name.
To delete Company Directory Name
1. Dial “563”, the Company Directory Name record code.
2. Dial “2” to delete the Name recording.
To use Company Directory Feature
1. In response to the system announcement, the caller dials the Company Directory
digit.
2. The system plays the First/Last name selection prompt.
3. The caller selects first or last name entry.
4. The system plays the enter 3-character prompt.
5. The caller dials the first three characters of the desired station user.
6. The System plays Name Greeting for each match (maximum 9).
7. If there is a single match, the caller is transferred. If multiple matches exist, the
system plays prompts for each with a selection digit.
“for [subscriber name], press 1”
“for [subscriber name], press 2”
…
“for [subscriber name], press 9”
8. When the caller enters the desired digit, the system routes the caller to that station.
Conditions
1. To be searched in Company Directory, the Station user name must be recorded
and the first and last name must be programmed properly.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes VSF Access, Company Directory - First
Name, Company Directory - Last Name
Related Features


CCR
Integrated Auto Attendant
Hardware
135
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.46.2.2 Remote Announcement Recording
Description
An outside caller can be allowed to record a System announcement. This capability is often
used in schools or other organizations to allow remote recording of school closing. The
administrator calls the Auto Attendant and dials the digit assigned for remote recording in the
CCR Table. Note that this should not be included in the Auto Attendant announcement for
security purposes.
The administrator enters the System Attendant password then can record any System
announcement desired as shown in the Operation section.
Operation
To remote record a System Announcement
1. Call the number for the Auto Attendant.
2. During the announcement, dial the digit assigned in the CCR Table for Remote
Recording.
3. In response to the system prompt, enter the Attendant’s password.
4. In response to the system prompt, enter the System announcement number (001200).
5. When prompted enter the Language type (1-6).
6. The system prompts “to record a new greeting, press pound” followed by any
existing recording for the announcement and Language.
7. Press ‘#’ and after the beep tone, start recording the new announcement.
8. Press ‘#’ to complete and store the new recording, the system returns to step 5 so
you can select another announcement to record or hang-up.
Conditions
Programming
TABLES DATA
CCR (Customer Call Routing) Tables
Flexible DID Conversion
Related Features


Integrated Auto Attendant
Attendant
Hardware
136
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.46.3
Issue 1.3
Integrated Voice Mail
2.46.3.1 Administrator Mailbox
Description
A Mailbox may be assigned as an Administrator to allow access to other mailboxes and the
Administrator menu to add or delete a Mailbox, or remove a password. The administrator can
record a Greeting and a Name for a mailbox and record and send a broadcast message to all
mailboxes.
When you access an Administrative Mailbox the prompt “to access administrative options,
press six” is added to the main VM prompt.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To access the Administrative Mailbox menu
From a Station with an Administrative Mailbox
1. Call the integrated Voice Mail and enter the password.
2. Dial six (6) to hear the Administrator menu.
3. Dial the desired option digit and follow the prompts for the settings below.
Administrator Mailbox Menus
− To add a mailbox, press 1
− To delete a mailbox, press 2
− To reset a mailbox password, press 3
− To record a mailbox greeting, press 4
− To record a broadcast message, press 5
− To record a mailbox name, press 6
Conditions
1. There are no limits on the number of mailboxes that can be marked as an
Administrator Mailbox.
2. The broadcast message is sent to all mailboxes in the same tenancy group and is
always retrieved first regardless of the message retrieve option.
3. A station can delete a broadcast message without confirming receipt.
4. Only administrators can remove a recorded broadcast message.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes Administrator Mailbox
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/ Voice Mail
Hardware
137
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.46.3.2 Announce Only Mailbox
Description
A mailbox can be configured to provide an announcement only and not provide incoming
message storage. After the announcement is played, the call is disconnected or returned to
the previous announcement.
Operation
Operation of an Announce Only Mailbox is automatic once configured.
Conditions
1. There is no limit to the number of mailboxes that can be assigned as Announce
only.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes Announce Only Mailbox, Announce Only
Option
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
2.46.3.3 Call Forward from VM
Description
If you are at a remote location and accessing the integrated Voice Mail using CO/IP lines, you
can activate or deactivate Unconditional Call Forward from the integrated Voice Mail.
Pressing “7” at the main Voice Mail menu will return the "Mailbox Set Forward" prompt.
Operation
To activate Call Forward while in the VM
1. Press “7”, for Mailbox set forward, the “Mailbox Set Forward” prompt is received.
2. Dial “1” and receive the “Forward” prompt (“Please enter the number to forward
to ...").
3. Dial Station Number as follows:
a. To forward to another station, dial the station number.
b. To forward calls Off-Net, dial “*” and enter the station speed number.
11. The confirmation announcement “forwarded to station (‘xxx’)” or “forwarded to
speed bin number (yyyy)” is played.
138
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To deactivate Call Forward
1. Press “7”, for Mailbox set forward, the “Mail Box Set Forward” prompt is received.
2. Dial “2” and receive the “Station forwarding is canceled” prompt.
To return to the Main menu
1. Dial “9” and receive the Mailbox main menu prompt.
Conditions
1. Remote user dialing is subject to the inter-digit timer. If you do not input a
response to the VM prompts in the inter-digit time, the call is released.
2. The ability to activate Unconditional Call Forward from your Mailbox is only
available when the Mailbox is accessed from a remote location.
Programming
Related Features




Message Storage
Message Retrieval
Remote Message Retrieval
Message Retrieval Options
Hardware
2.46.3.4 Distribution Lists
Description
In your Voice Mailbox, you can create distribution lists that allow you to record and send or
forward messages to all of the Mailboxes in a list. You can create five (5) different
Distribution Lists with up to 25 Mailboxes in each list.
Operation
To create a Distribution List
1. At the main Voice Mail prompt dial “5” for Personal Options and follow the voice
instructions to create your list.
Conditions
1. The maximum number of distribution lists you can create is five (5) and up to 25
mailboxes can be assigned in a distribution list.
Programming
139
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Related Features


Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Send a Message
Hardware
2.46.3.5 E-Mail Notification
Description
When the system stores a new voice message, it will check the notification settings for your
mailbox. If E-mail notification is configured, the system will send you an E-mail notification.
If configured, the voice message is attached as an *.wav file and the message may be
erased from the mailbox automatically since a copy has been delivered via e-mail.
Operation
System
System automatically sends E-mail to notify you of new voice messages.
Conditions
1. The E-mail is sent to the address assigned for the station with the “sender”
address defined for the System. Note the latter is required, as many E-mail servers
will reject anonymous E-mails.
2. The E-mail address for the System and the station are defined under the Web
Admin.
3. To attach the Voice message to the E-mail notification, VSF MSG - Attach
Message in the Station Data VM Attributes must be enabled.
4. The Sender E-Mail information (system E-mail account) is assigned in both the
Station and System Data areas. If both are assigned, the Station assignment is
used.
Programming
STATIONDATA
VM Attributes VSF MSG – SMTP Mail Server Address,
VSF MSG –Receiver Mail Address, VSF MSG –SMTP Mail
Server ID, VSF MSG –SMTP Mail Server Password, VSF
MSG – Attach Message, VSF MSG –Delete Message, VSF
MSG –SMTP Security, VSF MSG –SMTP Port, VSF MSG –
Sender Mail Address
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
140
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.46.3.6 Mark a Message as Private
Description
When you send or reply to a message, you can mark the message as Private so that the
receiver cannot forward the message.
Operation
To mark a message as private
1. After identifying the receiver, you will receive the send message options prompt
“For regular delivery, press 1. To mark urgent, press 2. To mark private, press 3.
To mark urgent and private, press 4. To request delivery receipt of the message
for future, press 5.”
2. Dial “3” or “4”, the message is sent as a private message and you receive the
“Your message has been sent” prompt.
Conditions
1. You must be permitted to mark a message as Private as part of the VM COS
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
VM COS Attributes
Related Features


Send a Message
Distribution Lists
Hardware
2.46.3.7 Mark a Message for Delivery Confirmation
Description
You can mark a message so that when the receiver listens to the message you are notified
with a confirmation message.
Operation
To mark a message for Delivery Confirmation
1. After identifying the receiver, you will receive the send message options prompt
“For regular delivery, press 1, to mark urgent, press 2, to mark private, press 3, to
mark urgent and private, press 4, to request delivery receipt of the message, press
5.”
2. Dial “5”, the message is sent.
141
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3. After the receiver listens to the message, you receive a confirming Voice message
with the Mailbox number that received the message and the time the message
was received (listened to).
Conditions
1. You must be permitted to mark a message for Delivery Confirmation as part of the
VM COS.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
VM COS Attributes
Related Features

Send a Message
Hardware
2.46.3.8 Message Cascade
Description
Message cascading copies or moves messages left for the originating mailbox to another
mailbox. Once the message is copied or moved into the each mailbox, notification events can
take place based on the mailbox settings. Multiple Mailboxes (up to 5 mailbox stations per a
station) can be assigned as Cascade Mailbox destination.
There are 2 options and timer.
1. Cascade Method: Decide Cascade Method
A. Disable Cascade
B. Copy Cascade
C. Move Cascade.
2. Cascade Message Type: Choose Message Type for Cascading
A. All (Normal Message + Urgent Message)
B. Normal Message Only
C. Urgent Message Only.
3. Cascade Timer: After Cascade Timer, Cascade is executed by sequentially form
Cascade Mailbox 1 to Cascade Mailbox 5.
Operation
Operation of a Cascade Mailbox is automatic once configured with 2 options combination,
Cascade way is decided.
Conditions
1. Message Cascading is only allowed within programmed destination mailboxes in
142
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
PGM 127, to protect unintentional cascade to other mailboxes.
2. Same cascade mailbox number is not saved in PGM 127.
3. Mailbox owner number is not saved in PGM 127.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes  Cascade Mailbox 1~5
VM Attributes  Cascade Method
VM Attributes  Cascade Message Type
VM Attributes  Cascade Timer.
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
2.46.3.9 Message Retrieval
Description
You can access your Mailbox locally by placing a call to the integrated Voice Mail group or,
from an iPECS IP or LDP Phone, by pressing the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button, or by
pressing a {VMAILBOX} button, if assigned to the phone.
Prompts are then received to guide you in the Voice Mailbox operation. You must enter a
Mailbox number, generally the station number, and a corresponding password in response to
the “Request for Mailbox number” (“Please enter your Mailbox number.”) and “Request for
Password” (“Please enter your password code.”) prompts.
If you enter a valid Mailbox and password, the “Number of Messages" prompt (“You have
xx new messages. You have yy saved messages.”) is received. At this point, you also
receives the “VM long option prompt” (“To play new messages, press one, to play saved
messages, press two, to set greeting or password, press eight, to disconnect, press pound,
Press 0 for the operator, Press nine to hear this message again.”).
When you respond by dialing 1, the first new message is played. At the end of message
playback, the “New Message option” prompt (“To replay message, press one, to listen to
the next message, press two, to delete message, press three, to forward message, press
four, to call the sender, press five, to skip message, press six, to return to main menu,
press nine.”) is played. This process is repeated until the last new message is played and
the "No Message" prompt (“No Messages”) is played.
When you dial 2 in response to the “Number of Messages” prompt, the oldest saved
message is played. At the end of the message, the “Old Message option” prompt (“To
replay message, press one, to listen to the next message, press two, to delete message,
press three, to forward message, press four, to call the sender, press five, to return to main
143
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
menu, press nine.”) is played. This process is repeated until the last saved message is
played and the "No Message” prompt (“No Messages”) is played.
In addition to the options indicated in the prompt, you can record a memo, which is
attached to the current voice mail by dialing the digit 7. The current voice mail and memo
can then be forwarded to other iPECS users.
When you dial 9 in response to the “Number of Messages” prompt or during or at the end of
a message, the “VM long Options” prompt is played.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {VMAILBOX} Flex button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + VM group + Mail-box (station) number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To retrieve Voice Mail locally
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button. The message contents summary is
shown as below.
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004
3. Dial digit “3” to select the integrated VM Messages to receive the “Mailbox&
Password” prompts sequentially.
4. Dial the Mailbox and corresponding password to receive the “Number of Messages”
prompt.
5. Dial desired option code.
6. At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press {VMAILBOX} button.
3. Dial the Mailbox password to receive the “Number of Messages” prompt.
4. Dial desired option code.
5. At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To attach a memo to the current voice message
1. During or after the New or Old Message option prompt, dial “7”.
2. At the beep, record the memo.
3. Dial “*” to stop recording and store the memo.
4. During or after the New/Old option prompt, dial “4” to forward the message and
memo.
To skip the date/time prompt while hearing
1. Dial ‘#’ while the date/time prompt is played.
2. System will stop playing the prompt and it will provide the message.
To hear the date/time prompt while hearing
1. Dial ‘0’ while the message is played.
144
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2. System will provides data/time prompt of the message.
SLT
To retrieve Voice Mail locally
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Voice Mail Group to receive the Mailbox number and Password prompts.
3. Dial the Mailbox and corresponding password to receive the “Number of Messages”
prompt.
4. Dial desired option code.
5. At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To attach a memo to the current voice message
1. During or after the New or Old Message option prompt, dial “7”.
2. At the beep, record the memo.
3. Dial “*” to stop and store the memo.
4. During or after the New Old option prompt, dial “4” to forward the message and
memo.
Conditions
1. If no new/old messages are available, pressing “1” or “2”, is an invalid operation
and you will receive the “Invalid Entry” prompt or “No Message” prompt.
2. If the dialed number is not recognized, the "Invalid Entry" prompt is played. After
the second invalid entry, you are disconnected.
3. You may dial digits at any time during a voice mail playback, system prompt or
silence. You must dial a digit in response to a system prompt within the CCR Interdigit timer or the Voice Mail will disconnect and return error tone.
4. Messages can be retrieved in either a FIFO (First in First out) or LIFO (Last in First
out) order to meet the desire of each user.
5. If your Mailbox is configured with Auto Save New Message, after listening to the
message, the message is stored and you must be expressly delete the message.
To minimize the potential for large amounts of unwanted stored messages, Auto
Save New message can be disabled then the message is deleted if not expressly
saved.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes Retrieve MSG Method
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Auto Save New Message
Related Features



Message Retrieval Options
Remote Message Retrieval
Multiple Voice Mailbox Support
Hardware
145
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.46.3.10 Message Retrieval Options
Description
You may dial the digit “9” to receive the “VM long Options” prompt while in the Voice Mailbox,
including during or after a voice message or system prompt except when an option has been
selected that requires user dialing. The later may occur when you select a Message Retrieval
Option 1/2 (Play New/Saved Message), 7 (Cancel or Forward message, for Remote Access
Only) or 8 (Mail Box settings). The “VM long Options” prompt is:
"To play new messages, press one, to play saved messages, press two, to set station
forwarding, press seven, to set greeting or password, press eight, to disconnect, press pound,
Press 0 for the operator, Press nine to hear this message again." Note the forwarding option
(7) is available only for remote access.
Based on the “Station VM Feature Usage” setting, the integrated Voice Mail will respond to
incoming digits as shown in the following table. When the “Station VM Feature Usage” is set
to OFF, digits 3 to 6 are not available to the user.
Station VM Feature Usage: OFF
Digit
Function
1
Play New message
2
Play Saved message
7
Set Cancel/Fwd, available only for remote access
8
Mailbox Setting, "Mailbox Settings" prompt
9
VM Long options
#
Drop, "Goodbye”
0
Attendant Call, Call to System Attendant.
Station VM Feature Usage: ON
Digit
Function
1
Play New message
2
Play Saved message
3
Play urgent message
4
Send a message
5
Personal options
6
Administrator options (administrator only)
7
Set Cancel/Fwd, available only for remote access
8
Mailbox Setting, "Mailbox Settings" prompt
9
VM Long options
#
Drop, "Goodbye”
0
Attendant Call, Call to System Attendant.
146
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
To access a Message Retrieval option
1. At any time after the “Number of Messages” prompt, dial the digit to play a
message. The system initiates the selection providing any needed prompts.
Conditions
1. You must begin dialing within the CCR Inter-digit timer in response to a system
prompt. If the timer expires, the system will disconnect the call and you will receive
error tone.
2. When the “call sender” option results in an external call, dialing restrictions will be
applied based on your Station COS (Class of Service).
3. If you remain off-hook after a call placed through the Voice Mail is complete, you
will be returned to the previous place in the Voice Mailbox. If you hang-up, the
integrate Voice Mail will recall you and, upon answer, will play the “Request
Mailbox Number” prompt.
4. If your Mailbox is configured with Auto Save New Message, after listening to the
message, the message is stored and you must be expressly delete the message.
To minimize the potential for large amounts of unwanted stored messages, Auto
Save New message can be disabled then the message is deleted if not expressly
saved.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Auto Save New Message, Station VM
Feature Usage
Related Features




Message Retrieval
Remote Message Retrieval
Voice Mailbox Settings
Class of Service
Hardware
2.46.3.11 Message Storage
Description
When you activate Call Forward to the integrated Voice Mail, calls are transferred to your
mailbox where the call is handled by the iPECS Voice Mail application. The caller connects to
your User Greeting followed by beep tone to notify the caller to leave a message.
The caller can record a message and hang-up or dial “*” for further options. At disconnect,
the VM application stores the message in your Voice Mailbox and activates the Message
147
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Waiting indication at your station.
Operation
Remote Caller
To leave a voice message after Greeting and beep
1. State you message.
2. Hang up to quit recording or dial “*” for further options.
Conditions
1. Two timers are provided to control Voice Message duration. The Valid User
Message Timer establishes the minimum Voice Message duration. Voice
Messages shorter than this timer are not stored. The VSF User Maximum Record
Timer establishes the maximum Voice Message duration. When this timer expires
while recording a Voice Message, confirmation tone is heard and the message is
saved for destination station.
2. If all the AA/VM channels are in use, Ring Back tone is provided until a channel is
available.
3. All stations including a SLT can leave and receive voice messages.
4. Individual User Greetings and Voice Mails are protected from loss of AC power.
5. When an iPECS UVM gateway is employed, each System announcement should
be recorded in both the built-in VSF gateway and the UVM gateway. In addition,
each Station and Line Voice Mailbox should be associated with one of the
gateways.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes VSF Back-up Station, VSF Access
Preset Call Forward Transfer to Mail Box
Station Timer Station Forward No Answer Timer
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Call Forward No Answer Timer,
VSF User Maximum Record Timer, VSF Valid User
Message Timer
Related Features




Call Forward
Station Message Wait/Call Back
Integrated AA/VM Overview
Call Transfer, Voice Mail
Hardware
148
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.46.3.12 Outbound Message Notification
Description
When a new message is received, the system will check the new message notification
settings. If configured to notify your Mobile extension, the system will place a call to your
mobile phone and, when answered, play the station number prompt followed by the new
message prompt, “You have xx new messages.” The new message prompt indicates the
number of unheard messages.
After the new message prompt, you will be prompted to enter your password, which will
access your mailbox. You must listen to the new messages to confirm the notification.
If you take no action within the CCR Inter-digit timer, do not answer, the system receives
busy or you hang-up, the call is disconnected and the system will retry the call after the retry
timer expires. The system will attempt to complete the notification until you listen to the
message or the number of attempts reaches the DISA Retry counter.
Operation
To receive and confirm the notification
1. Answer Notification call and receive the New messages and password prompt.
2. Enter your Mailbox password.
3. Listen to the new messages.
Condition
1. The Caller Id will be the external caller who left the message or, for messages from
another station, Caller Id will be the station receiving the message.
2. If notification is disabled, any existing notification will be terminated after the initial
notification call.
3. For proper operation, the Station COS (Class of Service) and CO Group access
for the station must be such as to allow the notification call.
4. The Mobile telephone number to notify is assigned in Tables Data  Mobile
Extension Table.
5. If all lines in the assigned Line group are busy, the system will continuously
attempt to seize an outside Line for the notification call until successful.
6. The Retry counter is incremented after the system accesses the outside Line for
notification.
7. The Retry count is from 1 to 9; the retry interval is from 1 to 3 minutes.
8. If a new message is logged before answer of the notification call, the message will
be available to the user and a new notification is not invoked. If a new message is
received after answering the notification call, the System will invoke another
notification call. The user will receive the notification after returning to idle.
9. An analog CO Line may be used for the notification however, notification over
these Lines must be enabled and several timers must be set to compensate for the
lack of answer and disconnect signals from an analog CO Line. The system will
treat the call as answered after VM Notify Play Delay Over LCO Timer then play
149
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
the new message prompt. The system will wait for you to enter a password for the
VSF Group “Dial Time Out”. You must enter the correct password or the call will be
disconnected.
10. If you enter an incorrect password, the system will allow you to reenter a correct
password. You may retry entry for the DISA Retry Counter.
Programming
TABLES DATA
Mobile Extension Table Hunt Call Enable, VSF/VMIM
Notify, Notify Retry, Retry Interval
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes VM Notify to Mobile Extension over CO
System Timers VM Notify Play Delay Over CO Timer
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group AttributesVSF Group Attributes Dial Time
Out
Related Features




Mobile Extension
Message Retrieval
Remote Message Retrieval
Message Retrieval Options
Hardware
2.46.3.13 Personal CCR/User Greeting DISA
Description
Your integrated Voice Mail User greeting can have an associated Personal CCR Table
configured by your system Administrator. While listening to your greeting, outside callers may
dial a digit that that correlates to a destination in the Personal CCR Table. When the digit is
dialed, the caller is routed to the defined destination.
The available destinations, shown below, are the same as the system CCR Tables employed
for Auto Attendant.
 Station
 Station group
 Speed Dial number
 Conference Room
 Page Zone
 Voice Mail
 System Announcement
 Company Directory
In addition, if allowed, the system will monitor digits for a station number. If the user dials a
station number, the system will transfer the caller to the station.
150
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
If the Personal CCR Table is not configured, the system will employ DISA to analyze caller
dialed digits.
Operation
Outside Caller
To use Personal CCR
1. Call or be transferred to a Station with Personal CCR active.
2. During or within the CCR Inter-digit timer, dial a digit from the User Greeting
instructions.
3. The caller routes to the CCR destination or to the DID/DISA destination if the CCR
destination is unavailable.
Conditions
1. The caller can dial “*” or “#” to replay your greeting.
2. If the caller dialed digit does not match an entry in the Personal CCR table the
caller routes based on the numbering plan or DID/DISA Destination in System
Data admin.
3. If the destination defined in the CCR Table for the caller dialed digit is not available
(Busy, No-answer or error) the call is sent to the appropriate destination defined by
the DID/DISA Destination under System Data.
4. The Personal CCR option is available to outside callers only.
5. Personal CCR use must be enabled, you must record your Voice Mail User
Greeting and your calls must forward to your integrated Voice Mailbox for this
feature to function properly.
6. No retry count is applied to Personal CCR; the caller can attempt to enter a
matching digit once. The caller routes to the DID/DISA Destination should the user
dial an erroneous digit.
7. The priority of Personal User Greeting is as follows:
 Personal CCR
 Outgoing Mailbox Destination
 User Greeting DISA
Programming
STATION DATA
Station Personal CCR
SYSTEM DATA
DID/DISA Destination
System Timers CCR Inter Digit Timer
Related Features



Integrated Auto Attendant
Call Forward
DISA
Hardware
151
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.46.3.14 Multiple Mailbox Greeting
Description
System provides maximum 4 greeting for each mailbox user.
Each user can select greeting according to the following scenario in station program.
Operation
FLOW CHART
INCOMING CALL
FORWARD TYPE
NORMAL
BUSY
DND
NO ANSWER
CALL TYPE
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
CALL TIME
DAY
PLAY
NIGHT
PLAY
TIMED
PLAY
PLAY
To change each mailbox greeting with station program
1.
Press [PGM] button and dial 56.
2.
Select case type 1-4, 0 (1: Unconditional, 2: Busy, 3 : No answer, 4: DND, 0:All).
3.
Select Calling Party Type 1- 2, 0 (1: Internal, 2: External, 0: All).
4.
Select D/N/T 1-3, 0 (1: Day, 2:Night, 3:Timed, 0:All).
5.
Select greeting number 1-4.
6.
Press [SAVE] button.
152
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To change whole mailbox greeting with station program
1.
Press [PGM] button and dial 56.
2.
Select case type 0 (1: Unconditional, 2: Busy, 3 : No answer, 4: DND, 0:All).
3.
Select greeting number 1-4.
4.
Press [SAVE] button.
To change mailbox greeting type with station program
1.
Press [PGM] button and dial 56.
2.
Select case type 1-4, 0 (1: Unconditional, 2: Busy, 3 : No answer, 4: DND, 0:All).
3.
Select 0 (1: Internal, 2: External, 0: All).
4.
Select greeting number 1-4.
5.
Press [SAVE] button.
To change mailbox greeting type, call type with station program
1.
Press [PGM] button and dial 56.
2.
Select case type 1-4, 0 (1: Unconditional, 2: Busy, 3 : No answer, 4: DND, 0:All).
3.
Select 0 – 2 (1: Internal, 2: External, 0: All).
4.
Select greeting number 1-4.
5.
Press [SAVE] button.
To record user greeting
1. When a user enter the mailbox, the following menu can be provided.
Main Menu
to play new messages, press one
to play saved messages, press two
to play urgent messages, press three
to send a message, press four
for personal options, press five
to access administrative options, press six
to set station forwarding, press seven
to set greeting or password, press eight
to disconnect, press pound
Press 0 for the operator
Press nine to hear this message again.
2. After pressing 8, the options that can be performed from the mailbox are:
to edit your greeting, press one
to edit you password, press two
to return to main menu, press nine
3. Press 1 to edit your greeting.
to listen to your current greeting, press five
to record a new greeting, press seven
to return to the main menu, press nine
4. Press 7 to edit your greeting.
Enter greeting
153
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.
Issue 1.3
Select greeting number 1 to 4.
at the tone, record your greeting
press pound (#) when you have finished
Conditions
1. First greeting can be provided as default.
Programming
Web Admin.
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes (160~161)  Station VM Feature Usage
Related Features
Hardware
2.46.3.15 Remote Message Retrieval
Description
You can access your mailbox from a remote location. You will be required to enter your
mailbox number then normal mailbox operation applies.
Operation
Remote Caller
To access Voice Mailbox from a remote location
1. Call the telephone number for remote access to the integrated Voice Mail.
2. Upon answer, dial “#” to receive the “Request for Mailbox number” prompt.
3. Enter your Mailbox number, typically your station number.
4. Follow local access procedures.
Conditions
1. The conditions associated with Message Retrieval and Message Retrieval Options
apply.
2. The conditions associated with DISA apply.
Programming
Related Features



Message Retrieval Options
Integrated Auto Attendant
Message Retrieval
Hardware
154
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.46.3.16 Send a Message
Description
You can record and send messages to other Mailboxes or a distribution list from your Voice
Mailbox.
Operation
To send a message to another Mailbox
1. At the main Voice Mail prompt, dial “4”, and follow the voice instructions to record
and send you message.
Conditions
Programming
Related Features




Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Distribution Lists
Mark a Message as Private
Mark a message for Delivery Confirmation
Hardware
2.46.3.17 Voice Mail Class of Service
Description
The system employs a Voice Mailbox Class of Service to provide control and management of
Mailboxes. There are five VM Classes of service used to define the COS characteristics listed
below.
 Greeting length: 00-99 seconds
 Message length: 000- 600 seconds
 Number of messages: 00-250
 Retention time: 00-99 days
 E-mail notification
 Future delivery messages
 Confirm message receipt
 Private message mark
Operation
Operation of a Voice Mailbox COS is automatic once configured.
155
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Conditions
1. The default Class of Service for all mailboxes is 1.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
VM COS Attributes
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
2.46.3.18 Voice Mailbox Settings
Description
You can program the Mailbox settings for your mailbox including a security password and
record a greeting. When you press “8” while retrieving messages, the "Mailbox Setting"
prompt, (“To edit your greeting, press one, to edit your password, press two. To return to
main menu, press nine”) is played.
Operation
To program Mailbox settings while “in” the Voice Mailbox
1. Press “8”, for Mailbox settings, the “Mailbox Setting” prompt is received.
To edit your greeting
1. Dial “1” and receive the “Greeting Option” prompt (“To listen to your current
greeting, press five, To record a new greeting, press seven, To return to the main
menu, press nine.”).
2. Dial “5”, to hear your current greeting.
3. Dial “7” to record a new greeting (“At the tone, record your new greeting, press #
when you have finished”).
To edit your password
1. Dial “2” and receive the “Password Entry” prompt (“Please enter your new
password and press pound when finished.”).
2. Dial new password.
3. Press “#” and receive the “Reenter Password” prompt (“Please re-enter your
password to confirm and press pound when finished”).
4. Dial new password again.
5. Press “#” and receive “Password Confirmation” prompt (“Your password is saved”).
To return to main menu
1. Dial “9” to return to the main VM menu.
156
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Conditions
1. If you are accessing your Voice Mail remotely, you must begin dialing within the
CCR Inter-digit timer, if not the call is released.
2. If the dialed number is not recognized, the “Invalid Entry” prompt is played.
3. You must assign a password (Authentication code up to 12 digits) before access to
the mailbox will be allowed. Note that a greeting need not be recorded.
Programming
Related Features




Message Storage
Message Retrieval
Remote Message Retrieval
Message Retrieval Options
Hardware
157
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.46.4
Issue 1.3
System Voice Memo
Description
The integrated AA/VM memory incorporates Voice Memos for the system time and date as
well as station number, and settings that can be played to your station upon request.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To hear the Date & Time Prompt
1. Dial “661”, the Play Time and Date code. The system plays the date and time
Voice memo.
To hear the Station Number Prompt
1. Dial “662”, the Play Station number code. The system plays the Station Number
voice memo.
To hear the Station Settings
1. Dial “663”, the Play Station Settings code. The system plays the Station setting,
reporting the following items:
− Station Number
− Station IP Address
− Station MAC Address
− Station ICM Mode (Hands free/Tone/Privacy)
− Listed message x (x: number of all message waiting)
− Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
− Do not disturb
− Forwarded to station xxx
− Forwarded to speed bin xxx
− Queued Line xx
− Locked (temporary COS change)
− COS (Class of Service) x
SLT
To hear the Date & Time Prompt
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “661”, the Play Time and Date code. The system plays the date and time
Voice memo.
To hear the Station Number Prompt
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “662”, the Play Station number code. The system plays the Station Number
voice memo.
To hear Station Settings
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “663”, the Play Station Settings code. The system plays the Station setting,
158
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
reporting the following items:
− Station number
− Station IP Address
− Station Mac Address
− Station ICM Mode Hands free/Tone/Privacy)
− Listed message x (the number of all message waiting)
− Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
− Do not disturb
− Forwarded to station xxx
− Forwarded to speed bin xxx
− Queued Line xx
− Locked (temporary COS change)
− COS (Class of Service) x
Conditions
1. For station status, items from “Listed message x” to “Locked” are not include
unless active.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes VSF Access
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
159
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.47 IP Bridge Mode
Description
The iPECS UCS client Soft phone can automatically bridge the audio for a call to a “linked
pair ”Station. When the Soft phone places a call in the bridged mode, the audio for the call
can be delivered to the iPECS IP or LDP Phone by simply lifting handset or pressing the
[SPEAKER] button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To use the IP Bridge mode
1. Place a call from Soft phone. The Soft phone must be in the Bridged mode.
2. Lift the handset of the linked iPECS IP or LDP Phone to receive audio.
Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
The Soft phone must be used local to the bridged iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
Bridged operation must be selected at the Soft phone.
The Soft phone must be linked to the associated iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
Bridging is not available from the iPECS IP or Phone to the Soft phone.
Programming
STATION DATA
Linked Station
Related Features

Linked Station Pairs
Hardware
160
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.48 IP FAX Relay, T.38 Support
Description
Because of their nature, Fax tones do not transmit well through IP networks, particularly
when compression is employed. To address this, the external network interfaces of the
system support T.38 protocol that defines the translation of analog fax tones to digital signals.
When Fax tone is detected on an IP Line or SIP Trunk, the system will activate a T.38 Fax
relay channel to the appropriate port.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
Board Based Data
Board Base Attributes T.38 Enable, T.38 Port Usage
Related Features
Hardware

SLT port with FAX machine connected
161
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.49 IP System DECT
Description
The iPECS supports office building mobility employing Digital Enhanced Cordless
Technology(DECT). Ericsson-LG Enterprise’s Multi-channel DECT Base stations connect to
the Wireless Interface board of the system to establish cells. With the DECT handsets, you
can roam and maintain an uninterrupted communications link to iPECS features and
resources.
For further information on installation and operation of the IP System DECT solution, refer to
the iPECS UCP and DECT Installation Manuals.
Operation
DECT operation is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. The maximum number of DECT phones (desktop or portable handsets) is 192.
Programming
DECT DATA
DECT Registration
DECT Attributes
Related Features
Hardware



WTIM4/8
GDC-600BE Base station
GDC-450H/500H handsets
162
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.50 IP TRANS-CODING
Description
The system employs the IEEE g.711, g.729, g.722 or g.723 codec to digitize and compress
voice signals for RTP packets between iPECS devices. iPECS terminals and gateway
Modules incorporate DSP functions to support codec conversion. Available VoIP channels
include DSP circuitry used to support trans-coding (converting) codecs for incoming VoIP
calls to devices such as the UCP VoIP channels and the VSF channels, which have no builtin codec. The VoIP DSPs will trans-code the incoming voice codec to the system codec and
reverse the process for the outgoing packets. When the DSP must implement a complex
trans-coding operation (translation between g.729, g.723 or g.722), two (2) DSP channels are
required. In all other cases, trans-coding only requires a single channel per call.
Operation
Conditions
1. The system codec toward the VoIP channel can be changed anytime during an IP
call.
2. The VoIP DSP can generate and detect in-band DTMF and Call Progress tones in
support of DISA functionality.
3. For complex trans-coding (g.723/g.729), two (2)VoIP DSP channels are required.
4. If there are no available channels when trans-coding is required, the VoIP gateway
will release call control.
Programming
Related Features


System Networking
Remote Devices

Built-in VoIP channels, VOIM8 or VOIM24
Hardware
163
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.51 IP TRUNKING
2.51.1
H.323 v4 Service
Description
When assigned to support H.323 protocol, VoIP channels provide protocol conversion
between H.323 v4 and the iPECS protocol. This permits the VoIP channel to connect to
external H.323 networks or terminals and to support H.323v4 supplementary services. In
addition, H.323 VoIP channels can register with an external H.323 Gatekeeper to support
Gatekeeper call routing.
Supplementary services are supported employing H.450.1 ~ H.450.12 standards, which
define the following supplementary services:
 H.450.1: Supplementary Services Framework
 H.450.2: Call Transfer
 H.450.3: Call Diversion
 H.450.4: Call Hold
 H.450.5: Call Park & Pick-up
 H.450.6: Call Waiting
 H.450.7: Message Waiting
 H.450.8: Name Identification
 H.450.9:Call Back
 H.450.10: Camp-On
 H.450.11: Intrusion
 H.450.12: Additional Information
Operation
System
Operation of H.323 Service is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Station IP Attributes
BOARD BASED DATA
H.323 VoIP Attributes
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO/IP Group
VoIP Attributes CO VoIP Mode
H.323 DATA
H.323 Basic Attributes
H.323 CO Group Attributes
H.323 Incoming route table
Related Features


System Networking
SIP Trunk Service

IP Line
Hardware
164
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.52 LBC (Loud Bell Control)
Description
The iPECS hardware is equipped with relays that activate External Control Contacts. Each
contact is assigned to one of several functions including a Loud Bell Control. If used as a
Loud Bell Control, the contact will activate when:

External Page is accessed

Assigned Station receives ring in Day Ring mode (LBC)

UNA (Universal Night Answer) outside line receives a call while in the Night or
Timed Ring mode.
Operation
System
Operation of the relays is automatic when defined.
Conditions
1. The UCP100 supports one contact and in UCP600/2400 four contacts are
available, each appearing in the Miscellaneous connections of the iPECS UCP
module.
2. When assigned to activate as a Loud Bell Control, outside Line ring, transfers, and
tone ring Intercom calls to the assigned station will activate the contacts.
3. The contacts are rated at 1 amp, 24 VDC.
4. While in the Night or Timed Ring mode, the LBC function is not activated by ringing
at the assigned station. If the system is in the Night or Timed ring mode with
External Night Ring enabled, an incoming call on an outside Line assigned with
UNA will activate the contact. This permits operation of an external night ring
device.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes Universal Answer
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes External Night Ring
External Control Contacts
Related Features


Universal Night Answer
Door Open

External Control Contact connected to an external loud bell
Hardware
165
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.53 LCR (Least Cost Routing)
Description
The LCR Tables are employed to define appropriate routing for outgoing calls based on the
dialed number. Generally, the LCR Tables are structured to define the Least Cost Route for
Long Distance calls.
Your dialed digits are compared to table entries and modified based on time of day, day of
week, and assigned routes. There are four LCR Tables: LCR Control Attributes, LCR Leading
Digit Tables, LCR Digit Modification and LCR Initialization Tables.
LCR Access modes are assigned in the LCR Control Attributes Table. These modes define
the manner in which you access the LCR function. LCR may be disabled or one or more of
the three access modes can be allowed to access LCR. The basic modes are:
1. Internal LCR
If you dial digits that match an Internal LCR code in the LDT (Leading Digit Table),an
outside Line is selected and digits are modified using the DMT (Digit Modification
Table).
2. Loop LCR
If you dial 9 (the 1st available Line Group access code) or presses a {POOL}
or{LOOP} button to place a call, the Loop LCR mode is accessed. Dialed digits are
compared to the Loop LCR codes in the LDT; the system will seize an outside Line
from the assigned Line Group and sends digits from the DMT.
3. Direct CO LCR
If you select a {LINE} or {LINE GROUP} button, the Direct CO LCR mode is
accessed. If the dialed number matches a Direct LCR code in the LDT and the seized
Line belongs to the assigned Direct CO LCR group, the system will send digits
modified based on the DMT.
Operation
System
Operation of LCR is automatic based on assignments in the system’s LCR Tables
Conditions
1. There are a total of 6 LCR access mode combinations that can be defined as
below:
1) LCR Access Mode 00 (M00) – LCR is disabled.
2) LCR Access Mode 01 (M01) – Loop LCR access is active.
3) LCR Access Mode 02 (M02) – Loop and Internal LCR access are active.
4) LCR Access Mode 11 (M11) – Direct CO and Loop access are active.
166
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5) LCR Access Mode 12 (M12) – Direct CO, Loop and Internal LCR access
are active, seize CO line according to the LCR attributes.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
6) LCR Access Mode 13 (M13) – Direct CO, Loop and Internal LCR access
are active, seize CO line according to the station attributes.
Multiple Leading Digit Tables can be configured for each station and outside Line.
Leading digit entries may be duplicated in the Leading Digit Table. Using a
different “LDT Index” will make each entry unique. The system will use the lowest
matching entry.
When Direct CO LCR is used on an ISDN line, an ISDN information message with
the Called party Info Element, which includes only the numbering plan and
numbering type, is sent to the ISDN to maintain the ISDN connection while the
user finishes dialing and the system modifies the digits.
For Direct CO LCR, the number of digits for the LDT Table should be programmed
considering the dial-tone time-out of the network.
Since an outside Line is connected, Direct CO LCR does not support the
Alternative DMT index, which allows the system to select a second or alternative
outside Line to place the call.
If the LCR CO group is not assigned, the system will not seize an outside Line and
will place internal call.
If the LCR CO group is assigned as the unused group, the system will seize an
outside Line according to the station attributes.
The system selects the LDT main index from {LDT Table Index} of Common
Attributes(111). and the system compares the dialed data with {Compared Digits}
of sub index tables which have same {LDT Zone number} with {LDT Zone number}
of Common Attributes(111).
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes LDT Table Index
LDT Zone Number
TABLES DATA
LCR Control Attributes
LCR LDT
LCR DMT
LCR Table Initialization
Related Features




Outside Line Access
Outside Line Groups
ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network)
Station Flexible Buttons
Hardware
167
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.54 Linked Station Pairs
Description
A station can be logically linked to a primary station so that the two stations function as a
single station. When linked, the two stations effectively act as a single station with the station
attributes of the primary station. The status of one station is reflected in the status of the other
and features activated at one are active at the other. All internal or external calls to a linked
pair station will ring both stations.
All features available to the primary station are available and controllable by the secondary
station, one station may activate Call Forward and the other may cancel the forward. The
displays of the linked stations will display the status of the linked pair. When one is busy, the
display of the linked station will be as shown below.
IN USE AT LINK STA
Operation
System
Operation of Linked pairs is automatic when defined
Conditions
1. Support for Linked Pairs is available with the iPECS IP Phones, UCS client Soft
phones and WIT 400HE WiFi phones only. Use the Personal Group feature when
needing to link other terminal types.
2. Intercom calls to the Linked stations always signal in the Tone ring mode and
cannot be changed using the Caller Controlled ICM Signaling feature.
3. Linked pair stations are treated as having a single station number for all features
including LCD displays, station programming, ADMIN access, ACD statistics,
SMDR, etc.
4. A linked pair station cannot call the other member of the pair. It is possible to place
a call on hold at one and pick-up the call at the other member.
5. The station attributes of the secondary station will follow attributes of the primary
station, i.e. Day/Night COS (Class of Service), CO Warning Tone, CO Auto Hold,
CO Call Drop, DID Call Waiting, Speed Access, Alarm, Voice Mail Access, DND,
FWD, Paging, outside Line Access, outside Line Ring Assign, etc.
6. If one station of a Linked pair is busy, the other station of the linked pair is also
considered as busy, thus use of the linked station while the other station is busy to
place a call is not supported.
7. A station can be linked to another station without registration to the system. This
allows a station to be linked without affecting the overall capacity of the system. In
this case, only an iPECS IP or LDP Phone, UCS Client, or SLT can be used as the
168
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
unregistered linked station. In other cases, the linked station must be registered
with the system, reducing the system capacity by one.
8. The IP Attendant application can be linked as the secondary phone only.
9. A SIP Phone cannot be part of a linked pair.
Programming
STATION DATA
Linked Station
Related Features

Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling
Hardware
169
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.55 LNR (Last Number Redial)
Description
The last number dialed is stored (up to 48 digits) in the Station’s Last Number Redial buffer.
You may request the system redial the last dialed number without the need to dial the
number.
For iPECS IP and LDP Phones with displays, the last 10 numbers are stored in the LNR
buffer. The user may view the ten numbers using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to scroll
and select the number to dial from the list.
Operation
LDP Phone
To use Last Number Redial using the [Redial] button
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [REDIAL] button.
3. Press the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to highlight the desired number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] or [REDIAL] button to dial the number highlighted.
iPECS IP Phone
To assign a {Redial} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “97” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To use Last Number Redial using the LIP-8000/8000E/9000 series phone w/3-soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] Soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] Soft button.
3. Dial “*”.
4. Use the Navigation button to select the desired number.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to place the call.
Or,
1. Press the {REDAIL} button.
2. Use [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] to scroll or {REDAIL} to dial the highlighted number.
SLT
To use Last Number Redial
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “552”, the Last Number Redial code.
Conditions
1. For iPECS IP and LDP Phones with display, the redial buffer will store duplicate
numbers unless dialed consecutively.
2. When the outside Line used for the original call is busy, the system will select an
170
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
idle Line from the same Line group to place the call.
3. Using Last Number Redial will cancel Automatic Called Number Redial, if active.
4. Manually dialing a Flash during an outgoing call causes only those digits dialed
after the Flash to be stored in the LNR buffer.
Programming
Related Features



Save Number Redial (SNR)
Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Hardware
171
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.56 Mobile Extension
Description
Your mobile phone may be registered to your Station allowing the mobile phone to place and
receive calls through the system. Calls, except Private Line, that ring only to the station are
sent to your iPECS IP or LDP Phone and your registered mobile phone simultaneously. If you
are a Hunt group member, your Hunt group calls can also route to your mobile phone.
From your mobile phone you may access the facilities of the iPECS to place internal and
external calls as well as activate and access features. To access system facilities and
resources, you call your DID number from your mobile. When the call is received, the system
matches the Calling Line ID (CLI) to your mobile phone and provides you with system dial
tone.
You may be permitted to register and activate a mobile phone for the Mobile Extension
feature.
Operation
To assign a Flex button to Register a Mobile
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM]+ “37” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To assign a Flex button to activate Mobile Extension
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “38” + [HOLD/SAVE]
iPECS IP LDP Phones
To register the mobile phone number
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “37”.
3. Dial the mobile phone number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “38”.
3. Dial digit “1” to activate, “0” to deactivate.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS
1. Dial the DID number of your station, the system will check the CLI, answer the call
and you receive internal dial tone.
2. Place an internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer an iPECS call on your mobile received from iPECS
1. Dial “*”.
2. Dial the desired station, the call is transferred and the mobile phone returns to idle.
Or,
172
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Dial a Park code to Park the call.
Or,
Dial a Page zone to place an Internal/External or All Call page within the iPECS
system.
Or,
Dial a Conference Room to transfer the external party to a Conference Room.
Note
The mobile may reconnect to the call by dialing “#”.
To move from mobile phone to desktop phone
1. The mobile phone of MEX is on MEX call.
2. Press {my station number} flexible button in desktop phone.
3. The user can do the MEX call with the desktop phone.
To move from desktop phone to mobile phone
1. The desktop phone of MEX is on MEX call.
2. Press {my station number} flexible button in desktop phone.
3. Then, the mobile phone is ringing.
4. The desktop phone ends the call.
5. When the user answers with the mobile phone, the user can do the MEX call
with the mobile phone.
System
Incoming calls are sent to the active mobile phone automatically.
Conditions
1. When the mobile phone places an external call through iPECS, the CLI of the
corresponding station is used.
2. The Mobile Extension features is supported on analog CO Lines however, timers
must be set to compensate for answer and disconnect supervision, which is not
reliable on these Line types.
3. Message Wait and Callback cannot be activated to a mobile phone.
4. The Mobile Extension feature is not supported over a distributed networked
environment.
5. When an incoming call is received, the system will access an outside line and
place a call to the mobile phone. Thus, an outside line must be available for the
system to notify the mobile user of the incoming call.
6. Hold and Transfer Recalls to the mobile phone are sent to mobile phone and the
associated station.
7. ACD, Circular and Terminal Hunt Group calls can be routed to the active Mobile
Extension.
8. To move between mobile and desk phone is applied to only keysets with flexible
buttons.
173
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
TABLES DATA
Mobile Extension Table
Related Features





DND (Do Not Disturb)
Station Message Wait/Call Back
Attendant Recall
Distributed Control Network
Station User Programming & Codes

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
174
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.57 MOH (Music-On-Hold)
Description
When you place a call in a hold state, the system will deliver audio from the defined MOH
source. In this way, the connected user can determine that the connection is still active.
The system delivers audio from one of several sources that are defined for the system, and
can be defined for each Line and DID number. With multiple sources, different organizations
can have different on-hold messages.
Audio sources available include:

An External audio connection through the Miscellaneous connector of the iPECS
UCP100/600/2400 module.

An Internal source with 13 canned melodies, one is selected as the internal source,

Up to five (5) SLT ports can be assigned as SLT MOH ports and connected to an
audio source and

Up to three System announcements can be assigned, recorded and used for MOH,
one announcement, number 201, is dedicated for MOH and two using any desired
System announcement number.
When using a System announcement, separate messages can be recorded for each of the
languages, maximum six (6), supported by the system.
Operation
System
Operation of MOH is automatic
To record a System announcement for MOH
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the System Announcement number. If other than announcement 201, assure
the announcement is configured as an MOH source.
5. Dial the Language number, only required with multi-language support. The current
announcement is played followed by the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the message.
Conditions
1. The System announcements can be externally recorded and uploaded to the
system.
2. Separate MOH announcements should be recorded for each Language when
175
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
multiple languages are supported.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO Line MOH
SYSTEM DATA
Music Sources
Related Features



Hold
Back Ground Music
Multiple Language Support

External Music source connected to UCP music source input.
Hardware
176
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.58 Multiple Language Support
Description
With the integrated Auto Attendant and Voice Mail, iPECS UCP can support six (6)
languages simultaneously. Prompts in the desired languages are loaded into the integrated
AA/VM memory along with the Language Selection prompts. To assure the proper language
is employed, the Language Selection prompts are played when an incoming call is assigned
to be answered by a DID, DISA, System Announcement or Station Hunt Group
announcement. The Language Selection prompts are played in multiple phrases, one in each
of the equipped languages, with a request for the caller to input a digit to select the
appropriate language. The system then employs the defined announcement (DID, DISA, etc.)
recorded for the selected language.
Operation
System
System automatically plays the Language Selection prompts and plays prompts in the
selected language.
To record a Multi-Language Selection prompt
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the Voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Multi-Language selection Announcement number, “201 & 202”.
5. Dial the Language number, only required with multi-language support. The current
announcement is played followed by the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record your message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the message.
Conditions
1. The Language Selection prompts must be recorded as announcement number
“201 & 202”.
2. Multi-language support is only available using the integrated Auto Attendant.
3. Separate announcements must be recorded by the Attendant for each language
supported.
4. The System announcements can be externally recorded and uploaded to the
system in a telephony quality (64 Kbps) wav file format.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Multi Language
177
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Related Features





Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Station Groups
Announcements
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Hardware
178
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.59 Multiple Voice Mailbox Support
Description
A station can access any Voice Mailbox by dialing the VM group, the mailbox number and
password. If you use an iPECS IP and LDP Phone, one or more Flex buttons of your phone
can be configured to access a specific mailbox and receive a visual indication (LED flashes)
of message status in the mailbox. A Flex{VMAILBOX} button is assigned to allow access to
each Voice Mailbox.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {VMAILBOX} Flex button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + VM group + Mail-box (station) number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To access a Voice Mailbox using the {VMAILBOX} Flex button
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER].
2. Press the {VMAILBOX} Flex button.
3. Dial the Mailbox password.
Conditions
1. A Flex button can be assigned to access the Mailbox for a Station Group or
outside Line Voice Mailbox.
2. The {VMAILBOX} button LED will flash indicating new messages have been
received in the associated mailbox.
3. A Flex button cannot be assigned to access the mailbox of a networked station.
4. An external Voice Mail system may not provide proper notification to the system of
message status and thus, the {VMAILBOX} button LED may not properly indicate
new messages when using an external Voice Mail system.
Programming
Related Features


External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Integrated Voice Mail


iPECS IP or LDP Phone
External or Integrated Voice Mail
Hardware
179
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.60 Network Security & Priority
Description
Each IP device that connects to the iPECS UCP supports several security and priority
protocols. IP devices incorporate a Web server, which will deliver the Module Web Admin
pages to a standard browser.
Characteristics that can be established are:
 IEEE 802.1p/Q, VLAN – sets Virtual LAN tag and priority for Ethernet frame
 Diffserv – sets Diffserv Code Point priority for IP packet
 IPSec – enables IPSec to establish IPSec tunnel and encryption of IP packet
 SRTP – enables Secure RTP for RTP packet payload using AES (Advanced
Encryption Service).
Operation
System
Operation of Security and priority is automatic once configured.
Conditions
1. For Web Admin, the password is encrypted using the Ericsson-LG Enterprise Java
Virtual Encryption plug-in. A Java Virtual Machine (MS or Sun) must be installed in
the user’s PC to support password encryption.
2. Security and priority characteristics can be set for all devices, local or remote.
3. Devices must be on the same LAN to support SRTP.
4. The iPECS implementation of IPSec employs a proprietary Key exchange protocol
from the system to the iPECS device.
5. IEEE 802.1 VLAN priority and ID are set at each device using the device Web
interface. Diffserv, IPSEC and SRTP treatments may also be set in the device via
the local Web interface. For the iPECS UCP module, VLANs are configured via the
maintenance interface of the RS-232 port.
Programming
BOARD BASED
DATA
Board Based Attributes RTP Security
Related Features
Hardware
180
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.61 Outside Call Redirect
Description
You can assign a Flex button of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone to send an incoming outside
call to a pre-defined destination such as the Attendant, Voice Mail, another Station, or Hunt
group without answering the call. Call Redirect acts as a one-time Call Forward.
Operation
To assign a Flex button for {Call Redirect}
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “58” + destination + [HOLD/SAVE]
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Call Redirect while receiving an outside call
1. Press the {Call Redirect} button; the call is redirected to the defined destination.
Conditions
1. Conditions and programming associated with Call Forward apply.
2. Only the ringing call will be redirected; the next incoming outside call is routed as
normal.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
181
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.62 Outside Call Time Restriction
Description
The system can be programmed to limit the length of outgoing calls by specified stations. If
Call Time Restriction is assigned to a station, when the station places an outgoing call, the
system initiates the Cut-Off timers for the Station and the outside Line. Fifteen (15) seconds
prior to expiration of the shortest timer, a warning tone is delivered to the station. At expiration,
the system terminates the call returning the external Line to idle.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned.
Conditions
1. Once activated, the Cut-Off timer continues timing while the call is connected to
the system even if the call is transferred or picked up at another station.
2. Two Cut-Off timers are provided, one assigned on a Station basis, the other
assigned CO basis. The shortest of the two timers controls the Cut-Off function
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Call Time Restriction
Station Timer Cut Off Timer
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO Cut Off Timer
Related Features

Call Duration Warning Tone Timer
Hardware
182
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.63 Outside Line Access
Description
Stations can access outgoing Lines, if allowed Line access in the System database. The
iPECS IP and LDP Phones may use flexible buttons assigned to access a specific Line or
Line group button for outgoing calls or a {LOOP} button.
Individual users may be allowed to assign Flexible buttons to access a Line or Line group.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {LOOP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “85” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To assign a {POOL} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} +” 89” + CO Group Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To place an outgoing outside call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press desired {LINE}, {POOL} or{LOOP} button, or dial the Line or Line group
access code.
3. Dial the desired outside number.
To answer an incoming outside call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
Or,
Press the flashing {LINE}, {POOL} or {LOOP} button; this will answer the call over
the speakerphone. You may lift the handset to speak privately.
SLT
To place an outgoing outside call
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial the CO line or Group access code.
3. Dial the desired number.
To answer an incoming outside call
1. Lift handset.
Conditions
1. When you dial “9”, the system will search the preferred Line Group for an idle Line,
if there is no idle Line then the system will search the 1st Line Group for an idle
Line. The system may continue the search through all Line Groups for an available
Line if “1st CO/IP Group Override” is enabled.
2. If not allowed access to a specific outside Line, you receive error tone when
183
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Issue 1.3
access is attempted. You may receive transferred calls on such denied access
Lines but will not be able to flash or use the Line for an outgoing call.
A station denied access to an outside Line but assigned to have ring for the Line
will receive ring, a flashing {LINE} button LED and may answer the call. You may
transfer the call but cannot make an outgoing call on the Line.
When you place an outside call, the audio transmit path to your station is muted
until the system has verified Toll Restriction for the Line.
When an analog Line is seized, the system will monitor the Line for dial tone.
The system selects Lines from a group using the Round-robin or Last-choice
method as assigned in the system database.
When an iPECS IP or LDP Phone is not assigned Ringing Line Preference, the
user must press the ringing {LINE} button to answer the call.
iPECS IP and LDP Phone users may be assigned exclusive use of a Line as a
Private Line.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Individual CO Access, CO PGM
Ringing Line Preference, Prefer CO or Group, CO/IP Group
Access
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO/IP Group
CO/IP Ring Assignment
Related Features




Outside Line Groups
Line Ring Assignment
Ringing Line Preference
Private Line
Hardware
184
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.64 Outside Line Queuing
Description
When outside Lines are busy, if permitted, you can request to be placed in a queue awaiting
the Line or a Line in the same group to become available. When an appropriate Line
becomes available, the system calls queued users on a first-in first-out basis.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To request to be placed in queue for a busy Line
1. Press the busy {LINE} or {POOL} button.
2. Press the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button, confirmation tone is received.
3. Hang-up, the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] LED flashes.
To cancel the queue from the queued station
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button, the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] LED
extinguishes.
SLT
To request to be placed in queue while receiving “All Lines Busy” signal
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “556”, the Callback feature code.
To cancel the queue from the queued station
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “556”, the Callback feature code.
System
When a Line becomes available
1. Send distinctive Queue recall to the station with oldest queue, flash appropriate
{LINE} button LED. Maintain the Line and place the station in busy status.
Conditions
1. An outside Line can have any number of simultaneous queue requests.
2. A station may only have a single active outside Line queue request. Activating a
new queue request will replace, and thus cancel, an existing queue.
3. A Queue recall will always signal the station with tone ring, ignoring the station’s
assigned Intercom Signaling mode.
4. Queue recall will bypass a busy station, and place the station at the bottom of the
queue list.
5. Queue recall will signal a station for 15 seconds, after which, the station is
removed from the queue; the queue is cancelled.
185
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes CO/IP Line Queuing
Related Features

Outside Line Access
Hardware
186
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.65 Personal Groups
Description
A Personal Group consisting of your master station and group member stations (maximum
32 including your master station) can be configured by the system Administrator. When your
master station receives a call all members also receive the call and, when placing a call, the
master station access and dialing restrictions are used. Each member can still receive calls to
their station number.
Certain attributes of the master station can also be delivered to member stations, if
configured, including:
 Master Wake-Up will send the Wake-Up alarm set at the master station to all station
members.
 Master Call Forward will forward member calls as well.
 Master DND activates DND at the master and all member stations.
 Linked Option
− When ON, the members of the Personal Group act as a Linked station of the
master station. When one station of the group is busy, all are busy; Linked
stations will receive the 'linked pair in-use' display.
− When OFF, the members receive calls for the master employing Call Coverage,
attributes of the master. Wake-Up, Call Forward and DND can be enabled for the
members. The LCD of member stations displays outgoing call information for the
master. Each member maintains separate calling capabilities and the master will be
busy only when all members are busy.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. Unlike the ‘Linked Pair stations, the stations in Personal Group even with the
Linked option enabled maintain a separate station database and station number.
2. DECT phone can’t be the master station.
3. When DECT phone press [Talk] button, they can’t pick up the call of the talking
personal group member.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Personal Group
Personal Group Attributes
Related Features





SMDR
Call Coverage
Wake-Up
Message Wait/Call Back
Linked Station Pairs
Hardware
187
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.66 Pre-Defined & Custom Text Display Messages
Description
You can select a text message that will display in the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP Phones
when they call you. When you activate Text Display Messages, incoming intercom calls will
signal with muted Ring in-place of normal ring and the LCD of the calling user displays the
message you selected.
There are ten Pre-defined messages (01-10), ten system-wide Custom messages and one
user defined Custom message that you can enter. Your Custom message, the user defined
message, is message number 00, messages 01 to 10 are the Pre-defined messages and
messages 11 to 20 are the system-wide Custom messages. Several of the ten Pre-defined
messages allow for auxiliary information such as a time, date or number.
System level Custom Messages are entered from the Attendant or Administrator’s phone or
via the Web Admin. Your Custom Message is entered from your phone, the Attendant, or the
Administrator.
As a default, when Text Display Message is active, your phone is effectively in DND to
internal callers. The system can be configured to deliver ring to your phone by disabling the
Pre-selected Message DND attribute for your phone.
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones may have a Flex button defined for{DISPLAY
MESSAGE}and the button may include the message code to act as a {ONE-TOUCH
DISPLAY MESSAGE} button.
The Pre-defined messages are:
Message 01
LUNCH RETURN AT HH:MM
Message 02
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE DD:MM
Message 03
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME HH:MM
Message 04
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATEDD:MM
188
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Message 05
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 06
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
Message 07
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
Message 08
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 09
AT HOME
Message 10
AT BRANCH OFFICE
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button for Display Messages
{DISPLAY MESSAGE} button:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “51” + [HOLD/SAVE]
{ONE-TOUCH DISPLAY MESSAGE} button:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “51” +message number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate Display Message
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “51”, the Display Message code.
3. To view available messages, press the[VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button.
4. Dial the Message number (“00”-“20”).
5. Dial auxiliary input, as desired.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Or,
1. Press the {DISPLAY MESSAGE} button.
2. To view available messages, press the[VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button.
189
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3. Dial the Message number (“00”-“20”).
4. Dial auxiliary input, as desired.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Or,
1. Press the {ONE-TOUCH DISPLAY MESSAGE} button.
2. Dial auxiliary input, as desired.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To cancel an active Display Message
1. Press the flashing [FWD] button.
To define your Custom Text Message (00)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “52”, the Custom Message program code.
3. Enter the Message contents, up to 24 characters using two (2) dial pad digits for
each character.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is received, your new Custom
Text Display Message is stored and the station returns to idle.
SLT
To activate a Display Message
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “51”, the Display Message code.
4. Dial Message number (“00”-“20”).
5. Dial auxiliary data as desired.
6. Momentarily press the hook-switch, confirmation tone is received.
To cancel an active Display Message
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “559”, the SLT Feature Cancel code.
To enter the User Custom Message (00)
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “52”, the Custom Message program code, confirmation is received.
4. Enter the Message contents, up to 24 characters.
5. Momentarily press the hook-switch, confirmation tone is received.
System Attendant
To activate Display Messages for other stations
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “051”, Attendant Display Message code.
3. Dial the station range, for a single station dial the same station number twice.
4. To view available messages, press the[VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button.
5. Dial Message number (“00”-“20”).
6. Dial auxiliary data as desired.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
190
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To cancel active Display Messages for other stations
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “052”, Attendant Display Message Cancel code.
3. Dial the station range, for a single station dial the same station number twice.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To enter a System-wide Custom Message
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “053”, the System-wide Custom Message program code.
3. Dial desired Message code (“11”-“20”).
4. Enter the Message contents, up to 24 characters.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is received, the new Custom
Message is stored and the station returns to idle.
Conditions
1. The iPECS UCP can automatically activate DND to internal callers when you
activate Pre-selected or Custom Text Message Display. Enabling P-Msg DND
activates DND when a Text Display Message is activated.
2. Only the System Attendant or Administrator can assign the contents of Custom
Messages 11-20.
3. The alphanumeric characters are displayed as they are entered; refer to Station
Speed Dial for entry procedures.
4. Display Message is cancelled if you activate DND or Call Forward.
5. Custom Text Display Messages and Display Message status are stored in nonvolatile memory to protect against loss during power failure.
6. The calling station must be an iPECS IP or LDP Phone with display to receive the
message.
7. SLTs are notified of an active Display Message with stutter dial tone. The iPECS
IP and LDP Phones will have a flashing [FWD] button when Text Display Message
is active.
8. Activating Text Display Message does not affect normal operation of the station.
9. Pre-defined Messages 01 to 04 and 06 to 08 permit you to input auxiliary
information such as time, date or number.
10. The Attendant station can activate Text Display Messages for other stations.
However, the Text Display Message feature is not available to an Attendant.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Pre-Selected MSG DND
Related Features




Silent Text Message
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call Forward
Speed Dial

iPECS IP or LDP Phone required to receive Display Messages
Hardware
191
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.67 Prefix Dialing Table
Description
The Prefix Dialing Table supports several features. On analog CO Lines, the table is used to
determine the cost of the call. For ISDN Lines assigned Enblock dialing and SIP Trunks,
Enblock dialing can be supported so that you don’t need to wait for the inter-digit time-out to
send digits as a block to the ISDN or SIP service provider. Up to 500 Prefix numbers and
associated entries are available in the table.
When employed for calculating the cost of a call, the system will compare the outgoing digits
dialed with the Prefix Table entries (maximum 8 digits). If the first dialed digits match the entry,
the cost of the call is determined using the Prefix Dialing Table. The Call Charge timer
assigned in the table for the Line is used in-place of meter pulses along with the Cost per
Meter Pulse assigned in the system database. The cost is then calculated as:
(Call Duration/Call Charge Timer) * Cost per Meter Pulse.
When used for Enblock dialing, the first digits you dial are compared to the Prefix digits. If the
digits match, when you dial the maximum number of digits assigned, the number is
immediately sent to the service provider as a block. If there is no match or the maximum
digits count is not reached, the system will wait for the inter-digit time before sending the
digits. For an ISDN Line, a minimum number of digits can be defined. Even if the Prefix digits
match, the call will not be processed until the minimum number of digits is dialed.
Each Line is assigned a Table Id that must match the Table Id entry in the Prefix Dialing
Table to be considered for the specific Line.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. For ISDN Enblock dialing, ISDN messages will include the Type of Number,
Numbering plan type and sending complete messages, if assigned in the matching
Prefix Dialing Table entry.
Programming
ISDN LINE DATA
Prefix Dialing Table
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes  Prefix Table ID
Related Features
Hardware
192
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.68 Redundant System Processor
Description
The iPECS UCP system supports redundant processor operation. The redundant system
processor is a hot standby processor. The LAN2 port of the master iPECS UCP module is
connected directly to theLAN2 port of the standby UCP module for local redundancy, in which
case the LAN2 ports may be connected over the LAN or WAN. The standby iPECS UCP
module monitors the active iPECS UCP module LAN1 and LAN2 port and takes over system
control if the:

active UCP module power fails.

active UCP module is reset.

LAN1 or 2 connection to the active iPECS UCP module fails or is removed, or,

standby UCP module does not receive a polling message from the active UCP
module for 1 minute.
If failure occurs, the standby UCP module will take over and maintain control of the system.
When the original master recovers from failure, it functions in the standby mode. The active
UCP module will maintain the system database for both the active and standby processor.
Operation
Operation of redundant processors is automatic when installed.
Conditions
1. The Master/Slave switch on the main iPECS UCP module must be set in the
Master position and the stand-by UCP module must be set in the Slave position to
match the system Admin settings.
2. All eight wires of the Cat 5 cable must be terminated on the RJ45 connectors.
3. It is not possible to use the built-in Voice Mail, a UVM or external VM should be
installed when CPU redundancy is required. If you enable redundancy
(Redundancy Attributes CPU Redundancy Usage),the built-in Voice Mail is
placed “OUT of Service”.
4. With Geographic Redundancy active, both the Master and Slave can be active at
the same time.
5. With local redundancy both the Master and Slave can be active at the same time if
theLAN2 cable is out of order. These dual active processor conditions can be
addressed using the IP Watch time. When the timer is set, the Master sends an
ARP packet from the LAN1 port to the Slave at the timer interval allowing the Slave
can to determine the state of the Master. If the Slave receives an ARP packet,
even though the LAN2 port fails it will not become the active processor thus
preventing the potential for a dual processor active condition.
193
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Programming
REDUNDANCY DATA
Redundancy Attributes CPU Redundancy Usage, Change
Active UCP by Power Fail, Geographic Redundancy
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers IP Watch timer
Related Features
Hardware

For Main and stand-by UCP installation, please refer to the iPECS
UCP Hardware Description and Installation Manual.
194
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.69 Registration & Fractional Module Tables
Description
Normally, local iPECS devices can register with the system only when the “Registration
Switch”, 3rd Dip switch on the UCP module, is ON. In this state, the system will allow any
local iPECS device to register, providing a convenient “plug & play” initial installation. After
initial installation, the Registration Switch is placed in the OFF position, disabling registration
of additional local devices.
To eliminate the potential for unintended device registration, particularly where multiple
systems exist on the same LAN, the system can be programmed to allow local device
registration employing MAC addresses. Using the defined MAC address registration, the
system allows a device with a matching MAC address to register regardless of the
Registration Switch position.
Three tables are provided to enter MAC addresses. The System & Device IP Plan allows
entry of two MAC address ranges. Any device with a MAC address in either of the ranges will
be permitted to register with the system.
The second is the Registration Table. This Table permits entry of five MAC addresses and
the number of channels to be registered for each device. Entering the MAC address permits
the device to register with the system regardless of the Registration Switch position. The
number of channels available to the device is limited to the number of channels entered in the
Table. This function is commonly used to limit the number of channels available over an
E1/T1 or PRI ISDN circuit (Fractional T1 line).
The third is Device Login  Remote Device Registration that allows entry of the MAC
address of a remote phone or gateway Module as well as the Nation code and Zone. During
registration, the system will compare the MAC address received from the remote device and,
if matched, will permit registration of the device. Once the device is registered, the data for
the device is placed in the appropriate locations and the data is removed from the Remote
Device Registration Table.
Operation
Operation of registration is automatic based on the system database and Registration
Switch position.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING PLANS
System& Device IP Plan First MAC Range, Second MAC
Range
TABLES DATA
Registration Table
195
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
DEVICE LOGIN
Remote Device Registration
Related Features
Hardware
196
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.70 Prepaid Call
Description
Prepaid refers to services paid for in advance.
There are two kinds of prepaid call. One is CO prepaid call and the other one is Station
prepaid call. If a CO line is configured to use prepaid call, the CO line is available for outgoing
call until prepaid money becomes empty. When you make prepaid calls, the prepaid money
is deducted based on call metering pulse. Eventually, if prepaid money of a CO line is
consumed completely, users can not make an outgoing call with that CO line.
If a station is configured to use prepaid call, it can use outgoing call until its prepaid money is
used up.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. CO prepaid call has a higher priority than station prepaid call.
A. If a CO is allowed to use prepaid call, a station of which station prepaid call is not
possible can make an outgoing call with that CO.
B. On the contrary, if a CO is not allowed to use prepaid call, a station of which station
prepaid call is possible can’t access to that CO for outgoing call.
2. Emergency call will be possible even if Station or CO prepaid money is empty.
Programming
CO/IP
Prepaid Call (PGM 141-Button 21)
Prepaid Money (PGM 141-Button 22)
Related Features



Station prepaid call
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)- Call Cost display
Outside Call Warning Tone Timer
Hardware
197
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.71 Remote Control from Mobile Phone
Description
In addition to the call features available to your Mobile phone, you can control certain settings
through your Mobile phone. The Mobile has access to the Remote Control menu shown
below.

1: Activate Mobile extension

2: Deactivate Mobile extension

3: Unconditional Forward to VM group

4: Cancel Fwd to VM group

5: ACD Agent Off-Duty

6: ACD Agent On-Duty

7: Callback to Mobile extension

8: Turn On CCR Temporary Announcement – [8 + CCR table number]

9: Turn Off CCR Temporary Announcement – [9 + CCR table number]
A system announcement can be recorded and will play when you enter the Remote Mobile
Extension Code. The announcement can be used to list the Remote Control Menu.
Operation
Mobile Phone
To use the Remote Control Menu
1. Call your system DID number.
2. Upon answer, enter “580”, the Remote Mobile Extension Control code.
3. Dial the desired menu, dial tone is returned as confirmation.
Conditions
1. For proper operation, your phone must be allowed to Program the Mobile
Extension parameters, permitted Call Forward and access to the integrated Voice
Mail must be enabled, and an Authorization code assigned.
2. Selecting ACD Agent Off-Duty will place you Off-duty with Reason code 1.
3. If you select Call Back from the Remote Menu, the call will be disconnected after
the confirmation tone then the system calls your mobile extension.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan Remote MEX Control
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Call Forward
VM Attributes VSF Access
TABLES DATA
Mobile Extension Table PGM Authority, Announcement
Related Features


Call Forward
Mobile Extension
Hardware
198
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.72 Ringing Line Preference
Description
When Ringing Line Preference is enabled, you can answer calls ringing at your phone by
lifting the handset or pressing the[SPEAKER] button. You may select a Line before lifting the
handset or pressing the [SPEAKER] button, which will override Ringing Line Preference and
connect you to the Line you selected.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To answer a call while the station is ringing
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
Conditions
1. When multiple calls are ringing at your Station, a priority defines the order in which
calls are answered. The default priority is Transfer > recalls > incoming calls >
queued calls.
2. Intercom calls are always given the lowest answering priority.
3. Ringing Line Preference overrides Prime Line assignment.
4. SLTs operate only in the RLP mode; when ringing, lifting the handset connects the
SLT to the ringing call.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Auto Speaker Selection
Common Attributes Ringing Line Preference
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
SYSTEM DATA
RLP (Ring Line Preference) Priority
Related Features


Prime Line Immediately/Delayed
Automatic Speaker Select
Hardware
199
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.73 Speed Dial
2.73.1
Display Security
Description
Station and System Speed Dial numbers may be programmed so that the telephone number
digits are not displayed on the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP Phones when the Speed Dial is
selected.
Operation
To assign Display Security to a Speed Dial number
1. Dial “*” as the first digit of the Speed Dial number.
Conditions
1. The number is displayed when programming the Speed Dial number.
2. Display Security does not affect the SMDR output.
3. Display Security is provided on all outside calls including calls that are transferred
or recall.
4. An “*” in any digit position other than the first, will activate Pulse to Tone
Switchover.
Programming
Related Features


Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover
Speed Dial
Hardware
2.73.2
Speed Dial Pause Insertion
Description
A pause dialing command may be inserted in a Station or System Speed Dial number. When
encountered, the system will stop dialing the Speed Dial number for the assigned “pause”
duration. You can insert multiple pauses into a Speed Dial number. The pause feature is
often used to allow external network equipment time to connect and deliver dial tone.
200
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
System
Pause operation is automatic when encountered; see Station or System Speed Dial for
pause entry.
Conditions
1. The timed pause is required and used only with analog CO Lines.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Pause Timer
Related Features


Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Hardware
2.73.3
Station Speed Dial
Description
You can store commonly dialed numbers for easy access using Station Speed Dial. With
iPECS UCP, your Station has access to 100 Speed Dial numbers each stored in a “bin”.
Each Speed Dial number can be up to 25 digits in length and may include special instruction
codes.
Special instruction codes available are:
‘*’ as 1st digit
Activate Display Security, do not display number.
‘*’ not 1st digit
Switch from Pulse to DTMF dialing
[DND]
Insert a Flash command
Flash as 1st digit
Activate dial tone detect.
st
[MESSAGE/CALLBACK]as 1 digit
Activate ISDN Keypad Facility
[MESSAGE/CALLBACK]
Insert pause dialing command.
Your iPECS IP and LDP Phone may have a Flex button assigned for One-Touch access to a
specific Speed Dial number. In addition, you may assign a telephone number directly to a
Flex button on your iPECS IP and LDP Phone. In this case, the telephone number is
allocated to the highest numbered Station Speed Dial bin you have available.
201
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {STATION SPEED DIAL} button
[TRANS/PGM]+ {FLEX}+ [SPEED]+ Station Speed Dial bin number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To dial using a Station Speed Dial with a [SPEED] button
1. Lift handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the desired bin number (“00”-“99”).
To program a Station Speed Dial number using the [SPEED] button
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the Speed Dial bin number (“00”-“99”).
4. Select a Line button or dial a Line access code.
5. Dial the number to be stored.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
7. If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart below.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
iPECS IP Phones with 3-Soft buttons
To dial using a Station Speed Dial using an LIP 8000/8000E/9000 series phones with soft
buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Dial the desired bin number (“00”-“99”).
To program a Station Speed Dial number using an LIP-8000/8000E/9000 series phones
with soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Press the [ADD] soft button.
4. Dial the Speed Dial bin number (“00”-“99”).
5. Press Line button or dial the Line access code.
6. Dial the number to be stored.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
8. If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart below.
9. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
SLT
To dial using a Station Speed Dial
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial “558”, the SLT Speed Dial access code.
3. Dial the desired bin number (“00”-“99”).
To program a Station Speed Dial number
1. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
202
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Issue 1.3
Dial “555”, the SLT Speed Dial assignment code.
Dial the Speed Dial bin number (“00”-“99”).
Dial the Line access code.
Dial the number to be stored.
Momentarily press the hook-switch.
If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart below.
Momentarily press the hook-switch.
ALPHANUMERIC DIAL-PAD ENTRIES
1
Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
2
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
3
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 - 30
4
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
5
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
6
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 - 60
7
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
8
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
9
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
*
Blank - *1
: - *2
, - *3
0
0-00
#
#
Conditions
1. Accessing an empty Speed Dial bin will return error tone.
2. A Speed Dial number uses a specific Line/or Line from a Group assigned in the
Speed Dial bin. If the assigned line is busy, a line from the same group will be
selected. If all lines in the group are busy, the user may queue for the next
available line.
3. All Speed Dial numbers are stored in memory protected from power loss.
4. For iPECS IP and LDP phones, a call placed with Speed Dial will appear under the
Flex button assigned for the Line, Line Group, or the general Line appearance
Loop button, as appropriate for the station Flex button configuration.
5. You may pre-select a Line for a Speed Dial number, overriding the Line
assignment in the Speed Dial bin.
6. A name can be entered for a Speed Dial number to permit access from the Dialby-Name directory.
7. If a Speed Dial number contains a “Dial Tone Detect” command(Flash as the first
entry) and dial tone detect is enabled for the Line, the system must detect dial tone
before dialing the Speed Dial number.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes CO Dial Tone Detect
203
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Related Features










CO Line Flash
Dial-by-Name
Display Security
Keypad Facility
LNR (Last Number Redial)
Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover
Save Number Redial (SNR)
Speed Dial Pause Insertion
System Speed Dial
Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment
Hardware
2.73.4
System Speed Dial
Description
Commonly dialed numbers can be stored by the System Attendant or by the Administrator in
Web Admin for easy access by stations allowed use of System Speed Dial bins. With iPECS
UCP up to 12,000 System Speed Dial numbers are available. Each Speed Dial number can
be up to 25 digits in length and may include special instruction codes.
Special instruction codes available are:
‘*’ as 1st digit
Activate Display Security.
‘*’ not 1st digit
Switch from Pulse to DTMF dialing.
[DND]
Insert a Flash command.
Flash as 1st digit
Activate dial tone detect.
[MESSAGE/CALLBACK] as 1st digit
Activate ISDN Keypad Facility
[MESSAGE/CALLBACK]
Insert a pause dialing command.
You may assign a Flex button of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone for One-Touch access to a
specific System Speed Dial bin.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {SPEED} button for a System Speed Dial
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [SPEED] + System Speed Dial bin number +
[HOLD/SAVE]
204
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To dial using a System Speed Dial using a [SPEED] button
1. Lift handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the desired bin number(“20000”-“31999”)
To dial a System Speed Dial number using an LIP-8000/8000E/9000 series phone with3soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Dial the desired bin number (“20000”-“31999”)
SLT
To dial using a System Speed Dial
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial “558”, the SLT Speed Dial access code.
3. Dial the desired bin number (“20000”-“31999”)
Attendant
To program a System Speed Dial number
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the Speed Dial bin number (“20000”-“31999”).
4. Press the Line button or dial the Line access code.
5. Dial the number to be stored.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
7. If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart under Station Speed Dial.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To enter a Station Speed Dial number using an LIP-8000/8000E/9000 series phone with 3soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Press the [ADD] soft button.
4. Dial the Speed Dial bin number(“20000”-“31999”).
5. Press the Line button or dial the Line access code.
6. Dial the number to be stored.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
8. If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart under Station Speed Dial.
9. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. Accessing an empty Speed Dial bin will return error tone.
2. A Speed Dial number uses a specific Line/or Line from a group assigned in the
Speed Dial bin. If the assigned Line is busy, a Line from the same group will be
selected. If all Lines in the group are busy, the user may queue for the next
available Line.
205
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3. All Speed Dial numbers are stored in memory protected from power loss.
4. For iPECS IP and LDP phones, a call placed with Speed Dial will appear under the
Flex button assigned for the Line, Line Group, or the general Line appearance
{LOOP} button, as appropriate for the station Flex button configuration.
5. The user may pre-select an outside Line for a Speed Dial number, overriding the
assignment in the Speed Dial bin.
6. A name can be entered for a Speed Dial number to permit access from the Dialby-Name directory.
7. If a Speed Dial number contains a “Dial Tone Detect” command (Flash as the first
entry) and dial tone detect is enabled for the Line, the system must detect dial tone
before dialing the Speed Dial number.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Speed Dial Access
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes CO Dial Tone Detect
TABLES DATA
System Speed Zone
Related Features










CO Line Flash
Dial-by-Name
Display Security
Keypad Facility
LNR (Last Number Redial)
Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover
Save Number Redial (SNR)
Speed Dial Pause Insertion
System Speed Dial
System Speed Zone (Groups)
Hardware
2.73.5
System Speed Zone (Groups)
Description
System Speed Dial bins can be divided into zones or groups. iPECS UCP systems have 50
Speed Dial Zones available. To access a Speed Dial Bin assigned to a zone, the station must
be allowed access to the Speed Dial Zone.
Each zone can be assigned to apply COS (Class of Service) dialing restrictions to the Speed
Dial numbers in the zone. When assigned, the system will apply the Station and Line COS
206
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
(Class of Service) to calls using Speed Dial numbers in the zone.
Operation
Refer to System Speed Dial for operation.
Conditions
1. The conditions of System Speed Dial apply to System Speed Dial numbers
assigned to a zone.
2. A station not assigned access to a zone will receive error tone when trying to
access a System Speed Dial number in the zone.
3. The COS (Class of Service) is applied to the Speed Dial number based on the
active service mode, Day/Timed or Night.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Speed Dial Access
TABLES DATA
System Speed Zone
Related Features


System Speed Dial
Class of Service
Hardware
207
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.73.6
Issue 1.3
Flexible Speed
Description
System has the default range of speed code for individual Station speed and System speed
codes.
To lessen length of speed code for user’s convenience, system provides programmable
options for selection of speed code range and length.
Station(individual) speed code
Type / System
System(Shared) speed code
Code
range
Digit
length
How many
Code range
Digit
length
How
many
000 - 099
3
100
20000 - 31999
5
12000
Default
UCP
(Type 0)
UCP default
Type 0
000 - 099
3
100
20000 - 31999
5
12000
Type1
000 - 099
3
100
2000 - 9999
4
8000
Type2
000 - 099
3
100
2000 - 7999
4
6000
Type3
000 - 099
3
100
2000 - 4999
4
3000
Type4
00 - 19
2
20
200 - 999
3
800
2 digit system speed (20-99), 2 digit station speed (00-19)
Type 5
00 - 19
2
20
20 - 99
2
80
2 digit system speed (10-99), 2 digit station speed (00-09)
Type 6
00 - 09
2
10
10 - 99
2
90
2 digit system speed (1-9), 2 digit station speed (0-0)
Type 7
0-0
1
1
1-9
1
9
To program/edit or dial speed code dial, the input of speed code should be in range of
selected speed code type.
Database compatibility is maintained because the internal data of speed code is not changed
in system database. Only visual range of speed code is adjusted when selecting the speed
code type.
Operation
User can select one of speed code types
Web Admin (System ID & Numbering Plans > System ID(100) > speed Numbering = select
the desired type.
208
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Station(individual) speed code
System / Type
UCP
System(Shared) speed code
Code range
Digit
length
How
many
Code range
Digit
length
How
many
Type 0
000 - 099
3
100
20000 - 31999
5
12000
Type 1
000 - 099
3
100
2000 - 9999
4
8000
Type 2
000 - 099
3
100
2000 - 7999
4
6000
Type 3
000 - 099
3
100
2000 - 4999
4
3000
Type 4
00 - 19
2
20
200 - 999
3
800
Type 5
00 - 19
2
20
20 - 99
2
80
Type 6
00 - 09
2
10
10 - 99
2
90
Speed Dial Phone Number Programming
User enter the speed code to program/edit the speed dial telephone number.
The speed code should be in range of selected the speed code range.
SPEED Dialing
User dials Speed Dial Code to make a phone call.
The speed code should be in range of selected the speed code range.
Conditions
1. Suggest to change Type from default before program/use SPEED Dials.
If change Type, during working with exist SPEED data, then range-out codes
referred to by preset-forward etc. will be seen as an empty or range-outassigned(65535) that need to be changed to a valid or need to be cleared by
manual programming. If not, features or data referring the range-out speed code
will go to failure.
2. Be careful, if change speed type from 3 or more digit system-speed(xxx/xxxx/xxxxx)
to 2 or less digit system-speed(x or xx) then the feature(off-net forward, etc.) data
that have 2digit station-speed(xx) previously, may be wrong-identified as location
of system speed xx or x. And vice versa in case of change from 2 digit or less
system-speed(xx or x) to 3 or more digit speed code (xxx/xxxx/xxxxx).
Programming
Keyset Admin.
STATION
Speed Dial Access (PGM 112-Button 8)
TABLES
System Speed Zone (PGM 232)
209
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Web Admin.
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Speed Dial Access
TABLES DATA
System Speed Zone
Related Features

System Speed Dial

Class of Service
Hardware
210
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.74 Station Call Coverage
Description
The Call Coverage feature permits your iPECS IP or LDP Phone to receive ring and answer
calls directed to a covered station. This feature is generally employed to allow a Secretarial
answering position to cover calls to other stations. When a covered station rings, the
{CALLCOVERAGE} button LED will flash and the covering station may receive ring
(immediate or delayed) for the call. The covering station can answer the call using the {CALL
COVERAGE} button, terminating ring at other stations. Once answered, the LED of {CALL
COVERAGE} buttons for the station at other covering stations will extinguish.
Operation of this feature requires a {CALL COVERAGE} button at the covering iPECS IP or
LDP Phone and the covered station must activate call coverage. A station can have multiple
Call Coverage buttons each covering a different station and multiple stations can have a Call
Coverage button for a given station.
Call Coverage has several options, as below that are configured in the system database.
 Call Coverage On Busy
 Call Coverage Through Mobile
 Call Coverage Wake-Up call
 Call Coverage Ring and Delay Ring
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {CALL COVERAGE} button at the covering station
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “76” + covered Station number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate Call Coverage at the covered station
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “141”, the Call Coverage code.
3. Dial “1” to enable or “0” to disable Call Coverage.
To assign ring for a {CALL COVERAGE} button
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “142”, the Call Coverage Ring code.
3. Dial the delay in ring cycles (“0”-“9”).
4. When a covered station receives a call, the covering station will receive the
following display:
CALL FOR STA xxxx
FROM yyyy time
Conditions
1. An iPECS IP or LDP Phone user may cover for a SLT or other stations. However,
211
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issue 1.3
since a Flex button is required, a SLT cannot provide coverage for other stations.
When off-hook or in DND, the covering station will only receive a visual indication
of the call from the LED of the {CALL COVERAGE} button and display, no offhook ring is provided.
The {CALL COVERAGE} button will provide an appearance for Lines that do not
appear on the covering station except for Private Lines. To cover for Private Lines,
the covering station must have an appearance and be allowed access to the
Private Line.
Call Coverage attributes can be assigned either by the covered station user or in
the system database.
A station cannot provide call coverage for a station to which it is linked.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Call Coverage Mode, Call Coverage
Delay Ring, Call Coverage On Busy, Call Coverage Through
Mobile Extension, Call Coverage On Busy Range, Call
Coverage Delay Ring Method, Call Coverage For Wakeup
Ring, Call Coverage Ring Type on Member
Related Features
Hardware
212
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.75 Station Groups
Description
Stations can be grouped for incoming call routing and Call Pick-up purposes. Ten types of
groups can be defined:

Circular

Terminal

ACD

Ring

Pick-Up

External Voice Mail

Integrated Voice Mail

Feature Server UMS Group

Net VM (Centralized External VM)

Unified Communication Solution Server
Circular Station Group
In Circular Hunt, calls to a station in the group will go to the station, if unavailable or
unanswered in the hunt no answer time; the call will be directed to the next station defined in
the group. The call will continue to hunt until each station in the group has been tried. The call
remains at the last station or passes to a designated overflow station or group.
A Circular Station Group can be assigned with a pilot number (the Station Group Number) so
that calls to the pilot number will hunt. In this case, the call will be directed to the first station
in the group and, if needed, hunt through each station in the group until reaching the last
station. The call may remain at the last station, passed to an overflow destination, or sent to a
Voice Mailbox.
Terminal Station Group
Calls to a station in a Terminal Station Group that encounter an unavailable or unanswered
status will be routed through the hunt process. The call will proceed to the next listed station
in the group until reaching the last listed station in the group. The call may remain at the last
station or be routed to an Overflow destination.
A Terminal Station Group can be assigned with a pilot number (the Station Group number) so
that calls to the pilot number will hunt. In this case, the call will be directed to the first station
in the group and, if needed, hunt through each station in the group until reaching the last
station. The call may remain at the last station, passed to an overflow destination, or sent to a
Voice Mailbox.
213
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
ACD Station Group
Calls can be sent to an ACD group by dialing the Station Group Number or assigning outside
Lines to ring directly to the Station Group. Calls are directed to the station in the group that
has been idle for the longest continuous time, Uniform Call Distribution. If all stations are busy
or unavailable when the call is received, the call may be routed to an alternate location or
may continue to wait (queue) for an available station in the group. After queuing to the group,
the caller may be routed to an overflow destination, which can be a Station, Station Group or
Voice Mailbox.
An ACD supervisor can be assigned to monitor the group and act to oversee operations of
the group. The ACD Supervisor can print group statistics and activate alternate routing as
well as assist agents.
Ring Station Group
A call to any station in the Group will cause all stations in the group to ring and any station in
the group may answer the call. If the call remains unanswered beyond the Overflow timer, the
call is sent to the Overflow destination, which can be a Station, Station Group or Voice
Mailbox.
A Ring Group station can receive indication of Ring Group call while busy on another call in
the form of Muted Ring. The call can be answered and Automatic Hold is supported.
Multiple calls can be received by a Station Ring Group and can be serviced in any order.
External AA/VM Station Group
This group is assigned to support an external Auto Attendant Voice Mail system that employs
SLT ports or SIP extensions to interface to the iPECS. An External AA/VM group is assigned
for either circular or terminal hunt. The External AA/VM that employs SLT ports may employ
either in-band signaling over the audio channel or SMDI protocol with a signaling connection
to the system RS-232 port.
Pick-Up Station Group
A station can be assigned to a Call Pick-Up group and then may pick-up (answer) calls to
other stations in the group employing the system’s Group Call Pick-Up feature.
Integrated AA/VM Group
Incoming calls can be directed to one of 200 user-recorded System announcements, which
may request further routing instructions from the user in the form of caller dialed digits. These
digits are employed to route the caller as defined in the system CCR (Caller Controlled
Routing) Tables.
The integrated AA/VM Group Voice Mail application receives calls forwarded or recalling from
a station. Such calls will receive the user’s pre-recorded greeting and may leave voice
214
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
messages. The user may call the integrated AA/VM Group to review and manage the
integrated Voice Mail application.
Feature Server UMS Group
The Feature Server is a PC based TAPI application with high-end Auto Attendant, Voice Mail
and Unified Messaging Service (Voice/Fax and E-mail). The iPECS Feature Server receives
calls, plays announcements, stores voice messages and forwards them as wave file
attachments to the user’s E-mail. The application also receives Faxes and forwards them as
attachments to E-mail. The Text-to-Speech option permits listening to E-mails as well as
voicemails.
Net VM
This group is defined to support a Centralized Voice Mail system for a distributed network
environment. At supported systems, the group is used to handle the AA/VM requirements
from the central iPECS UCP. The Net VM group may be the built-in AA/VM Group (VSF
Group), an external VM system or the iPECS Feature Server. The group number is assigned
in PGM 324.
UCS Group
This group is defined to support the Unified Communication Solution Premium services
available with the iPECS UCS Server.
Group Announcements
Station Group routing can be augmented with System announcements recorded in the
integrated AA/VM memory. Callers are routed to one of several user-recorded System
announcements. The system answers the call and plays the defined 1st announcement to the
caller. The announcement may provide the caller with routing options for Caller Controlled
Routing. The 1st announcement may be “Guaranteed” meaning it will play in full before
routing the call. A 2nd announcement can be provided to the caller should queue timers expire.
Operation
Conditions
1. The iPECS UCP supports 200 Station Groups with up to 200 members for each
group.
2. Station Group calls are not routed to member stations that are in DND.
3. When a member of a Circular, Terminal, ACD or Ring Group activates Call
Forward, calls to the group may still route to the member based on the Member
Forward option.
4. A call transferred to a Station Group will follow the routing for the group and will not
215
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
initiate the Transfer Recall process.
5. Calls to a Station Group receive either ring-back tone or MOH while queued to the
group.
6. Calls that are not answered in the Overflow time are routed to the defined Overflow
destination. If no Overflow destination is defined, the call is dropped after
expiration of the Overflow timer.
7. One of the 200 System announcements may be assigned as the Overflow
destination. These announcements can have a corresponding Caller Controlled
Routing table allowing the caller to enter digits for further routing.
Programming
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment
Station Group Attributes
Pick-Up Group Assignment
Related Features






Automatic Hold
Automatic Call Distribution
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Group Call Pick-Up
MOH (Music-On-Hold)
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
216
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.76 Station Flexible Button Default Table
Description
When a station is registered, administrator can assign preset flexible button table to the
station automatically by default.
Operation
1. Prepare default flexible button table for station in PGM “Flexible Button Defaults”.
2. Configure conditions for each priority. You can choose 3 conditions. These conditions
will be checked AND operation if the conditions are set.
A. Station model type
B. Number of flexible button(range)
C. Station number(range)
3. Register Stations.
Conditions
1. If a station is not matched with conditions, the flexible buttons will be assigned by
default according to number of buttons.
Programming
Web Admin.
TABLE DATA
Flexible button Default Table (239)
Preset Flexible Button Default (240)
STATION DATA
Flexible Button (115/129)
Related Features
Hardware
217
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.77 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
2.77.1
Call Cost Display
Description
Each SMDR call record includes a “Cost” field, which is a calculated estimate for the cost of
the call. The call cost updates in real-time and displays in the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP
Phones in place of the call duration.
The cost is determined by:

Fixed charge per “Call Meter Pulse”.

ISDN Advice of Charge or,

Estimated cost updated based on Elapsed Call Timer and assigned costing.
The technique selected to determine cost is based on the type of facility (analog CO, ISDN,
or VoIP), services provided by the carrier, and the system database.
Analog CO
Where “Call Metering Pulse” service is available from the carrier, the system will apply the
“SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse” and the “SMDR Decimal” to the Call Metering received to
estimate the call cost.
When no “Metering Type” is selected, the call duration is used with the cost/pulse and
decimal values to estimate the cost of the call. The cost is updated periodically using the
“Elapsed Call Timer” duration.
ISDN
ISDN providers may support “Advice of Charge” information in the ISDN Facility Message. If
assigned, the system will employ this information to display and output the call cost.
VoIP
For VoIP calls, the system employs the call duration, cost/pulse and decimal values to
establish the call cost estimate. The cost is updated periodically at intervals of the “Elapsed
Call Timer”.
Operation
System
Call cost is estimated automatically and output to iPECS IP and LDP Phone displays, and
included in the SMDR output.
Conditions
1. The call cost display begins after the “SMDR Start Timer” expires, if enabled, or at
receipt of the first Call Meter Pulse.
218
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2. Once connected to the system, the call duration includes the total time the call is
connected including periods when the call is on hold, in queue, etc.
3. To enable Call Cost Display, the “SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse” and “SMDR
Decimal ”must be assigned. When not assigned, the call duration is provided by
the system.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Analog Attributes SMDR Metering Unit
SYSTEM DATA
SMDR Attributes SMDR Cost Per Metering Pulse, SMDR
Decimal Location, Start Timer
System Timers  Elapsed Call Timer
Related Features




SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Lost Call Recording
Traffic Analysis
Outside Call Warning Tone Timer

Device to capture SMDR
Hardware
2.77.2
Lost Call Recording
Description
Incoming calls where the caller hangs up before answer or while in a hold state are
considered Abandoned or Lost calls. Special SMDR call records are provided for lost calls in
real-time, as they occur, and a summary Lost Call count report is available on-demand.
The real-time Lost Call records provide details on the called party, when and how long the
call rang or was on hold before being abandoned, etc. Description of the record details is
provided in the following charts. As noted in the charts, the dialed number field indicates the
type of call and the ring or hold duration before the call was abandoned. The first character in
the “NUM I” field is the status of the call when abandoned as shown below:
R
normal ring to a station,
G
ring to a station group and
H
call placed in a hold state, including Transfer hold.
219
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
The following displays examples of the SMDR output for Lost Call outputs.
DIAL/CLI/CPN
STA
CO
TIME
START
EXT
31
00:00
14/05/02 15:45 R RING 01:35
NUM-1
COST
ACCOUNT
DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
 Incoming call on CO Line 31 received on May 14, 2002 at 3:45 pm, rang the assigned
stations for 1 minute and 35 seconds.
DIAL/CLI/CPN
STA
CO
TIME
START
101
31
00:00
14/05/02 16:45 R RING 02:03
NUM-1
COST
ACCOUNT
DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
 Station 101 rang for an incoming call on CO Line 31 on May 14, 2002 at 4:45 pm, rang
for 2 minutes and 3 seconds.
DIAL/CLI/CPN
STA
CO
TIME
START
101
02
00:00
15/05/02 09:35 R 100 RING 00:49
NUM-1
COST
ACCOUNT
DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
 Incoming call on CO Line 02 on May 15, 2002 at 9:35 am forward from station 101 to
station 100 and ring for 49 seconds.
DIAL/CLI/CPN
STA
CO
TIME
START
104
05
00:00
16/05/02 11:06 G401 RING 01:32
NUM-1
COST
ACCOUNT
DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
 Incoming call on CO Line 05 on May 16, 2002 at 11:06 am routed to station 104 of
Station Group 401 and ring for 1 minute and 49 seconds.
DIAL/CLI/CPN
STA
CO
TIME
START
401
17
00:00
16/05/02 14:03 G401 RING 00:39
NUM-1
COST
ACCOUNT
DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
 Incoming call on CO Line 17 on May 16, 2002 at 2:03 pm routed to Station Group 401
and ring for 39 seconds.
DIAL/CLI/CPN
STA
CO
TIME
START
100
01
03:32
16/05/02 15:30 H100 03:02
NUM-1
COST
ACCOUNT
DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
 Call on CO Line 1 on May 16, 2002 at 3:30 pm placed on hold by station 100 for 3
minutes and 2 seconds had total duration of 3 minutes and 32 seconds.
DIAL/CLI/CPN
STA
CO
TIME
START
129
23
00:45
18/05/02 08:40 H100 RING 00:33
NUM-1
COST
ACCOUNT
DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
 Call on CO Line 23 on May, 18, 2002 at 8:40 am was transferred by station 100 to
station 129 was on hold for 33 seconds
220
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
The output for the Lost Call summary count report is shown below:
Lost call count start time: 05/01/02 09:31
Current time 26/04/02 16:32
Total Lost call count until now: 121
Operation
System Attendant
To print the summary Lost Call Count report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0115”, the Lost Call Count report code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To reset the Lost Call summary Count
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0116”, the Lost Call Count Reset code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. When the Lost Call Count is reset, the SMDR port will provide a “count reset”
message.
2. Individual Lost Call records are only available in real-time and not on-demand.
3. “Print Incoming Calls” and “Print Lost Calls” must be enabled in the SMDR
Attributes for the system to output real-time Lost Call records and for the Lost Call
Count summary report.
4. The fields of a Lost Call Record are the same as a normal SMDR Call Record.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
SMDR Attributes
Related Features



Call Cost Display
SMDR Call Records
Traffic Analysis

Device to capture SMDR
Hardware
221
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.77.3
Issue 1.3
SMDR Call Records
Description
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) provides detailed information on incoming and
outgoing calls. Assignable options in the system database permit recording of all external
calls, all external outgoing calls or toll calls, calls that exceed a fixed duration, and intercom
calls. Call records are output either upon completion of the call (real-time) or in response to a
request from the System Attendant. SMDR may be sent periodically to a defined E-mail
address.
The SMDR record output for external calls is as shown in the figure below. There are two
flexible fields, NUMI and NUMII. Each Field is defined to show Ring duration, CLI (Caller Id)or
CPN (Called Party Number).
NO
STA
CO
TIME
START
DIAL/CLI/CPN
XXXX
SSSS
BBB
DD:DD
FF/FF/FF
HCCCCCCCCCC
EE:EE
CCCCCCCC
COST
NUM-1
sssss
ACCOUNT
DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
Aaaaaaaa
Hccccccccccc
aaaa
ccccccc
DC
The various fields or items for a Call Record are:
NO
SMDR record number, optional output,
STA
Station number, up to eight (8) digits
CO
2 or 3 digit CO Line number
Time
Call duration in minutes and seconds
Start
Date and time call was placed/received
NUM I
Flex Field I, for outgoing call displays dialed number, for incoming call
displays Ring duration, CLI or CPN
Cost
Cost of Call
Account Code
Account code entered for call
NUM II
Flex Field II for incoming call, displays Ring duration, CLI or CPN or
blank,
DC
Disconnect Cause, optional output, with value:
01~7F: Follow cause value of Q.931 specification,
81: Disconnected, toll restricted
84/85: Disconnected, disconnect supervision
0: Other
The SMDR output for internal calls is as shown in the figure and explained in the chart below.
---- Site Name :
STA
CO
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------TIME
START
DIALED
COST
NUMBER
-------
-------
-------
---------------------
--------------
1000
00:00:01
06/11/08 10:53
E100
1005
00:00:00
06/11/08 14:13
S103
1010
00:00:10
06/11/08 11:05
E Conf Rm 1
1020
00:00:03
06/11/08 11:11
P123
222
--------------
ACCOUNT
CPN
CODE
NUMBER
--------------
--------------
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
STA
1000
DIALED
E1001
Issue 1.3
Meaning
1) Station 1000 called station 1001 and station 1001 answered.
2) In a conference, station 1000 was a conference master, station 1001 was
a conference member.
1005
S1003
Station 1005 sent an internal SMS to station 1003.
1010
E Conf Rm 1
Station 1010 was a member of conference room 1.
1020
P1023
Station 1020 paged station 1023.
Operation
System
For real-time SMDR, records are output after completion of the call as shown in the above
System Attendant
To print SMDR records on-demand
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0111”, the SMDR print code.
3. Enter the desired station range.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To delete stored records
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0112”, the SMDR delete code.
3. Enter the desired station range.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To abort SMDR printing
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0114”, the SMDR abort code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. For SMDR, if the first dialed digit(s) match the programmed LD (Long Distance)
code or the number of dialed digits exceeds the LD digit count, the call is
considered an LD call. When behind a PBX, LD determination is made only if a
PBX Trunk Access code is dialed as the first digit(s).
2. Except for DISA calls, the duration of ring for an incoming call is provided in the
Dialed number field.
3. A header, including the assigned “Customer Site Id” is output after two blank lines
and is repeated every 66th line.
4. The SMDR output is a simple ASCII stream of up to 80 characters per line.
5. When enabled, SMDR call record timing begins after the “SMDR Start Timer”
expires and ends at call completion.
6. For security, if an Authorization code is entered as the Account code, the call
223
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
record will show “STA-P” and the station number, or “SYS-P” and the Authorization
code index number in place of the Account code.
7. For incoming calls, the “NUM I” and “NUM II” fields will display the assigned data
item– Ring Service time, CLI, or CPN. For outgoing calls, the NUM I field will
always display the number dialed.
8. In case of Networking call, Nxxxx(nxxxx) can be displayed by [Display Nxxxx for
Net Number] option.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
SMDR Attributes SMDR Ring/CLI/CPN Service-I,SMDR
Ring/CLI/CPN Service-II / Print Serial No, SMDR Disconnect
Cause / SMDR ICM Save
SMDR ICM Print
Related Features




Call Cost Display
Lost Call Recording
Traffic Analysis
Authorization Codes (Password)

Device to capture SMDR
Hardware
224
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.78 System Administration
2.78.1
Keyset Administration
Description
The System Id and Numbering Plans portion of the system database can be accessed and
modified with the keypad and Flex buttons of an iPECS IP or LDP Phone. The display of the
Phone is employed to view items in the iPECS database. You may be required to enter a
password for access to Admin. Based on the Multi-level password, you will have access to
specified system database program codes in the Web Admin.
For detailed information on database administration and maintenance, refer to the iPECS
UCP Administration & Programming Manual.
Operation
Conditions
1. Only stations assigned with Admin access can enter and change the available
system database items. As a default, all iPECS IP and LDP Phones can access
the database.
2. The Keyset has access to most of the system database. However, certain
characteristics can be modified through Web Admin.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Admin
SYSTEM DATA
System Password
Related Features


Web Administration
Multi-Level Admin Access

iPECS LIP or LDP Phones with 12 or 24 Flex buttons
Hardware
2.78.2
Multi-Level Admin Access
Description
Access to the Web Admin database is protected by password. Up to three (3) levels of
access to the database can be established by assigning a different password to each level.
225
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
The Maintenance level has access to the entire database, all maintenance routines and
defines the Admin Access Authority of the two remaining passwords. The User and Admin
passwords can only access the defined database items. In Web Admin, a user of the
Maintenance password establishes the passwords and Web pages available to each
password level.
Operation
Detailed operation of Admin access and assigning access authority for each level is given
in the iPECS UCP Administration & Programming Manual.
Conditions
1. Admin Access Authority is defined only in the Web Admin; it cannot be defined
when using Keyset Admin.
2. Admin Access Authority applies to all Admin access whether accessed via an
iPECS IP or LDP Phone, ISDN, or IP channel.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Admin
SYSTEM DATA
System Password
Station Web Authorization
Web Access Authorization
Related Features


Keyset Administration
Web Administration
Hardware
2.78.3
Web Administration
Description
The system database is accessed and modified via an iPECS IP or LDP Phone, the LAN
interface or an ISDN BRI/PRI line. Both the LAN and ISDN access the system’s Web server,
which delivers the database as a set of Web pages to the user’s Web browser. Under the
proper conditions, both also allow for remote access to the system database.
For remote access, the system must be assigned a remotely accessible IP address. The IP
address should be fixed either as a public IP address or through a NAPT server with port
forwarding. The browser should be pointed to the system's IP address and the TCP port
assigned in the system database.
For the ISDN BRI/PRI, a PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) connection can be established
226
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
between a standard ISDN modem and the iPECS BRI/PRI board. The connection can be setup over a normal or DID BRI/PRI line. The system negotiates access using two User Ids and
matching passwords assigned in the database. In addition, for DID access the Called Party
number must match the assigned system PPP destination. Once a connection is established
over the BRI/PRI, the user’s Web browser can be opened and pointed to the system’s IP
address and assigned port for access to the database.
When accessed, the system will deliver the iPECS Admin and Maintenance Web page. From
this page, selecting Admin & Maintenance will return the login page where the user must
enter an Id and password that matches an assigned Id and password. Based on the Id and
password entered, the user is permitted access to specified system Web pages.
For detailed information on database administration and maintenance, refer to the iPECS
Administration & Programming Manual.
Operation
Conditions
1. For Web Admin, the password can be encrypted using the Ericsson-LG Enterprise
Java Virtual Encryption plug-in. A Java Virtual Machine (MS or Sun) must be
installed in the user’s PC to support password encryption.
2. If Web admin login fails five consecutive(5) times within 1-minute, then login is
blocked for a ten (10) minute period and a “blocked access” log is stored in the
Admin Log.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
&NUMBERING
PLANS
System & Device IP
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Web Server Port, Web Admin Password
Encryption
System Password
ISDN LINE DATA
PPP Attributes
Related Features


Keyset Administration
Multi-Level Admin Access
Hardware
227
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.79 System Alarm Notification Control
Description
The system has several fault alarms that can be enabled or disabled. When enabled, a
Station within each Zone can be assigned to receive a notification of the alarm event. A
second station in the Zone may be notified of Emergency calls from the zone. Alarms that
can be enabled are:

Emergency call placed

Digital (BRI or E1/PRI) Line fault

SIP Trunk/Extension registration fault.
Assigned stations receive the fault Alarm Signal, a single tone burst repeated at 1-minute
intervals or a continuous tone. The Alarm Signal may be terminated at the phone by dialing
the Alarm Reset code or, if assigned, pressing the {ALARM RESET} button. To rearm the
Alarm function, the alarm condition must be cleared and the Alarm signal terminated.
When enabled, the Emergency call or fault event causes an alarm ring at the Station. The
Station can terminate the fault Alarm notification
Operation
System
At detection of fault or Emergency Call, the Alarm signal is sent to assigned stations.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as an {ALARM RESET} button to terminate the Alarm Signal
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “565” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To terminate an Alarm Signal, while idle
1. Dial the Flex Numbering Plan code “565”, confirmation tone is received and the
Alarm Signal is terminated. If the alarm condition is cleared, the system will
automatically rearm the alarm monitoring.
Or,
Press the {ALARM RESET} button.
Conditions
1. The station must terminate the Alarm signal at their phone. However, a Main
Attendant can terminate the Alarm signal at the System Attendant.
2. When no station is assigned to receive an Alarm, the System Attendant will
receive the notification.
3. For Digital Line and SIP registration faults, the station in the Zone associated with
first Line of the BRI/E1/PRI interface or SIP channel receives the alarm signal.
4. The notification process for Emergency calls follows the Zone from which the call
228
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
was made and the System Attendant. The notified station can review the history of
Emergency calls from their Zone only. The System Attendant can review
Emergency Call history for all Zones.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Alarm Attributes Emergency Call Notify, DCOB Fault Notify,
SIP Registration Fault Notify
ZONE DATA
Zone Attributes Emergency Call Notify Station, Emergency Call
Notify 2nd Station, DCOB Fault Notify Station, SIP Registration
Fault Notify Station
Related Features



Emergency Call
Emergency Call Attendant Alert
SIP Service
Hardware
229
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.80 System Networking
2.80.1
Centralized Control T-NET
Description
In a Centralized Control T-NET (Transparent Network), a central iPECS UCP module
controls all remote modules and terminals providing transparent networked access to all the
features and functions of the central iPECS as well as the resources connected to the iPECS.
Where the remote device is not directly reachable by the iPECS, RTP packets must be
relayed through a local VoIP channel. A remote device may not be reachable when WAN
access for the device is through a firewall or NAPT server. In this case, the remote devices
are assigned a zone to manage RTP traffic between other devices connected in the T-NET.
The zone defines when an individual device requires use of a local VoIP channel. Zones are
used to identify other group characteristics as outlined in section 2.86.3.
Remote sites may include an iPECS UCP module operating in the local mode as a live backup to the remote central system. Under normal circumstances, the central UCP module
controls remote devices(gateway Modules and terminals) including any local UCP VoIP
channels. However, should the WAN connection between the central system and the remote
devices fail, the local UCP module will assume the call server responsibility for the local
devices. The local module thus provides local survivability and, based on configuration, may
provide PSTN back-up service (Fail-over)for internal calls that normally route over the WAN.
Under certain operating conditions, this equipment cannot be relied upon to make emergency
calls. Alternative arrangements should be made for access to the emergency services.
Operation
System
Operation of Centralized Network is automatic when configured & defined.
Conditions
1. In a Centralized Network, the maximum number of channels available is the
maximum number of channels supported by the central iPECS UCP.
2. In T-NET, Centralized Miscellaneous functions (Relay support, MOH, BGM,
Alarms and External Page) are not supported but, all terminals in the T-NET can
make and receive pages.
3. When NAPT or other firewall functions are implemented, packet relay for RTP
packets is required. Packet relay requires VoIP channels for each simultaneous
call desired.
4. The local UCP module will take over operation of registered devices if the central
controlling iPECS UCP does not respond to three consecutive poll attempts over a
10-second period. The central iPECS UCP module will gain control automatically
230
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.
6.
7.
8.
Issue 1.3
upon return of the WAN connection.
iPECS can be installed behind a NAPT however, Fixed Nat with port forwarding is
required for the host to be reachable by remote devices.
Up to 100 local UCP modules can operate in local mode as part of a T-NET.
You must install a license and enable T-NET for all iPECS UCP modules that are
part of the T-NET.
Local VSF( UVMU/UVM) should be used when “RTP Relay Device Utilization” is
set to “Separated (SRC to DEST).
Programming
T-NET DATA
T-NET Basic Attributes
T-NET CM Attributes
T-NET LM Attributes
T-NET FoPSTN Attributes
Related Features

Remote Devices

Remote UCP to support Local Survivability
Hardware
2.80.2
Distributed Control Network
Description
In the Distributed Control Network, each iPECS system maintains control over the devices
registered to it. The networked systems communicate employing QSig over ISDN Lines or
H.450 over IP Lines for basic networking capabilities and the proprietary iPECS protocol for
the advanced networking features. QSIG employs ISDN PRI channels only with support for
ESTI standards ETS 300-237/238/256/257/260/261/361/362/363/364.
As a member of the network, you will have access to resources of other systems in the
network such as outside Lines, Stations and Paging. A Network Numbering Plan determines
the system call routing; your dialed digits are compared with the Numbering Plan Table for
routing.
An array of features is supported over the network employing the same operational
procedures as the local operating procedure. Common features supported include:
 Call Transfer
 Conference
 Camp-on
 Call Back
 Message Wait
 Call Forward
231
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual

Issue 1.3
Intercom call (Station to Station Calling)
In addition, other features and functions, as detailed in the following sections, are available to
you as part of the distributed network environment.
Operation
Operation of Distributed Networking is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. To use the networking features, the software lock-key installation is required. To
obtain a lock-key, contact your local Ericsson-LG Enterprise representative with
the system serial number.
2. Each station must have a unique station number of up to eight (8) digits, which is
based on their local system Station Numbering Plan.
3. The Network Numbering Plan permits 251 entries, allowing up to 251 iPECS
systems to be in a single distributed network environment.
4. The alternative route employs a Speed Dial number to place a call and is not a
Networked call. Thus, the Distributed Control Network features do not apply.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Network Basic Attributes
Network Supplementary Attributes
Network CO Line Attributes
Network Numbering Plan
Network Feature Code Table
Related Features
Hardware
2.80.2.1 Net Intercom Call
Description
You can place calls to stations connected to other networked systems. Station calls across
the network are always terminated in the Tone Ring Intercom Signaling mode. Station calls
are placed in the normal manner by dialing the desired station number or pressing a {NetDSS} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {NET DSS} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Station Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
232
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To place an intercom call to a networked station
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial station number or press the {NET DSS} button.
3. Await answer.
SLT
To place an intercom call
1. Lift the handset to receive ICM dial tone.
2. Dial the station number.
3. Await answer.
Conditions
1. A {NET DSS} button LED indicates the status of the associated station.
2. The LCD will display the caller’s Name if Calling Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP) is enabled in the Networking parameters and the caller’s Name is assigned
in their local iPECS system.
3. If no idle path is available over the Network, you will hear error tone.
4. Network Intercom calls always signal in the Tone ring mode and are not subject to
Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling.
5. If a network failure occurs, the system will place an outside call using the Alternate
Speed Dial bin assigned in the Network Numbering Plan that corresponds to the
called user. Note this is not a Distributed Network call and thus features associated
with Networking such as Call Back, are not available.
6. Network Intercom calls are subject to the CO Call Restriction Timer.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic Attributes
Net CO Line Attributes
Net Numbering Plan
Related Features


Intercom (ICM) Call
Speed Dial
Hardware
2.80.2.2 Net Call Transfer
Description
An active call, internal or outside, can be transferred to other stations across the Distributed
Network. Calls can be transferred across the network employing screened or unscreened
transfer in the same manner as a transfer within a system and is transparent to the user.
233
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
From a network perspective, the iPECS can use either the ‘Join’ or ‘Re-route’ signaling
method to complete a call transfer over the network. The Networking Transfer Mode assigns
the method that will be used and should be selected to match other systems connected in the
private network.
 Join—an additional connecting path is needed to transfer the call to another Station.
 Routing—a new connecting path is used to transfer the call (the old connecting path
of the transferring station will be cleared).
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {NET DSS} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Station Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To transfer an active call with Screened Call Transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the station to receive the transfer.
3. At answer, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Or,
1. Press the {NET DSS} button for the desired station.
2. At answer, announce the call.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the station to receive the transfer.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Or,
1. Press the {NET DSS} button for the desired station.
2. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
SLT
To transfer an active call with, Screened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Station number to receive the transfer.
3. At answer, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Station number to receive the transfer.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Conditions
1. A {NET DSS} button LED indicates the status of the associated station.
2. iPECS UCP automatically determines the type of transfer, local or networked,
234
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Issue 1.3
based on the station number dialed and the Network Numbering Plan.
If you press the [TRANS/PGM]or other buttons during a transfer, the transfer is
cancelled. The original call is re-established if the [TRANS/PGM] button or original
CO Line button is pressed.
Network Call Transfer will recall to the transferring station if no response is
received from the called system in the Net Transfer Recall Time.
Networked systems are not designed to be non-blocking. Should no path be
available to complete the transfer, error tone is provided to the caller.
If the receiving station is busy, the transferring user will receive busy tone and may
camp the call to the busy station. If the receiving station is in DND, the call is
rejected, the caller receives fast-busy tone and cannot camp-on.
If a network failure occurs, the system will place an outside call using the Alternate
Speed Dial bin assigned in the Network Numbering Plan that corresponds to the
called user. Note this is not a Distributed Network call and thus features associated
with Networking such as Call Back, are not available.
The LCD will display the caller’s Name if Calling Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP) is enabled in the Networking parameters and the caller’s Name is assigned
in their local iPECS system.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic Attributes
Net Supplementary AttributesNet Transfer Mode, Net
Trans Recall timer
Net CO Line Attributes
Net Numbering Plan
Related Features


Call Transfer, Station
Speed Dial
Hardware
2.80.2.3 Net Call Identification Service
Description
When Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP) and Connected Name Identification
Presentation (CONP) are enabled, the station name is provided as the caller identification
received and displayed at a station receiving a call from a Networked station.
Operation
Operation of the Station Name Display is automatic when configured.
235
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Conditions
1. The Station Name must be defined in the system of the calling station.
Programming
STATION DATA
Station Name Display
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic AttributesNet CNIP Enable, Net CONP Enable
Related Features


Net Intercom Call
Net Call Transfer
Hardware
2.80.2.4 Network Call back (Call Completion)
Description
When you call a networked station that is busy, you can leave a Call Back request. When the
busy station returns to idle, you will receive a Call Back from the system. Upon answer, the
iPECS UCP will place a call to the originally busy station. Network Call Back operates in the
same manner as Call Back and is subject to the conditions associated with Call Back.
From a network perspective, iPECS UCP employs H.450 Call Completion, Busy Subscriber
(CCBS) protocol to provide call back capabilities. iPECS UCP supports the Connection
Retain mode in the H.450 (CCBS) protocol
Operation
To activate a Network Call Back while receiving busy tone
1. Press the [CALLBK] button.
2. The call is cleared after a confirmation tone.
3. When the busy station goes to Idle, the originator receives a callback ring.
4. When the originator answers the callback ring, a new call will be activated to the
calling station.
Conditions
1. A stand-alone IP Phone that supports H.450 can activate the Call Completion
feature.
2. A station can leave or have only one callback message, a new request cancels the
previous request and the new request is honored.
3. When you call a networked station, if the station is in DND or does not answer, you
will not be able to leave a Voice message using the [Message/Call Back] button.
You can leave a Voice message only if the called station forwards calls to their
Voice Mailbox.
236
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4. When you receive Call Back ring, the system dedicates a network path for your
call. You must answer your Call Back ring prior to the expiration of the Network
Transfer Recall Timer or, the Call Back is cancelled..
5. There are two methods to provide Net Call Back, connection mode and
connectionless mode based on the Net CC Retain Mode.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic AttributesNet CC Retain Mode, Net Trans Recall
timer
Net CO Line Attributes
Net Numbering Plan
Related Features


Call Transfer, Station
Net Call Transfer
Hardware
2.80.2.5 Net Call Camp-On (Call Offer)
Description
When calling to a networked station that is busy, you may camp a call on to the called station.
The called station receives a camp-on tone and the [Hold/Save] button LED will flash.
Network Camp-on operation is the same as system Camp-on and is subject to the same
conditions.
From a network perspective, iPECS UCP employs H.450 Call Offer protocol to provide campon capabilities.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Call Offer
1. Dial a busy station number and receive busy tone.
2. Press the [CAMP ON] button or “*”.
3. The busy station receives off-hook muted ring.
4. The calling station hears a ring-back tone.
To answer the Call Offer
1. Press the flashing CO line button while receiving muted ring.
Or,
2. Hang-up and receive normal ring.
3. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
237
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Conditions
1. Call Offer is only applied to a station that is in talking state.
2. If the busy party is in a conference or paging, Call offer is not available.
3. The system does not support the path reservation mode defined in the QSIG
specification.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Numbering Plan
Related Features

Call Waiting/Camp-On
Hardware
2.80.2.6 Net Conference
Description
You can join stations and outside Lines from other networked systems to a conference call
with other stations or CO lines.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To establish an ad-hoc conference
1. Establish the first call.
2. Press the [CONF] button. The LED will light, the connected party is placed on
exclusive hold and you receive dial tone.
3. Place the second call.
4. When connected, press [CONF], the new call is placed on exclusive hold.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 above to add additional conference parties.
6. Press the [CONF] button to establish conference.
To place a conference on hold
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, the [CONF] button LED will flash.
To retrieve held conference
1. Press the flashing [CONF] button, all parties reconnected.
SLT
To establish an 3-party conference
1. Establish the first call.
2. Momentarily press the hook-switch, the connected party is placed on exclusive
238
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
hold and you receive dial tone.
3. Place the second call.
4. When connected, momentarily press hook-switch twice in 2 seconds to connect all
parties.
Conditions
1. Multi-line conference time is not applied on 3-party Net Conference.
2. A SIP phone cannot initiate a Net Conference.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic Attributes
Net Numbering Plan
Related Features

Multi-Party Conference
Hardware
2.80.2.7 Net Station Message Waiting
Description
When a called station does not answer or is in DND, you can activate a Station Message
Wait indication to request a Call Back. A station may receive a Message Wait from any
number of other stations in the system. The station receiving the Message Wait can return
the calls using the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving ring back tone or no response on a call
announce
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, confirmation tone received.
2. Hang up, Message Wait activated.
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving DND tone
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, confirmation tone received.
2. Hang-up, Message Wait activated.
To retrieve Station Messages Waiting
1. Press [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, the message contents summary as
below or the Station Messages Waiting list will display.
239
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004
2. Dial “1” to select ST (Station Message Wait).
“1” = ST: Station Message Wait
“2” = CL: CLI Message Wait
“3” = VS: Integrated VM Message Wait
“4” = VM: external Voice Mail
“5” = FS: Feature server
“6” = MS: SMS message wait.
3. Press the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to scroll through the Station Messages.
MSG : 700100
700118
To return a call for the current Station Message
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To delete the first Message Wait from the list
1. Press the “*” button, the list is updated removing the message from the list.
To delete all waiting Messages
1. Press the[SPEED] button.
2. Press the “*” button twice.
SLT
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving ring back tone or no response on a call
announce
1. Momentarily press the hook switch.
2. Dial “556”, the Message Wait/Call Back code.
3. Hang up, Message Wait is activated.
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving DND tone
1. Momentarily press the hook switch.
2. Dial “556”, the Message Wait/Call Back code.
3. Hang up, Message Wait activated.
To retrieve a Station Message Wait;
1. Dial “557”, the Message Wait/Call Back response code.
Conditions
1. The system employs a line from the Network CO Group to return a Station
Message Wait call back.
2. Only LIP and LDP Phones with an LCD can receive a Station Message Wait from
a networked station.
240
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic Attributes
Net CO Line Attributes
Net Numbering Plan
Related Features


Station Message Wait/Call Back
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Hardware
2.80.2.8 Net Call Forward
Description
A user can forward (send) their calls to another station, Station Group or a user’s VMIB
mailbox across the private network. The user may forward all calls immediately, if the user
does not answer the call or if the station is busy. In addition, the user may select to activate
‘Follow-me’ forward, forwarding calls from a location other than the station. Calls forward in
the same manner as a Call Forward within a system and is transparent to the user.
From a network perspective, the iPECS UCP can use either the ‘Join’ or ‘Re-route’ signaling
method to complete a call forward over the network. The Networking Transfer Mode assigns
the method that will be used and should be selected to match other systems connected in the
private network.
 Join - an additional connecting path is needed to transfer the call to another station.
 Routing - a new connecting path is used to forward the call.
You select the type and condition under which calls will forward by entering a Call Forward
code as follows:
Code 0:
Remote Call Forward, forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, activated
from a remote station, Call Forward, Follow-me.
Code 1:
Unconditional, all calls to the station, except recalls, forward internally or
externally immediately upon receipt.
Code 2:
Busy, if the station is busy, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected
station.
Code 3:
No Answer, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected station when the
station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
Code 4:
Busy/No Answer, forwards calls if the selected station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
241
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Call Forward, (Unconditional, Busy, No Answer, or Busy/No Answer)
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button or Soft key. For the LIP8002, the [DND] button is used to
activate Forward.
3. Dial desired Call Forward code (“1”~“4”).
4. Dial the station or station group to receive calls.
Or,
Dial an outside Line access code (9, 8xx, 88xx) and the desired external phone
number.
Or,
Press the [SPEED] button and dial the desired bin number.
5. Replace the handset, return to idle.
To deactivate Call forward
1. Press flashing [FWD] button, Call Forward will deactivate and the [FWD] button
LED is off.
Or, for an iPECS IP Phone,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive dial-tone,
2. Press the [FWD] Soft button. For the LIP8002, the [DND] button is used to
activate Forward.
3. Press the # dial pad button.
SLT
To activate Call Forward,(Unconditional, Busy, No Answer, or Busy/No Answer)
1. Lift the handset to receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forward feature dial code “554”
3. Dial desired Call Forward code (“1”~“4”).
4. Dial the destination station, station group, or dial CO access code (9, 8xx, 88xx)
and desired external phone number.
5. Momentarily press the hook-switch and receive confirmation tone.
6. Replace the handset to return to idle.
To deactivate the Call forward
1. Lift the handset and receive stutter dial-tone.
2. Dial the Call Forward feature dial code “554”.
3. Dial “#” to cancel Call Forward.
Conditions
1. To use Call Forward, a station must be permitted to forward calls in the system
database.
2. Authorization codes are required for ‘Follow-me’ Call Forward and may be required
to activate Network Call Forward ‘Follow-Me’
3. A station is separately allowed Call Forward and Off-Net Call Forward.
242
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4. The iPECS does not check the status of the receiving destination; once forward is
activated, the receiving system is responsible for routing the call.
5. Incoming analog CO lines must provide Disconnect Supervision and the Open
Loop Detect timer must be set for proper operation.
6. Station calls may automatically forward using Preset Call Forward or may forward
to your integrated Voice Mailbox. If the Preset Call Forward timer is shorter than
the Call Forward No-Answer timer, calls will not forward over the network.
7. Network Call Forward ‘Follow-Me’ can only be deactivated at the original station.
8. Network Call Forward Follow-Me is only available when employing H.323/H.450
networking. When employing Qsig, Call Forward ‘Follow-me’ is not available over
the network.
9. For proper operation of Call Forward Follow-Me, all systems in the network must
employ the same type of Authorization codes.
10. Call Forward Follow-me is not available between networked systems.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic Attributes
Net Supplementary Attributes
Net CO Line Attributes
Net Numbering Plan
Related Features












Call Forward
Authorization Codes (Password)
DND (Do Not Disturb)
DND - One Time DND
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Unsupervised Conference
Dialing Restrictions
Station Groups
Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Intercom Signaling Mode
Call Forward, Preset
Hardware
2.80.2.9 CO Transit-In
Description
When a DID call is received by a networked system, the system will attempt normal DID call
routing. The ICLID table is examined, followed by the MSN table, then the defined DID
243
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
number conversion is completed. The system does a look-up in the Flexible DID Table to
identify the destination. If the number is a station in a networked system, the system routes
the call to the destination over the appropriate network connection with CLI provided to the
called station.
Operation
Operation of Distributed Networking is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. CO Transit-In calls are not subject to recall or time restrictions at the originating
system.
2. If no path is available over the network, the caller will receive busy tone.
3. The system, which originally received the call, will generate two SMDR records for
the call, the original incoming call and the transit-call to the destination station.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic AttributesCNIP Enable, CONP Enable
Net Supplementary Attributes
Net CO Line Attributes
Net Numbering Plan
Related Features



Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
ICLID Call Routing
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)
Hardware
2.80.2.10 CO Transit-Out
Description
CO Transit-Out increases efficiency of Lines and reduces call costs by routing outgoing calls
to the nearest appropriate point in a network of systems. At one system you can dial the
appropriate Line access code for Lines in the remote system. Codes are assigned in the
Network Numbering Plan at both systems and digit repeating passes the dialed digits to the
remote system.
When you dial the code, the local system compares the digits with appropriate local
Numbering Plan codes then to the Network Numbering Plan codes to determine routing.
When the number is found in the Network Numbering Plan table, the call is routed to the
designated networked system. Any digits received are sent to the remote system for proper
routing.
244
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
Operation of Distributed Networking is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. To use CO Transit-Out, the networked system user must dial the CO transit-out
code; the CO Transit-Out service is not activated by pressing a CO Line button.
2. The Station COS of the networked system is applied for toll restriction.
3. For CO Transit-Out, any numbering sequence code can be assigned in
(Networking Data  Net Numbering Plan  Numbering Plan Code). If a conflict
exists between the System and Network Numbering Plans, the System Numbering
Plan has priority.
4. The terminating PSTN lines must be assigned as Networked PSTN CO lines in the
terminating system.
5. For proper operation of CO Transit-Out, the Network CO Line type and System
Usage must be assigned as PSTN.
6. While not recommended, a call may be routed to the terminating system through
an ancillary system when a direct network connection is not deployed between the
originating and terminating systems.
7. When enabled in the Net Numbering Plan, you must enter a valid Station or
System Authorization code for access. The associated COS is implemented for the
call.
8. The system, which terminates the call, will generate two SMDR records for the call,
the original incoming call from the station number and the transit-out call.
9. The station receives busy tone when a networking path is not available during
transit-out.
10. For Transit-out, the Attendant of the calling system must be permitted access to
the CO Lines.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic Attributes
Net CO Line Attributes
Net Numbering Plan
Related Features
Hardware
2.80.2.11 BLF Presentation
Description
When systems are networked, the status of stations in one system can be displayed at
stations of other systems in the network. The LED of a {Net DSS} button provides the BLF
245
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
(idle or busy) indication for the assigned station. When only two systems are networked, BLF
status is provided directly between the two systems with each serving as the others BLF
Manager for the other. When more than two systems are in a network, the Ericsson-LG
Enterprise BLF Manager application provides the BLF status across the network. BLF
Manager is a Windows® application that communicates with systems on the network as the
BLF Gatekeeper. Networked systems send regular updates of station status to the BLF
Manager. Periodically, the BLF Manager sends updated BLF messages to all systems on the
network. The BLF Manager PC can reside in any location that has IP access to all systems in
the network to receive and send both UDP and TCP packets.
Operation
Operation of the BLF Manager is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. The BLF Manager Gatekeeper is installed as a central function of all systems in a
network and must be able to communicate using UDP and TCP over an IP
network with the other networked systems.
2. The system can provide Net DSS BLF status for all stations.
3. The BLF Manager provides BLF for stations only, status for Lines is not provided
over the network; CO BLF is not supported.
4. The LED of a {Net DSS} button indicates BLF status, busy (LED On), idle (LED
Off), or DND (LED flashing). Ring signals at a station, including recalls, are not
registered across the network and will display as idle.
5. Each system updates the station status to the BLF Manager at intervals of the BLF
status duration.
6. If the BLF Manager is not available on the network, BLF services can be activated
between only two Systems. In this case, employ the Network Numbering Plan to
configure the IP address of the networked system as the Destination System IP
address. Do not assign an address for the BLF Manager in the Networking
Supplementary Attributes.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic AttributesCNIP Enable, CONP Enable
Net Supplementary AttributesTCP/UDP Port for BLF,BLF
Manager IP Address, Duration of BLF State
Net CO Line Attributes
Net Numbering PlanDest System IP Address, Dest System
Port Number
Related Features

Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF)

Windows PC running the BLF Manager application
Hardware
246
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.80.2.12 Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
Description
Calls can be routed over the network to the Attendants of another system to provide
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS). A local System Attendant can route local Attendant
calls to the Central Attendants by activating Attendant DND. The Centralized Attendants
receive the call under the {Net DSS} button assigned for the local System Attendant. In
addition, outside calls to networked systems can directly ring the Centralized Attendants.
Operation
Local Attendant iPECS IP or LDP Phone
To assign [ATD DND] button
[TRANS/PGM] + {Flex Button} + [TRANS/PGM] + “83” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To route local Attendant calls to the Central Attendants
1. Press the {ATD DND} button.
Centralized Attendant iPECS IP or LDP Phone
To answer a remote Attendant call
1. Answer the call as normal.
Conditions
1. DID/DISA calls which route only to the Attendant destination and calls to the
Attendant from a Station (dial “0”) are routed to the Centralized Attendant assigned
as the Main attendant for the networked system.
2. The Centralized Attendant should be assigned as a Main Attendant in a networked
system and be assigned {NET DSS} buttons for the Attendants in the networked
systems.
Programming
STATION DATA
Flexible Buttons Attendant DND Button
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment
DID/DISA Destination
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
247
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.80.2.13 Centralized Voice Mail
Description
An external Voice Mail may be attached to a system in a network to provide centralized Voice
Mail services to the stations of all systems in the network. Calls are passed to this central VM
over the network to the Network VM Hunt Group assigned in the central iPECS system. The
Station Group number must be assigned in the Network Numbering Plan code of each
networked system to deliver calls to the central VM properly.
Operation
Refer to the External Voice Mail function in the system features.
Conditions
1. The centralized VM must be configured in the central system to which it is attached
as a Network VM. The Voice Mail Dialing table and other characteristics of the
Network VM are established in the central system.
2. The Network VM Group number must be defined as part of the Network
Numbering Plan configuration for each system that will use the centralized VM
except for the central system.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Numbering Plan
STATION GROUP
DATA
Station Group Assignment
Station Group Attributes
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware
2.80.2.14 Networked System Paging
Description
You may have access to the Page Zones of other systems in the network. A warning tone is
provided, if assigned in the networked system, and then you are connected to the Page Zone.
The conditions such as Page Time-out of the networked system will apply to your page.
You can access and make page announcements to stations and external zones of a
networked system by dialing a pre-programmed number or with a Flex button just as if the
page was within the same system.
248
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
iPECS IP or LDP Phone
To assign a Flex button to access a Page Zone in Networked system
[TRANS/PGM] + {Flex Button} + Net Numbering Plan code for Page +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To Page a Networked system Zone
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Network Paging code and Zone, or press a {NET PAGE ZONE} button.
3. If assigned, after the Page Warning Tone, make announcement.
4. Replace the handset to return to idle.
To queue for a page when busy is received
1. Press the[MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button.
2. Replace the handset, returning to idle.
SLT
To make a page
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Network Paging code and Zone.
3. If assigned, after the Page Warning Tone, make announcement.
4. Replace the handset, to return to idle.
To queue for a page when busy tone is received
1. Dial “556”, the Call Back code.
2. Replace the handset returning to idle.
Conditions
1. The conditions such as Page Access, Page Time-out, etc. apply to Network
Paging.
2. A Network Page code must be programmed in Networking Data Net Numbering
Plan in the calling system.
3. A Network Page code and page destination must be programmed in Networking
Data  Net Feature Code Table in the called system.
4. The Network Page destination can be Internal Page, External Page and All Call
Page.
5. You will hear error tone if there is no idle networking path or if the page destination
is invalid.
6. You can page within a networked system without lifting the handset.
Programming
NETWORKING DATA
Net Basic Attributes
Net CO Line Attributes
Net Numbering Plan
Net Feature Code Table
249
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Related Features

Internal/External & All Call Page
Hardware
250
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.81 System Scenario Call Routing
Description
In addition to other routing, the system can be configured to route incoming calls based on
scenarios. Scenarios can activate automatically or a group of scenarios can be activated
manually by the Attendant. Scenarios include characteristics such as date and time, Line,
called and calling number, Tenancy group, etc. Scenario routing has priority over other
routing destinations. For example, if Line 1 is assigned to ring at station 100 but the Caller
Id and other characteristics match a scenario that routes to a System announcement, the call
routes to the announcement.
Up to 1009 Scenarios and 101 groups are available. Scenario characteristics include:

Caller ID

Called Number

Days and time (Start Day and End Day, weeks, start time and end time)

Destination (Type and Value)

Scenario Priority

Scenario State

Scenario Voice Mail box

Scenario COS (Class of Service)

Scenario DISA Service

Scenario Tenancy Group number

Scenario Zone

Scenario Start and End CO

Scenario Group: Attendant selects group when system mode is Scenario

Zone Holiday
Conditions
Operation
Attendant
To activate a Scenario Group at the System Attendant
1. Press [DND].
2. Dial or select item 5.
3. Dial the Scenario Group (1 ~ 101) number.
4. Press [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Call Routing
STATION DATA
Station ICM Group
CO LINE DATA
CO Tenancy Group
Related Features

Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Hardware
251
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.82 Traffic Analysis
Description
The iPECS monitors, stores and periodically or upon request outputs various traffic statistics
covering system resources. The output from the system can be used to:
 Monitor and evaluate system performance
 Observe usage trends and recommend possible corrective actions,
 Determine possible trunk problems, i.e. blocking level too high, and/or,
 Recommend system upgrades
Attendants enable Periodic Reporting. Once enabled, the system continues to monitor and
output the requested report until Periodic Reporting is disabled. On-demand reports selected
by the System Attendant are output only upon request. The Traffic Report is sent to the
defined system RS-232 or TCP port.
System resources covered by Traffic Reports are:
 Attendant Traffic Report
 Call Summary Report
 Hourly Call Report
 H/W Unit Usage Summary Report
 CO Summary Report
 Hourly CO Report
Summary Traffic Reports cover one of five Analysis periods selected at time of print:
 Today’s peak activity hour (within 24 hours)
 Yesterday’s peak activity hour (24 hours prior to Today’s activity)
 Last hour activity
 Today’s total activity
 Yesterday’s total activity
Operation
System Attendant
To print the All Periodic Traffic Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0122”, the All Periodic report code.
3. Dial 4 digits (HH – HH).
4. Select Analysis Period (‘1’-‘5’).
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To cancel the periodic All Summary Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0123”, the cancel All Summary report code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
252
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To print a traffic report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the report code, “0121 & 0124” – “0129”.
0121 All Summary Traffic Reports
0124 Attendant Traffic Report
0125 Call Summary Report
0126 Hourly Call Report
0127 Hardware Usage Summary Report
0128 CO Summary Report
0129 Hourly CO Report
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The Print All Summary Traffic Reports generates the Attendant, Call Summary and
CO Summary Traffic Reports.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
RS-232 Port Settings
Print Port Selections
Related Features


SMDR Call Records
ACD Statistics Report

Device to capture reports
Hardware
2.82.1
Traffic Analysis, Attendant
Description
The Attendant Traffic Report covers operational statistics for the Attendants. The report
outputs periodically or the Attendant requests output of the report for a defined Analysis
period. The following is a sample report and description of the report fields.
Site Name : abc co
Report Type : Attendant Traffic Report- Today Peak
Date : 06/05/02 08:34
====================================================================================
ATD
Meas
----------------------Calls----------------------
--------------------Time--------------- Speed ATD
No
Hour
Total
Ans
Abdn
H
Abd
Held
Avail
Talk
Held
Noans Ans
Type
100
13:00
104
82
22
3
0
18
10:12
14:21
01:23
00:52
00:23
Sys
101
13:00
90
72
15
1
0
11
12:43
30:12
00:54
00:23
00:21
Main
253
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Field
Issue 1.3
Description
ATD No
Attendant Station Number
Meas Hour
(Measurement Hour) Hour data accumulation began
Calls Total
Total number of calls, except group & recalls, routed to the Attendant
Calls Ans
(Calls Answered) Calls answered during the Analysis period
Calls Abdn
(Calls Abandoned) Calls abandoned before answer by the Attendant, does not
include calls abandoned while on hold.
Call H-Abdn
(Calls Abandoned from Hold) Calls abandoned while on hold
Calls Held
Number of calls placed on hold by the Attendant
Time Avail
(Time Available) Time attendant was available to handle new calls
Time Talk
Total time the Attendant was active on calls
Time Held
Time Attendant had calls on hold
Time NoAns
(Time No Answer) Average time calls were ringing or in queue for attendant
before abandoned
Speed Ans
(Speed of Answer) Average time calls rang before answer by Attendant
ATD type
(Attendant Type) System or Main
Operation
System Attendant
To print the Attendant Traffic Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0124”, the Attendant Traffic report code.
3. Select Analysis Period (‘1’-‘5’).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The Peak Hour is the hour when the system has the highest total call volume.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
RS-232 Port Settings
Print Port Selections
Related Features


SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
ACD Statistics Report

Device to capture reports
Hardware
254
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.82.2
Issue 1.3
Traffic Analysis, Call Reports
Description
Call activity statistics are provided in the Hourly Call and Call Summary Reports.
Hourly Call Report
The Hourly Call Report covers hourly-completed call activity for the selected Analysis period.
The report indicates the number of completed calls for each hour during the Analysis period
as shown below.
Site Name : abc co
Report Type : Attendant Traffic Report- Today Peak
Date : 06/05/02 08:35
===========================================================================
Anal Hour
# Calls Completed
15:00
0
…..
…..
05:00
211
04:00
543
Totals Calls
754
Operation
System Attendant
To print the Hourly Call Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0126”, the Hourly Call report code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
RS-232 Port Settings
Print Port Selections
Related Features


SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
ACD Statistics Report

Device to capture reports
Hardware
255
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.82.3
Issue 1.3
Traffic Analysis, H/W Usage
Description
The Hardware Usage report provides statistics for the system’s special Hardware resources
such as the Voice Mail as shown in the following sample report.
Site Name : abc co
Report Type : Hardware Usage Report- Today Peak
Date : 06/05/02 08:34
====================================================================================
Unit
Num
Anal
Total
Total
Type
Unit
Hour
Req
Denied
VSF
4
09:00
19
0
Operation
System Attendant
To print the Hardware Usage Summary Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0127”, the H/W Usage Summary report code.
3. Select Analysis Period (‘1’-‘5’).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
RS-232 Port Settings
Print Port Selections
Related Features


SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
ACD Statistics Report

Device to capture reports
Hardware
256
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.82.4
Issue 1.3
Traffic Analysis, Line Reports
Description
The CO Traffic Summary and Hourly reports provide statistics on a summary or hourly basis
for all Line Group activity. The following provides a sample report and description of the major
fields in the report.
Site Name : abc co
Report Type : CO Group Summary Report- Today Peak
Date : 09/08/02 08:34
====================================================================================
Peak Hour for All CO 11:00
Grp
Num
Anal
Total
Total
Inc
Out
Grp
%
%
No
COs
Hour
Usage
Seize
Seize
Seize
Ovl
ACB
FAO
1
16
10:00
9
6
4
2
0
0
0
20
1
10:00
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Field
Description
Grp No.
Line Group number
Anal Hour
(Analysis hour) hour during the analysis period with peak usage.
Total Usage
Total number of call attempts on Lines in the Group
Total Seize
Total number of times Lines in the group were used for any call
Inc Seize
(Incoming Seizures) Total number of incoming calls answered for Lines in the
group.
Out Seize
(Outgoing Seizures) Total number of outgoing calls attempted on Lines in the
group.
ACB
(All COs Busy) Percentage of the time that all Lines in the group were
simultaneously busy.
FAO
(Failed Attempts Outgoing) Percentage of outgoing calls offered to the Lines in
the group that were denied due to All Trunks Busy condition.
Operation
System Attendant
To print the CO Traffic Summary Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial ‘0128’, the CO Traffic Summary report code.
3. Select Analysis Period (‘1’-‘5’).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To print the CO Hourly Traffic Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial ‘0129’, the CO Hourly Traffic report code.
3. Dial CO Group number.
257
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
RS-232 Port Settings
Print Port Selections
Related Features


SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
ACD Statistics Report

Device to capture reports
Hardware
258
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.83 Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Description
UNA allows you to be alerted over an External Loud Bell and answer defined outside calls by
dialing the UNA code. While primarily intended for alternate answering during the Night
service mode, UNA will function in all service modes. Calls will appear on an appropriate
{LINE}, a {POOL} or {LOOP} button. An External Control Contact can be assigned to
activate an External Loud Bell to alert users of incoming calls.
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned a Flex button as a {UNA} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {UNA} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “567” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To access an incoming UNA call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “567”, the UNA feature code, the oldest UNA call is connected.
Or,
3. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
4. Press the {UNA} button; the oldest UNA call is connected.
SLT
To access an incoming UNA call
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “567”, the UNA feature code, the oldest UNA call is connected.
Conditions
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes Universal Answer
Related Features

LBC (Loud Bell Control)
Hardware
259
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.84 Wake-Up Alarm, Enhanced
Description
If permitted in the system database, you can set up to five (5) Wake-up or alerting times.
When a time is reached, the system will signal your station with an audible and visual signal.
The alerting for each of the five (5) Wake-up alarms will repeat based on the type selected
when you assign the alarm.
The alarms will repeat as follows:
Repeat Type
Repeating
1
Alarm activates one time at the assigned date and time
2
Alarm repeats daily Monday through Friday
3
Alarm will repeat daily, Monday through Saturday
4
Alarm will repeat daily
A System Announcement can be assigned to play as a Wake-Up announcement when you
lift the handset in response to the alarm signal. Each station can be assigned a different
Wake-Up announcement, which is recorded by the Attendant.
Operation
Attendant
To register a Wake-Up alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “044”, the Attendant Set Wake-Up code.
3. Dial the station range to be alerted. If a single station is to receive the alarm, enter
“*” as the second station number.
4. Dial the desired 2-digit hour (24-hour mode), then 2-digit minute for alerting.
5. Enter Repeating type, “1” to “4”.
6. For the one-time alarm (repeating type 1), enter the date for the alarm as two(2)
digits for year, month and day of the month.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To erase a Wake-Up alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “045”, the Attendant Erase Wake-up code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station, enter an “*” as the second
station number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To register a Wake-Up alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
260
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Dial “41”, the code for setting the Wake-up Alarm.
Enter the Wake-up alarm index number, “1 to 5”.
Dial the desired 2-digit hour (24-hour mode), then 2-digit minute for alerting.
Enter Repeating type, “1” to “4”.
For the one-time alarm (repeating type 1), enter the date for the alarm as two (2)
digits for year, month and day of the month.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To erase a Wake-Up alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “42”.
3. Enter Wake-Up alarm index number,“1” to “5”.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To stop the alarm notification
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
SLT
To register a Wake-Up alarm
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “41”, the set Wake-Up code.
4. Enter the Wake-up alarm index number, “1 to 5”.
5. Dial the 2-digit hour and 2-digit minute for alerting.
6. Enter Repeating type, “1” to “4”.
7. For the one-time alarm (repeating type 1), enter the date for the alarm as two (2)
digits for year, month and day of the month.
8. Hook-flash, conformation tone is provided.
To stop the alarm notification
1. Lift the handset.
To erase a Wake-Up alarm
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “42”, the erase Wake-up code.
4. Enter Wake-Up alarm index number, “1” to “5”.
5. Hook-flash, a conformation tone is provided.
Conditions
1. When registering or erasing an alarm, iPECS IP and LDP phones can use the
[VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to scroll between the Wake-up alarms and “#”
can be used to scroll through the repeating types.
2. The iPECS IP and LDP Phones will display an asterisk near the time to indicate a
Wake-Up alarm is set for the current day.
3. If you have all five Wake-Up alarms set, the Attendant cannot set a Wake-Up
alarm for you. When the Attendant sets an alarm, it is assigned to the lowest
261
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Wake-Up alarm index number (1-5) available for the station. If no index is available,
the Attendant setting is ignored
4. When the Attendant erases the Wake-Up alarm, all five alarm indices are erased.
5. Changing the Wake-Up alarm format from the standard to the enhanced 5-alarm
format in the system database will cancel and erase all active Wake-up alarms.
6. For the One-time alarms, the year can be set from 2000 to 2031.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes Wake-Up Announcement
SYSTEM DATA
New 5 Wake Up Usage
Related Features

Wake-up Alarm, Standard
Hardware
262
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.85 Wake-up Alarm, Standard
Description
The standard Wake-up Alarm feature allows you or an Attendant to set a Wake-up alarm or a
desired time to be alerted. When the time is reached, the system will signal your station with
an audible and, for iPECS IP and LDP Phones, a visual signal is provided in the LCD. The
alerting for the Wake-Up alarm will repeat based on the type selected when you assign the
alarm.
The alarms will repeat as follows:
Repeat Type
1
Repeating
Alarm activates one time at the assigned date and time
2
Alarm repeats daily Monday through Friday
3
Alarm will repeat daily, Monday through Saturday
4
Alarm will repeat daily
A System Announcement can be assigned to play as a Wake-Up announcement when you
lift the handset in response to the alarm signal. Each station can be assigned a different
Wake-Up announcement, which is recorded by the Attendant.
Operation
Attendant
To register a Wake-Up alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “044”, the Attendant Set Wake Up code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station, enter an “*” in place of the
second station number.
4. Dial the 2-digit hour and 2-digit minute for alerting.
5. For a daily (repeating alarm), dial “#”.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To erase a Wake-Up alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “045”, the Attendant Erase Wake-up code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station, enter an “*” in place of the
second station number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To register a Wake-Up alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “41”, the Set Wake-up code.
3. Dial the 2-digit hour and 2-digit minute for alerting.
4. For a daily (repeating alarm), dial “#”.
5. Press [HOLD/SAVE] button.
263
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To stop the alarm notification
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
To erase a Wake-Up alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “42”, the Erase Wake-up code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
SLT
To register a Wake-Up alarm
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “41”, the set Wake-up code.
4. Dial the 2-digit hour and 2-digit minute for alerting.
5. For a daily (repeating alarm), dial “#”.
6. Hook flash, conformation tone is provided.
To stop the alarm notification
1. Lift the handset.
To erase a Wake-Up alarm
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “42”, the erase Wake-up code.
4. Hook flash, a conformation tone is provided.
Conditions
1. In cases where a remote device is installed, the time display in the remote terminal
is adjusted by the Device Zone assignment. Thus, the Wake-Up alarm time is
based on the time displayed on the phone and not the system time.
2. When receiving a Wake Up signal, lifting the handset will return MOH or a System
announcement that is recorded and assigned to play when responding to the
Wake Up alarm.
3. The Wake-Up alarm signal is the station ring signal with a 30 seconds ON and 90
seconds OFF cycle 3 times. If no action is taken by you to terminate the alarm, the
Attendant is notified with a display of the station number that did not respond.
4. Time must be entered in the Military 24-hour format (hh:mm).
5. The daily alarm will reset and repeat each day until erased (cancelled). The Onetime alarm will reset and cancel automatically.
6. A System announcement can be recorded and assigned to play when the user
responds to the wake up alarm.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes Wake-Up Announcement
Related Features

Enhanced Wake-up Alarm
Hardware
264
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.86 Web Call Back
Description
The Station User Web portal incorporates a Web Call Back feature. In the portal, you may be
permitted to request the system to establish a telephone call between two telephone
numbers. The call is subject to the dialing restrictions of the station number associated with
the portal access. An SMDR record is generated with the station number that accessed the
portal identified.
Operation
To activate Web Call Back
1. Access your Station Web portal and select the Call Back menu.
2. Enter the “to” and “from” telephone numbers.
3. Press Call button. The page will update to indicate success or failure of the call.
Conditions
1. Web Call Back must be enabled in your Station’s attribute assignments, Station
Data  Common Attributes Mobile(Web) Client Service.
2. You will receive an error message if any of the following occur:
 Call Back is disabled
 The outgoing call is restricted due to your COS
 No outside Line is available
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Web Client Service
Related Features
Hardware
265
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2.87 Zone Management
2.87.1
Holiday Assignment
Description
The Administrator can assign Holiday Zones (up to 40) and Vacation Zones (up to 5 for each
Zone). Devices in a Zone follow the holiday and vacation assignments of the zone. When the
date for a Zone is set to Holiday or Vacation, the Zone will operate in the programmed ring
mode.
Operation
Operation of Zone Holiday Assignment is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. When an ICM Tenancy Group Auto Ring Mode Table is assigned as the
destination for a Flexible DID Conversion Table index, the Auto Ring Mode Table
will take precedence over the Zone Holiday Assignment.
2. Zone Holiday Assignment has a higher priority than the Attendant ring mode.
3. It is recommended the same zone be used for each outside Line and Station of a
Tenancy group.
Programming
ZONE DATA
Zone Holiday Assignment
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
Related Features
Hardware
2.87.2
Inter Zone Connection Limit
Description
To maintain voice quality, it may be necessary to limit the number of connected inter-Zone
calls for a Zone so the available bandwidth is used effectively. The Max Total Inter Zone
Connections define the inter-Zone connection limits. As a default, no limit other than the
system capacity is applied to the Inter Zone Connections.
266
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. The maximum number of connections assigned in the Zone Attributes is used to
limit the number of calls from a zone to all other zones while the Inter-Zone
Attributes assignment is used to limit the number of calls between two specific
zones.
2. If the maximum “Inter-Zone Connections ”is set to 0, the number calls for the Zone
is not limited.
3. When a Zone reaches the defined maximum Inter-Zone calls, you will receive error
tone and the display “INTER CONN LIMIT OVER” when attempting an Inter-Zone
call.
4. An Inter-Zone call is determined when the call connection is made. If an incoming
call is answered that places the Zone over the limit, the call is dropped and you
receive error tone.
5. Emergency calls are counted as an outgoing outside call however, the Emergency
call is always allowed.
6. If Two-way recording is active and the recording connection places the Zone over
the limit, the call is not recorded.
Programming
ZONE DATA
Zone AttributesMax Total Inter Zone Connections
Inter Zone AttributesMax Inter Zone Connections
Related Features
Hardware
2.87.3
Remote Devices
Description
Remote devices, in particular those not reachable by the system, are managed by grouping
devices with similar characteristics in a Zone. Placing devices into Zones simplifies
management allowing definition of common characteristics to the devices within the zone.
Zone attributes include:
 Nation code
 Language
 Page area
 Time-zone, GMT or system
267
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual



Issue 1.3
Holiday ring modes
RTP relay
RTP Relay group.
Operation
Zone operation is automatic once configured.
Conditions
1. Zone attributes which may affect ringing, such as Holiday and Vacation settings,
have lower priority than other ring assignments such as Tenancy group ring mode
established for DID lines.
2. Zone Attributes do not provide adjustment of time for DST.
3. It is recommended to assign outside Lines and stations of a Tenant group in the
same Device Zone.
4. Wake-Up time is based on the time displayed in the station’s LCD.
Programming
ZONE DATA
Device Zone Number
Device Zone Attributes
Access & Page Relay
Zone Attributes
Zone RTP Relay Group
Inter-Zone Attributes
Zone Holiday Assignment
Related Features
Hardware
2.87.4
Zone Outgoing Call Connection Limit
Description
Every system has a limited number of outside Lines shared between all system users. The
number of outside Lines often is less than the number of users. When all the Lines are in use,
you may receive an All Trunks busy signal indicating no outside Lines are available.
To minimize this situation, outgoing outside calls from devices in a Zone can be limited from
one (1) to the maximum outside Line capacity of the system. As a default, the number of
outgoing calls for each Zone is not limited.
268
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic based on the maximum outgoing CO calls allowed for
the Zone.
Conditions
1. If the maximum outside calls for the Zone Attributes is set to “0”, the number of
outgoing calls for the Zone is not limited.
2. When a Zone reaches the defined maximum outgoing calls, you will receive error
tone and the display “OUTGOING CALL LIMIT OVER” when attempting an outside
call.
3. Calls placed from a device in a Zone to a Networked system are considered
outgoing outside calls for the Zone and will be limited by the outgoing call limit
defined for the Zone.
4. Emergency calls are counted as an outgoing outside call however, the Emergency
call is always allowed.
Programming
ZONE DATA
Zone AttributesMax Outgoing Co Calls
Related Features
Hardware
269
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3. INTERCOM
3.1
Barge-In
Description
Barge-in permits authorized extensions to intrude into other existing outside or intercom calls.
When you intrude on an existing call, a Conference is established with you as the supervisor
and the parties on the existing call.
Barge-in from your phone is assigned for one of three operating modes:
(0) – Barge-in is disabled.
(1) – Barge-in Monitor mode: the intruding station can listen only.
(2) – Barge-in Speech mode: the intruding station hears the conversation and may
join the conversation to speak to the other parties.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones w/3-Soft buttons
To Barge-in in the Monitor mode
1. Call the busy station and receive busy tone.
2. Press the [MONITOR]Soft button. You will need to use the right Navigation button
to display the Monitor selection.
3. Warning tone is sent to the connected parties and you are connected to the call in
a “listen-only”, monitor mode.
To Barge-in in the Speech mode
1. Call the busy station and receive busy tone.
2. Press the [MONITOR]Soft button. You will need to use the right Navigation button
to display the Monitor selection.
3. Warning tone is sent to the connected parties and you are connected to the call in
a “listen-only”, monitor mode.
4. If Barge-in Speech mode is assigned, press the [JOIN]Soft button to join the
conversation. The parties receive intrusion tone and you connect to the call.
5. To terminate the call and return all parties to idle, press the [DROP]Soft button.
To exit Barge-in
1. Hang-up the phone.
Conditions
1. This feature is only supported for iPECS IP and LDP Phone models with 3-soft
buttons.
270
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2. This feature is only available for active calls; you cannot barge in on a ringing or
held call.
3. When you Barge-In to a call, the LCD of your phone will indicate the Id of the
connected parties prior to the Barge-in operation.
4. If ‘Privacy’ option is ON, then any person could not barge-in to the station.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Barge In Mode
Related Features

Intrusion

iPECS IP or LDP Phones w/3-soft buttons
Hardware
271
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.2
Issue 1.3
Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF)
Description
You can assign Flex buttons on iPECS IP and LDP Phones, or DSS Consoles to provide
one-button calling to another station and the button LED indicates the status of the station.
The {DSS/BLF} button can also be used for one-button transfer. The LED will illuminate
when the station is busy and flash when receiving a call. In addition, the DSS/BLF button will
flash when the associated station calls you.
Operation
To assign a Flex button for {DSS/BLF}
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Station number + [HOLD/SAVE]
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
Operation of this feature is automatic for assigned Flex buttons.
Conditions
1. A station receiving ICM ringing is considered busy and the associated DSS/BLF
LED on all other stations will flash at 30 ipm.
2. A station receiving ICM ringing will receive visual indication by a flashing LED of
the Flex button associated with the calling station.
3. When a station receives a Camp-On, the LED of a DSS/BLF button associated
with the calling station will flash.
4. The station is considered busy when in use, receiving ICM Ring at an iPECS IP or
LDP Phone, or receiving any ring at a SLT.
Programming
Related Features


Intercom (ICM) Call
Station User Programming & Codes

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
272
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.3
Issue 1.3
Intercom (ICM) Call
Description
A non-blocking ICM is available to all stations in the system. You may place an intercom call
to other stations in the system by dialing applicable digits as defined in the Station Numbering
Plan.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place an intercom call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive ICM dial tone.
2. Dial station number or press the{DSS/BLF} button.
3. For ring-back tone, await answer or, for Intercom splash-tone, speak and await
answer.
SLT
To place an intercom call
1. Lift the handset to receive ICM dial tone.
2. Dial the station number.
3. For ring-back tone, await answer or, for Intercom splash-tone, speak and await
answer.
Conditions
1. Intercom dial tone will time-out if action is not taken within Dial-Tone Time or if the
time between digits exceeds the Inter-digit Timer. Error tone is received should a
time-out occur.
2. ICM Dial tone is removed after dialing the first digit.
3. If the called station is busy, Intercom Busy tone is provided by the system. You
may disconnect from the call or activate a feature such as Message Wait/Callback
prior to the time-out.
4. With your iPECS IP and LDP Phone, you can place consecutive Intercom calls
without the need to regain ICM dial tone (no need to hang-up) between calls;
simply press another {DSS/BLF} button.
5. An Intercom call to a station in the HF answerback or Voice Announce mode (H or
P Intercom Signaling Mode) is not considered answered unless the called user lifts
the handset or presses the [SPEAKER] button (goes off-hook).
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Prime Line
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers ICM Dial Tone Timer, Inter Digit Timer
273
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Related Features


Intercom Signaling Mode
Speakerphone
Hardware
274
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.4
Issue 1.3
Intercom Call Hold
Description
While on an active Intercom (ICM) callusing an iPECS IP or LDP Phone, you can place the
call on hold. The held station will receive the assigned Music-on-Hold. The call is placed on
Exclusive Hold and recalls you after expiration of the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer.
An [ICM] button must be assigned to the iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign an [ICM] button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM]+ “87” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To place an active ICM call on hold
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, the {ICM}button LED will flash at the Exclusive
Hold rate.ICM dial tone is received.
To retrieve the held ICM call
1. Press the [ICM] button or the {DSS/BLF} button associated with the held station,
the{ICM}button LED illuminates and the ICM call connects.
Conditions
1. Multi-intercom call can be placed on hold at station. Press the [ICM], [HOLD]
button or the {DSS/BLF} button associated with the held station, the [ICM] button
LED illuminate and the ICM call connected by FIFO.
2. There is no limit of the number of held station.
Programming
Related Features




MOH (Music-On-Hold)
Intercom (ICM) Call
Exclusive Hold
Hold Recall

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
275
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.5
Issue 1.3
Intercom Caller Controlled Signaling
Description
You can change the signaling mode of an Intercom (ICM) call from Tone ring to Voice
announce or Voice announce to Tone ring.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To change the ICM Signaling mode
1. Place your intercom call as normal.
2. Dial “#”, the ICM Signaling mode will change from Voice announce to Tone ring or
Tone ring to Voice announce.
SLT
To change the ICM Signaling mode
1. Place your intercom call as normal.
2. Dial “#”, ICM Signaling mode will change from Voice announce to Tone ring or
Tone ring to Voice announce.
Conditions
1. The ICM Signaling mode cannot be changed when an Intercom call is placed to a
Linked Pair station. Such intercom calls always employ Tone signaling.
2. If the signaling mode is changed, the call is not subject to Call Forward, No Answer.
3. The signaling mode for a specific Intercom call can only be changed once and
cannot be changed back to the original signaling mode.
4. Changing the signaling mode does not affect privacy at the called station.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Forced Hands-Free Answer
Related Features


Intercom Signaling Mode
Linked Station Pairs

iPECS IP or LDP Phone to receive Voice announced calls
Hardware
276
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.6
Issue 1.3
Intercom Lock-Out
Description
If you take no action after going off-hook for the Dial Tone timer or fail to dial an additional
digit within the Inter-digit timer, you will receive error tone for 30 seconds and be placed outof-service (locked-out). The LED of associated {DSS/BLF} buttons as well as the
{ICM}button on your phone, if configured, flutters rapidly to indicate the out-of-service state.
For iPECS IP & LDP Phone users, if the [SPEAKER] is used, the station will receive error
tone for 30second and then automatically return to idle and will not “Lock-out”.
Operation
System
Operation of Intercom Lockout is automatic based on the Dial Tone & Inter-digit timers.
Conditions
1. If the station is assigned Howler Tone, error tone is presented for about 2 seconds
followed by 30 seconds of Howler tone followed by lockout and silence.
2. To release the lock-out, simply hang-up.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Howler Tone
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers ICM Dial Tone Timer, Inter Digit Timer
Related Features

Intercom (ICM) Call
Hardware
277
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.7
Issue 1.3
Intercom Step Call
Description
When busy tone is received on a dialed Intercom call, you may place a call to another station
by dialing the last digit of the station number. The system replaces the last digit of the
previously dialed busy station with the dialed digit and places an Intercom call to the new
station number.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate step call, while receiving busy on a dialed Intercom call
1. Dial a digit other than the last digit of the busy station’s intercom number.
Conditions
1. If the user dials the last digit of the busy station, Camp-On will be activated.
2. After receiving busy tone, if the user takes no action for the Busy Tone timer,
7seconds, the system will start the Intercom Lockout procedure.
Programming
Related Features


Intercom Lock-Out
Intercom (ICM) Call

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
278
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.8
Issue 1.3
Intercom Tenancy Group
Description
Stations in the iPECS are assigned to an Intercom Tenancy Group, group 01 ~ 100. Stations
in a group are allowed or denied the ability to place intercom calls to stations in other groups
on a group-by-group basis.
Each Intercom Tenancy Group is assigned an Attendant station. All dial “0” calls from a
station in the group are routed to the assigned Attendant. In addition, the assigned Attendant
can control the Day/Night service mode for stations in the group switching from Day to Night
mode.
Each group is assigned a separate Auto Ring Mode Table (Weekly Time Table) to change
the Ring and COS (Class of Service) mode automatically during the day and night service
mode. In addition, DID calls to the system can route to a specified Tenancy group. By
defining the group as the destination in the Flexible DID Conversion Table calls will follow the
Tenancy Group Auto Ring Mode Table.
Operation
System
Operation of Intercom Tenancy Groups is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. Intercom calls from a station to a denied access Intercom Tenancy Group will
returner or tone.
2. Intercom Tenancy does not affect the Station Numbering Plan in the system. All
stations in the system must have different station numbers even if they are
assigned to different Intercom Tenancy groups.
3. The Attendant of a Tenancy Group can be any station in the system and it is not
affected by Tenancy Group access.
4. When the Attendant of an Intercom Tenancy Group sets Day/Night/Timed mode,
only that Tenancy Group is affected.
5. Calls to and from outside Lines are not affect by Intercom Tenancy. However; calls
cannot be transferred between groups if access is not allowed between the groups.
6. Intercom Tenancy Group 01 is the default or group 0 is the unassigned group.
7. Outside Lines can be configured for use by a specific Tenancy group only; stations
in other tenancy groups are not able to access the Line.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes  ICM Tenancy Group Number
Station ICM Tenancy Group
279
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes  CO Tenancy Group
TABLES DATA
Flexible DID Conversion
Auto Ring Mode Table
Related Features





Intercom (ICM) Call
Outside Line Ring Assignment
Flexible Numbering Plan
Call Transfer
Auto Service Mode Control
Hardware
280
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.9
Issue 1.3
Intercom Transfer
Description
You can transfer an active Intercom call to other stations in the iPECS system. Intercom calls
can be transferred after announcing the call (screened) or without announcing the
call(unscreened).
The Intercom station is placed on Exclusive Hold. The Transfer Recall Timer is initiated and,
if this timer expires before the Intercom call is answered, the call will recall your Station until
answered or abandoned.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To perform a Screened ICM transfer, while on an ICM call
1. Press the[TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the station to receive call.
3. At answer or Splash tone, announce call.
4. Hang-up, return to idle.
Or,
1. Press the{DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
2. At answer or Splash tone, announce call.
3. Hang-up, return to idle.
While on an Intercom call, Unscreened call transfer
1. Press the[TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial Station to receive call.
3. Hang-up, return to idle.
Or,
1. Press the{DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
2. Hang-up, return to idle.
SLT
To perform a Screened transfer of an active Intercom call
1. Momentarily depress the Hook-switch.
2. Dial Station to receive call.
3. At answer or Splash tone, announce call.
4. Hang-up, return to idle.
While on an Intercom call, Unscreened call transfer
1. Momentarily depress the Hook-switch.
2. Dial Station to receive call.
3. Hang-up, return to idle.
281
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Conditions
1. The {ICM}button, if configured, provides an appearance for the transferred station.
The LED indicates status and pressing the button connects to the station.
2. If the receiving station is busy, the transferring station may camp the call on to the
busy station, see Call Waiting/Camp-On.
3. A station in DND or out-of-service cannot receive a transfer, and such attempts will
result in error tone.
Programming
Related Features





Exclusive Hold
Hold Recall
Call Waiting/Camp-On
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call Transfer
Hardware
282
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3.10 Message Wait/Call Back
3.10.1
CLI Message Wait
Description
When your iPECS IP or LDP Phone with display receives an external call with Calling Line
Identification(CLI) and the call is abandoned (disconnects before answer), the system will
generate a CLI Message Wait (missed call) log with the Caller Identification, date and time.
You may access this CLI log with the [MSG] button to review and, if desired, return the call.
You may assign a {CLI MESSAGE WAIT} button with direct access to the CLI Message Wait
list. The button LED flashes at 30 ipm to indicate a CLI Message Wait.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {CLI MESSAGE WAIT} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “32” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To review CLI Messages
1. Press the [MSG] button, the LCD shows a summary of all types of messages
waiting.
ICM MWI(000)
CLI MSG(002)
VSF MSG(000)
VMS MSG(001)
UMS MSG(000)
SMS(01)
BACKOK
2. Dial ‘2’ to select “CLI MSG”. The LCD displays the first CLI message details
including the Caller Id, time and number of missed calls from the caller.
3. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN]or the Navigation Up/Down buttons to scroll
through the missed call list.
5551122323
21/11 09:10 CNT: 2
BACK
SELECT>
To delete the current CLI Message
1. Press SELECT>, and choose DEL CUR.
283
ANSWER
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5551122323
21/11 09:10 CNT: 2
BACK
SELECT>
DEL CUR
To delete all CLI Messages
1. Press SELECT>, and choose DEL ALL.
5551122323
21/11 09:10 CNT: 2
BACKSELECT>DEL ALL
To return a call to the current CLI Message
1. Press SELECT>, and choose ANSWER.
5551122323
21/11 09:10 CNT: 2
BACK SELECT>ANSWER
To save the CLI Message to a Station Speed Dial
1. Press SELECT>, and choose SAVE.
5551122323
21/11 09:10 CNT: 2
BACK SELECT>SAVE
Conditions
1. The total number of CLI Message Wait indications in queue for the system is 4000.
Should the Message Wait buffer fill, the buffer full message, as below will be
output over the RS-232 port.
“Warning: Message Wait Buffer Full.”
2. The CLI Message Wait display includes the date, time, message count and caller
Id. The count is the number of attempts by a specific calling party with the time and
date of the most recent attempt.
3. The CLI Message Wait status is stored in non-volatile memory to protect against
power loss.
4. When an outside call is assigned to ring multiple stations, or a group, CLI Message
Wait is not provided.
5. When an outside call with CLI is routed to an ACD/Terminal/Circular station group,
the CLI Message Wait will be provided to the last station notified of the call before
the call was abandoned.
6. Once a call is answered by a station in the system, CLI Message Wait is no longer
available i.e.; transferred calls do not provide CLI Message Wait.
7. A CLI Message Wait indication is left at the originally called station even if the call
is forwarded to another station.
8. While idle, the user may toggle between CLI number and CLI name, if available,
by pressing the [TRANS/PGM] button.
9. The CLI and called station number will be shown in the SMDR record as an
abandoned or lost call.
284
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
10. For ISDN calls, the CLI Message Wait will display and dial the number as shown in
the Table below, modified based on assignments in the CO Line Data  CID/CPN
Attributes for:
 Incoming Prefix Code
 My Area Code
 My Prefix Area Code
 International Access Code
Incoming
Prefix
No
Area Country Access
Code
Code
Code
0343
82
00
Received
Caller ID
National:
Display
507951
0343 50-7951
No
0343
82
00
National:
507951
0343 50-7951
No
0345
82
00
National:
0343 507951
0343 50-7951
Yes
0343
82
00
Yes
0343
82
00
National:
507951
0343 50-7951
National:
0343 507951
0343 50-7951
Yes
0343
82
00
International:
00492 8887777
492 888 7777
Programming
STATION DATA
CLI Attributes CLIP Display, CLI/IP Message Wait
CO LINE DATA
CID/CPN Attributes Incoming Prefix Code Insertion
International Access Code, My Area Code, My Prefix Area
Code
Related Features


Station Message Wait/Call Back
ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network)

iPECS IP or LDP Phone with display
Hardware
285
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.10.2
Issue 1.3
Message Wait Reminder Tone
Description
In addition to the Message or[MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button LED, the iPECS IP and LDP
Phones can be sent a tone as a periodic reminder to you of message waits in queue. This
tone is sent to the station only while idle and is heard over the speaker.
Operation
System
When a user has voice mail, system can provides this as voice prompt instead of dial tone
according to option based on station. But DECT phones do not support the above
{Message Wait Notice} option.

Disable: System provides normal dial tone when a user goes to off hook status.

Tone: System provides warning tone instead of dial tone to give indication when a
user goes to off hook status.

Prompt: System provides message indication as voice prompt when a user goes to
off hook status.
Conditions
1. The interval between tones can be 00 to 60 minutes. A setting of 00 disables the
reminder tone.
2. The notice will continue until all messages have been retrieved.
3. Tone will be provided as stutter dial-tone when the handset is lifted to indicate
messages are waiting.
4. Voice prompt can be provided when there is an idle VM channel. Otherwise, tone
can be provided.
Programming
STATION DATA
Station VM Attributes  Message Wait Notice
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers MSG Wait Reminder Tone Timer
Related Features

Station Message Wait/Call Back

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
286
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.10.3
Issue 1.3
Short Message Service (SMS)
Description
The Short Message Service (SMS) provides the ability to send and receive text messages to
and from iPECS IP and LDP Phones equipped with a display as well as the UCS Client,
DECT and WLAN Phones. The text is comprised of words, numbers, or an alphanumeric
combination. Each short message can be up to 100 characters in length when Latin
alphabets are used.
You send and receive messages from your iPECS IP or LDP Phone, or the Station Web
Portal of the iPECS system. For operation using the Station Web Portal, see your System
Administrator.
Operation
To assign a Flex button as a {SMS SEND} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “36” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To resend an existing SMS message
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “36”, the SMS send code.
SMS SENDING MODE
RESEND-(1) EDIT-(2)
3. Dial “1” to resend a message.
DIAL STA DEST(XXX-XXX)
SKIP-(*)
4. Dial the desired station range to receive the message or “*” to use the displayed
station range.
STA 100-124
SEND-(SAVE) CANCEL-(#)
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to send the message or “#” to cancel.
To send a new message
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “36”, the SMS send code.
SMS SENDING MODE
RESEND-(1) EDIT-(2)
3. Dial “2” to send a new message.
DIAL STA DEST(XXX-XXX)
4. Dial the desired station range to receive the message.
STA 100-124
SEND-(SAVE) CANCEL_(#)
287
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5. Dial the message using two digits for each character as shown in the table below,
use the [REDIAL] button to delete a character.
1
4
7
*
Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
Blank - *1
: - *2
, - *3
2
5
8
0
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
3
0-00
#
6
9
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 - 30
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 - 60
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
#
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to send and store the message or “#” to cancel.
To retrieve an SMS Messages
1. Press [MSG] or [CALLBACK] button. The message contents summary will be
shown as below.
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004
2. Dial “6” to select MS, SMS message wait.
“1” = ST: Station Message wait
“2” = CL: CLI Message wait
“3” = VS: Integrated Voice message wait
“4” = VM: external Voice Mail
“5” = FS: Feature server
“6” = MS: SMS message wait
The display shows the first line of received SMS messages.
MESSAGE: [0] EMERGENCY CONFER
[1] LETS GO TO LUNCH
3. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] to scroll through messages.
MESSAGE: [2] WE HAVE A MEETING A
[3] CONFERENCE AT 9 AM
4. Dial the message number (“01”~“10”) to view the entire message, use the [VOL
UP]/[VOL DOWN] to view each line of the message.
MESSAGE:> WE HAVE A MEETING AT
>7PM IF YOU CAN NOT MAKE IT
288
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To delete an SMS messages
1. Dial “#”.
DELETE MESSAGE?
YES : 1 NO : 2 ALL:3
2. Dial “1” to delete the current message, “2” to return to idle or “3” to delete all
received SMS messages.
Conditions
1. The system can store up to ten (10) received SMS messages and one (1) sent
SMS message for a station.
2. Once the received message storage capacity is reached, additional incoming SMS
messages are ignored.
3. For operation with the WLAN Phone, DECT Phone or UCS Client, refer to the
respective User Guide.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware



3.10.4
iPECS IP orLDP Phone w/Display
iPECS WLAN Phone
iPECS UCS Client
Station Message Wait/Call Back
Description
When a called station does not answer or is in DND, you can activate a Station Message
Wait indication to request a Call Back. A station may receive a Message Wait from any
number of other stations in the system. The station receiving the Message Wait can return
the calls using the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button.
When a busy station is called, you may request to be placed in a queue to receive a Call
Back. When the called station returns to idle, the system notifies you with Callback ring.
When you answer, the previously busy station is called.
When a Message is waiting, the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button LED of iPECS IP or LDP
Phones flashes and, for properly equipped SLTs, the MW Lamp will flash.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving ring back tone or no response on a call
announce
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, confirmation tone received.
2. Hang up, Message Wait activated.
289
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving DND tone
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, confirmation tone received.
2. Hang-up, Message Wait activated.
To leave a Call Back (queue for a station), while receiving busy
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, the user receives confirmation tone.
2. Hang up, return to idle.
To respond to a Call Back recall, when the busy station is available the system calls back,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Previously busy station is called.
To retrieve Station Messages Waiting
1. Press [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, the message contents summary as
below or the Station Messages Waiting list will display.
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004
2. Dial “1” to select ST (Station Message Wait)
“1” = ST: Station Message Wait
“2” = CL: CLI Message Wait
“3” = VS: Integrated VM Message Wait
“4” = VM: external Voice Mail
“5” = FS: Feature server
“6” = MS: SMS message wait
3. Press the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to scroll through the Station Messages.
MSG : 100
To return a call for the current Station Message
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To delete the first Message Wait from the list
1. Press the “*” button, the list is updated removing the message from the list.
To delete all waiting Messages
1. Press the[SPEED] button.
2. Press the “*” button twice.
SLT
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving ring back tone or no response on a call
announce
1. Momentarily press the hook switch.
2. Dial “556”, the Message Wait/Call Back code.
3. Hang up, Message Wait is activated.
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving DND tone
1. Momentarily press the hook switch.
290
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
2. Dial “556”, the Message Wait/Call Back code.
3. Hang up, Message Wait activated.
To retrieve a Station Message Wait;
1. Dial “557”, the Message Wait/Call Back response code.
To leave a Call Back (queue for a station), while receiving busy
1. Momentarily press the hook switch.
2. Dial “556”, the Message Wait/Call Back code.
3. Hang up, Call Back is activated.
To respond to a Call Back recall, when the busy station is available the system calls back,
1. Lift the handset.
2. Previously busy station is called.
Conditions
1. A Message Wait/Call Back return call will always ring at the receiving station
overriding the Intercom signaling mode selected.
2. A station can leave only one callback request.
3. The [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button LED will continue to flash until all Message
Wait and Call Back requests, including Voice Mails, have been serviced.
4. If a station is attempting to leave a message and the system Message Wait queue
is full, the station will receive ICM busy tone.
5. A Message Wait remainder tone can be enabled to remind the user of messages
waiting.
6. A station in Call Forward can leave a message wait.
7. A Message Wait indication is left at the originally called station even if the call is
forwarded except for Executive/Secretary pairs.
8. A user of an iPECS IP or LDP Phone with display may call back to stations that left
messages in any desired order, or the normal “oldest-first” order.
9. Placing an Intercom call to a station will cancel any existing Station Message Wait
or Call Back request from that station.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers  MSG Wait Reminder Tone Timer
Related Features


Message Wait Reminder Tone
CLI Message Wait
Hardware
291
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3.11 Paging
3.11.1
Internal/External & All Call Page
Description
If your station is permitted to access page facilities, you can connect and transmit voice
announcements to any or all of the systems Internal/External Page zones. Stations are
grouped into “zones” to receive pages to the zone. Stations not assigned to any zone will not
receive pages including All Call pages.
A page warning tone, if assigned, will be provided to the Page Zone(s) prior to the audio
connection. You may continue the page announcement for the specified Page Time-out after
which you will be disconnected and the Page Zone(s) returned to idle.
The default Page Zone dial codes are as follows:
Internal Page Zones
Internal All Call Page
External Page Zone -1
External Page Zone -2
External All Call Page
All Call Page
*301~ *400
543
545
546
548
549
Flexible buttons of iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned to access a Page Zone as a
{PAGE ZONE} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {PAGE ZONE} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Page Zone number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To make a page
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the desired paging code or press a {PAGE ZONE} button.
3. If assigned, after the Page Warning Tone, make announcement.
4. Replace the handset to return to idle.
To queue for a page when busy is received
1. Press the[MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button.
2. Replace the handset, returning to idle.
SLT
To make a page
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the desired paging code.
3. If assigned, after the Page Warning Tone, make announcement.
292
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4. Replace the handset, to return to idle.
To queue for a page when busy tone is received
3. Dial “556”, the Call Back code.
4. Replace the handset returning to idle.
Conditions
1. Stations, which are denied access to paging, will receive error tone when any
Page Access code is dialed.
2. When calling a busy Page Zone, you will receive busy tone. You may use callback
to queue for the Page Zone. Note that All Call Page is busy when any Page Zone
is busy.
3. DTMF signals from stations are transmitted through the systems External Page
port after access.
4. If an iPECS IP or LDP Phone user attempts to page using the speakerphone, preselection will be activated and the display shows ‘Lift Handset for Page when ‘Lift
Handset for Page’ is ON’.
If ‘Lift Handset for Page’ is OFF then user can make page on speakerphone
without lift handset.
5. Stations in DND or busy will not receive Page announcements.
6. Stations that are not included in any Internal Page Zone, will not receive any page,
including All Call.
7. For external paging, an external amplifier and speaker(s) are required.
8. The systems External Control Contacts may be assigned to activate when External
Page is accessed. The contact can be used to activate the External page
equipment.
9. A station is permitted only one Page Zone queue request at a time. If a station
attempts another Page Zone queue, only the later queue request is honored.
10. When a busy Page Zone becomes idle, the system will select the oldest page
queue, and signal the appropriate station. The signaled station will receive an
audible ring indicating the queue callback. The audible ringing will be a distinctive
signal. The All Page Zone, while signaling a queued station, is considered busy. In
addition, the All Page Zone is considered busy when any page zone is active.
11. The queue recall is always in the tone ring mode regardless of the station’s ICM
signaling mode. The recall signals the station for 15 seconds, after which, the
queue is canceled and the next station in the queue is signaled.
12. If the waiting station is busy, and the Page zone becomes available the next idle
station in the Page Queue list is signaled and the busy waiting station is placed at
the bottom of Page Queue list. If there is no other available queued station in the
Page Queue, the Page Queue for the busy station is canceled.
13. When the waiting station goes to idle, and both a “Page Queue” and “CO Call back
Queue” exist, the Page Queue is given priority.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Page Access
Internal Page Zone
293
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
SYSTEM DATA
Issue 1.3
Common Attributes Privacy Warning Tone
External Control Contacts
System Timers Paging Timeout Timer
Related Features

Meet Me Page Answer

External Amplifier & Speakers
Hardware
3.11.2
Meet Me Page
Description
During a Page, you may request another user respond to the Page and “Meet” you by dialing
the Meet-Me code. When the party dials the Meet-Me code, the page is terminated and an
intercom call is connected between you and the party.
Flexible buttons of iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned as a {MEET ME} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {MEET ME} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “544” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To answer a page with Meet Me Page
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “544”, the Meet Me Page code.
Or,
Press the {MEET-ME} button.
SLT
To answer a page with Meet Me Page
1. Lift the handset to receive intercom dial tone.
2. Dial “544”, the Meet Me Page code.
Conditions
1. A Meet Me Page must be answered within the Page Time-out timer.
2. A station may answer a Meet Me Page from any station regardless of pickup or
paging group assignments and page access permission.
3. The paging party must remain Off-hook until the paged party answers the Meet Me
request. The initiator may press the Mute button to eliminate transmitting audio
over the page circuit while waiting for the party to answer.
294
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Paging Timeout Timer
Related Features

Internal/External & All Call Page
Hardware
3.11.3
SOS Paging
Description
A System announcement can be recorded and then used as a page announcement. A Flex
button of an iPECS IP or LDP phone is required.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {SOS Page} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “Page Code” + System Announcement Number +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To activate SOS paging
1. Press the assigned {SOS Paging} Flexible button.
Condition
1. This feature can be activated only by pressing the assigned Flexible button in the
idle state.
2. The System announcement for SOS Paging can be recorded only from an
Attendant station.
3. Paging zones include Internal, External and All Call page zones.
4. SOS paging is not restricted by the Paging timer. The entire SOS paging
announcement will play over the Page zones until complete even if the Paging
time out expires.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Page Access
Related Features


Internal/External & All Call Page
Integrated Voice Mail

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
295
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3.12 Push to Talk Paging
Description
Each iPECS IP, LDP and WLAN Phone can be assigned as a member of one or more of the
system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page groups. As such a user, you may login or out of any
one or all of the PTT groups to which your station is assigned. Once logged in, you may place
or receive one-way page announcements to/from other users who are logged in to the same
PTT group. To place a PTT page announcement, the user must press and hold the {PTT}
Flex button.
An Attendant may log other stations in and out of PTT groups.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {PTT} Flex button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “99” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To log-in to a PTT group
1. Dial “#0”, the PTT Log-in/out code.
2. Dial the desired PTT group number (“1”~“9” and “0” for all groups).
To log-out of the PTT group(s)
1. Dial “#0”, the PTT Log-in/out code.
2. Dial “*”.
To place a page to the active PTT group
1. Press and hold the {PTT} Flex button.
2. After confirmation tone, make your page announcement.
Attendant
To log other stations in to a PTT group
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “077”, the Attendant PTT log-in/out code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station dial the station number and ‘*’.
4. Dial the PTT group number (“1”~“9” and “0” for all groups).
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To log other stations out of a PTT group
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “077”, the Attendant PTT log-in/out code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station dial the station number and ‘*’.
4. Dial “*”.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
296
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Conditions
1. Conditions associated with Internal/External & All Call Page apply to Push-to-Talk
paging.
2. To access PTT paging, the station must be permitted access to system paging and
assigned to one or more PTT groups.
3. If allowed access to all PTT groups, a station may login to all groups (PTT group 0)
to place announcements to all groups simultaneously and receive announcements
from any group.
4. A station can only login to PTT groups to which it is assigned access.
5. The station must have a {PTT} button to place or receive PTT announcements. As
a default, the iPECS WLAN phone is assigned a PTT button.
6. The station may be assigned and logged in to the default active PTT group in the
system database.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan PTT Group Log-in/Log-out
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Page Access, Active PTT Group
Number
Related Features

Internal/External & All Call Page


iPECS IP or LDP Phone
iPECS WLAN
Hardware
297
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
3.13 Emergency page
Description
If a station makes a Emergency page, the station can page to not only idle stations and
external page ports but also talking stations.
When the Emergency page is starting, the talking stations disconnect the current call and
receive the emergency page.
Except that the Emergency page can page to talking stations, the Emergency page is equal
to All Call Page.
Flexible buttons may be assigned to make a emergency page as a {Emergency Page}
button.
Operation
To assign a Flex button as a {Emergency Page} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Emergency Page code + [HOLD/SAVE]
To make a page
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Emergency Page code or press a {Emergency Page} button.
3. If assigned, after the Page Warning Tone, make announcement.
4. Replace the handset to return to idle.
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Page Access
SYSTEM DATA
Common Attributes Privacy Warning Tone
External Control Contacts
System Timers Paging Timeout Timer
Related Features
Hardware
298
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4. OUTSIDE (CO/IP)LINES
4.1
Auto Fault Detection and Recovery
Description
If the system detects a Line fault on a PRI Line or SIP Trunk, the Line/Trunk is placed in an
Out-Of-Service state and temporarily placed in the unused Line group. Upon recovery, the
system will automatically return the Line to in-service. An alarm signal is sent to notify the
System Attendant of the fault.
Operation
System
Operation of Fault Detection and Recovery is automatic.
Attendant
To terminate the alarm signal
1. Dial “565”, the Alarm Rest code.
Conditions
1. The “Unused” Line Group contains Lines that are not used or are temporally
blocked.
2. This feature is only available for E1, T1 and PRI Lines, and SIP trunks.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO/IP Group
System Data
Alarm Attributes Emergency Call Notify, DCOB Fault
Notify, SIP Registration Fault Notify
Related Features

Outside Line Groups
Hardware
299
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.2
Issue 1.3
Caller ID Mode
Description
The Caller ID signals for analog CO Lines varies from region to region. To support these
differences, each analog CO Line interface is assigned the type of Caller Id signal provided
from the CO Line. The Caller Id signal type can be configured as:
 FSK
 DTAS FSK
 DTMF
 Russia-CID
Operation
Operation of this feature is either automatic (when programmed) or by Web Admin.
Conditions
1. Caller Id is provided from analog CO Lines after the first ring signal. If the call is
answered prior to receipt of the Caller ID, Caller Id will not be received or displayed.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
CID/CPN Attributes CID Mode
Related Features

ICLID Call Routing

Analog CO Line
Hardware
300
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.3
Issue 1.3
CO Line Flash
Description
Analog CO Lines recognize a brief open or ground connection, “Flash”, as a request for new
dial tone. When used behind a PBX, a Flash is often used to activate a PBX feature or call
transfer.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flash Flex button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “94” + [HOLD/SAVE]
While connected to an analog CO line
1. Press the {FLASH}button; the system generates a flash on the analog CO line.
SLT
While connected to an analog CO line
1. Momentarily depress the Hook-switch.
2. Dial “551”, the Flash feature code, the system generates a Flash on the analog CO
Line.
Conditions
1. Stations may Flash on an analog CO Line defined for PBX operation and will
experience COS (Class of Service) dialing restrictions after a PBX Trunk access
code is dialed.
2. During a Flash, the LED for the Line button will remain lit.
3. A Flash may be stored as a part of a Station or System Speed Dial number.
4. While connected to an internal call or dial tone, activating Flash will return internal
dial tone.
5. While making a Page Announcement, activating Flash will terminate the Page
Announcement and return internal dial tone.
6. The Flash function is not available on ISDN and IP Line calls.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Analog Attributes Flash Timer
Related Features


Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial

Analog CO Line
Hardware
301
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.4
Issue 1.3
CO Line Release Guard Time
Description
To assure that the service provider’s switching equipment has sufficient time to restore to the
idle condition, the system will hold analog CO Lines in a busy state after you release the Line.
The time between the disconnect and when the system changes the CO Line status from
busy to idle is the CO Line Release Guard time.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers CO Release Guard Timer
Related Features
Hardware

Analog CO Line
302
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.5
Issue 1.3
CO Line Ring Detect
Description
The system incorporates timers for Ring-On and Ring-Off durations to assure proper alerting.
When the duration of the ring signal exceeds the Ring-on timer, alerting will start. When the
ring is not present for a period exceeding the Ring-off timer, alerting will stop. This allows the
system Ring cycle detection to be matched to various PBX and carrier systems.
Operation
System
Operation of Ring detect is automatic.
Conditions
1. Ring-On and Ring-Off are assigned on a system basis.
2. The CO Ring Detect is applied to analog CO Lines only.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers CO Ring On Timer, CO Ring Off Timer
Related Features
Hardware

Analog CO Line
303
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.6
Issue 1.3
Dial Pulse Signaling
Description
An analog CO Line can be configured to send dial pulse signals to the central office. If
programmed as a pulse CO line, the system will send open loop pulses at 10 pps with the
assigned break/make ratio.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. The break/make ratio is system programmable as 60/40 or 66/33.
2. You can change the signaling from pulse to DTMF by dialing ‘*’ while on a Line
assigned for pulse signaling.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO Line Type
SYSTEM DATA
Pulse Dial (Break/Make) Ratio
System Timers Pause Timer
Related Features


Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover
DTMF Signaling

Analog CO Line
Hardware
304
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.7
Issue 1.3
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Description
A carrier service, known as Direct Inward Dial (DID), sends digits to the system so that the
calls may be routed directly to a specific station or system facility. Digits sent to the system
are generally the last digits (3 or 4) dialed by the caller.
After collecting the digits from the carrier, iPECS converts the digits employing one of three
DID digit conversion Types:
 Type 0 - collect incoming digits based on the programmed digit count and convert
the digits according to the DID conversion pattern, resulting in the DID destination
number.
 Type 1 - use the incoming DID digits as the destination number without converting.
 Type 2 - Use the result of DID conversion Type 0 as an index to the Flexible DID
Conversion Table and use the table information to route the call.
Operation
System
Operation of DID is automatic once configured.
Conditions
1. If ICLID (Incoming Calling Line Id) routing is assigned for the Line, the received
Caller Id is compared to the ICLID Table for routing first. If the Caller Id does not
match an entry in the ICLID Table, the normal DID call processes are used.
2. DID calls that encounter a busy signal, are not answered in the DID/DISA No
Answer Timer, or are received at a vacant or invalid number are routed to the
Attendant, a tone, Station group, or System announcement. When the Attendant
receives such calls, the call is appropriately identified in the Attendant iPECS IP or
LDP Phone display.
3. For a station that is part of a non-pilot Station Hunt group, DID calls will follow the
group hunt process if the Station is busy or does not answer the call.
4. DID calls are subject to Group Call Pick-up and Directed Call Pick-up.
5. If a System announcement is defined as the destination in the Flexible DID
Conversion Table, a Caller Controlled Routing Table for the announcement can be
defined. iPECS can be configured to drop (disconnect) the call after playing the
recorded announcement.
Programming
SIP DATA
SIP User ID Attributes
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes  CO Line Type
CID/CPN Attributes  DID Remove Number
305
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
DID Service Attributes  DID Conversion Type
SYSTEM DATA
DID/DISA Destination
System Timers  DID/DISA No Answer Timer
DID Service Attributes  DID Conversion Type
TABLES DATA
CCR (Customer Call Routing) Table
Flexible DID Conversion
Related Features




Integrated Auto Attendant
Directed Call Pick-Up
Group Call Pick-Up
IP Trunk
Hardware
306
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.8
Issue 1.3
DID Line Digit Conversion
Description
When you place or receive an outside call, the digits you dial or the called Id are compared
with the Digit Conversion Table. If the dialed digits match an entry in the table, the digits are
converted as defined in the table. Within the table are 32 sub-tables with up to 200 entries of
up to 24digits for each sub-table.
Different conversion can be assigned for the same dialed number based on the system
service mode and LCR configuration. Conversion can also be limited to outside calls from a
station or an outside Line. The latter may be used in networked environments where a
system in the network employs Lines from another system to place a call.
Operation
Digit Conversion is applied automatically according to programming.
Conditions
1. Each CO Line is assigned to use a specific Digit Conversion Table.
2. There are two (2) special entries for configuring digit conversion:
 X: Mask Digit, any digit is accepted
 F: Ignore Digit
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attribute  Digit Conversion Table Index
SYSTEM DATA
Digit conversion Table
Related Features
Hardware
307
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.9
Issue 1.3
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Description
Each outside Line may be assigned for DISA service, which allows an incoming caller to gain
access to the system resources and/or features. The iPECS will answer the outside call and
provide intercom dial tone or route to a System announcement where Caller Controlled
Routing may be defined. The DISA caller may then access the desired resource using dial
codes.
If an Authorization Code is required for DISA access, when the system answers the incoming
DISA call, DND Warning tone is provided to indicate an Authorization Code must be entered.
Operation
System
Incoming call subject to DISA service
1. Recognize incoming call.
2. Answer call and connect caller to Intercom dial tone or System announcement.
3. Process call based on received digits/programming.
DISA Caller
To access the system’s resources from an external party
1. Place call to DISA facility of the system.
2. At receipt of dial tone or announcement, dial as desired. If DND Warning tone is
received, enter an Authorization Code to receive dial tone.
Conditions
1. Each outside Line is separately assigned for DISA operation during Day, Night
and/or Timed system operation mode. DISA operation is active only when the
system is in the assigned operating mode(s).
2. DISA callers can be routed to a System announcement in place of Intercom dial
tone. The announcement can be associated with a CCR Table or assigned to
disconnect after playback.
3. A DISA caller can be required to enter an Authorization Code to access the
system’s external outgoing resources, facilities or features. If required, the caller is
permitted to retry entry of a valid Authorization Code based on the DISA Retry
count. Continued failure results in disconnect.
4. DISA callers are subject to COS (Class of Service) dialing restrictions. If
Authorization Codes are required and the code entered matches a Station
Authorization Code, the station COS (Class of Service) will apply. Otherwise, the
assigned DISA COS (Class of Service) will apply. In both cases, the Line COS
(Class of Service) for the outgoing Line will be active.
5. The system will disconnect an outgoing DISA call if the Unsupervised Conference
308
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
timer expires or disconnect supervision is received. A disconnect warning tone is
provided 15 seconds prior to disconnect.
6. If a DISA caller encounters a system All Lines Busy, busy tone is received for 5
seconds before ICM Dial tone is again presented and the DISA caller may try
another call.
7. LEDs associated with the DISA Line appearance will provide normal status
indications at all stations except the Attendants. The LED for the Line at an
Attendant will flutter at 240 ipm when busy.
8. An iPECS IP or LDP Phone user can only receive a DISA call with an available
DISA Line appearance button.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes DISA Account Code, DISA CO Access
DISA Service Attributes
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes DISA Retry Count
DISA COS (Class of Service)
DID/DISA Destination
System Timers DID/DISA No Answer Timer, Unsupervised
Conference Timer
TABLES DATA
CCR Table
Auto Ring Mode Table
Related Features






Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Dialing Restrictions
Authorization Codes (Password)
Unsupervised Conference
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Auto Service Mode Control
Hardware
309
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.10 DTMF Signaling
Description
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) signals are used with Lines assigned for DTMF signaling.
The duration of the DTMF signal can be adjusted from 40 to 990 milliseconds.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. The system mutes your voice transmission to reduce interference while sending
DTMF tones.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Analog Attributes CO Line Signal
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Inter-Digit Timer, DTMF Duration Timer
Related Features


Dial Pulse Signaling
Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover
Hardware
310
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.11 IP Address Dialing
Description
If allowed, you can place calls using an IP path. The system accepts user dialed digits as the
IP address for the called party. When dialing an IP call, the asterisk, “*”, is used as the “dot”
between bytes of the IP address.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place an IP Call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the{IP Line Group} button or dial the IP Group access code.
3. Dial “xxx * xxx * xxx * xxx”, use “*” as the dot in the IP address.
4. Press “#” to complete dialing.
SLT
To place an IP Call
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the IP Group access code.
3. Dial ‘xxx “*” xxx “*” xxx “*” xxx‘, use “*” as the dot in the IP address.
4. Press “#” to complete dialing.
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
CO/IP Group Access
Station IP Attributes Direct IP Call
CO LINE DATA
VoIP Attributes
Related Features
Hardware

IP Line
311
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.12 IP Trunking
4.12.1
H.323 v4 Service
Description
When assigned to support H.323 protocol, VoIP channels provide protocol conversion
between H.323 v4 and the iPECS protocol. This permits the VoIP channel to connect to
external H.323 networks or terminals and to support H.323v4 supplementary services. In
addition, H.323 VoIP channels can register with an external H.323 Gate Keeper to support
Gate Keeper call routing.
Supplementary services are supported employing H.450.1 ~ H.450.12 standards, which
define the following supplementary services:
 H.450.1: Supplementary Services Framework
 H.450.2: Call Transfer
 H.450.3: Call Diversion
 H.450.4: Call Hold
 H.450.5: Call Park & Pick-up
 H.450.6: Call Waiting
 H.450.7: Message Waiting
 H.450.8: Name Identification
 H.450.9:Call Back
 H.450.10: Camp-On
 H.450.11: Intrusion
 H.450.12: Additional Information
Operation
System
Operation of H.323 Service is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Station IP Attributes
BOARD BASED
DATA
H.323 VoIP Attributes
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO/IP Group
VoIP Attributes CO VoIP Mode
H.323 DATA
H.323 Basic Attributes
312
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
H.323 CO Group Attributes
H.323 Incoming route table
Related Features


System Networking
SIP Trunk Service

IP Line
Hardware
4.12.2
SIP Trunk Service
Description
When assigned to support SIP (Session Initiation Protocol), VoIP channels provide protocol
conversion between SIP and the iPECS protocol. This permits the VoIP channel to connect
to external SIP networks for call services. The UCP supports SIP Trunks requiring
registration with or without authentication, as well as provisioned SIP Trunks. In addition, to
the IETF RFC-3261 Session Initiation Protocol draft standard, iPECS VoIP channels support
other SIP related RFCs including:
RFC-2617
HTTP Authentication, Basic & Digest
RFC-3515
Refer Method
RFC-3264
Offer/Answer Model
RFC-3265
SIP Basic Call Flow Examples
RFC-3891
SIP “Replaces” Header
Using the SIP database assignments, the system will register and authenticate with the SIP
proxy server permitting the system to interoperate employing SIP to establish, manage and
terminate real-time voice sessions with external parties.
Operation
System
Operation of SIP Trunk Service is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes  SIP User Table Index
Station IP Attributes
313
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
SIP DATA
SIP User ID Attributes
SIP CO Attributes
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO/IP Group
VoIP Attributes CO VoIP Mode
Issue 1.3
Related Features


System Networking
H.323 v4 Service

SIP Trunk
Hardware
4.12.3
SIP Virtual CO Line (VCOL)
Description
Normally, SIP Trunks employ a VoIP channel for connection between the SIP Trunk and the
system device placing or receiving the call. The VoIP channel acts as a relay point for port
forwarding, conversion of signaling protocols, and a DSP is used to convert between Codecs
and to deliver certain system tones. When the network allows for a direct connection between
the device and the SIP trunk, and the same codec is supported by both ends a virtual SIP
Line can be used. In this case, the system does not assigned a VoIP channel for RTP relay,
a DSP for voice processing, and DTMF signaling must be set to out-of band.
Operation
Operation of Virtual SIP CO Line Service is automatic.
Conditions
1. DTMF tone detection is not supported, only out-band DTMF type (SIP Info
Message) is supported.
2. SIP phones require an available VoIP channel, built-in the UCP or from a VOIM, to
relay Page announcements, BGM and MOH packets.
3. A system VoIP channel is required to support local features. A VoIP channel is
required to serve the below features.
a. DSP for generation of Busy/Error/Confirm/Ring-Back/Hold/ Page/Warning/
OHVA/Intrusion/Dial tones from system to SIP Trunk
b. Relay of Music On Hold from system to SIP Trunk
c. Relay of Paging from/to SIP Trunk
d. Voice RTP Packet Relay between private LAN and public WAN, local and
remote, NAT resolution
A physical VoIP channel will be provided dynamically by the system to support
these functions. It is recommended that the system be equipped with a number of
314
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
physical VoIP channels to support these functions. One or two VoIP channels
should be available for every four (4) Virtual SIP CO Lines at a minimum.
4. The Virtual SIP CO Line must still be configured as with a normal SIP Trunk
including the Proxy, Domain, etc.
5. The SIP Virtual CO Line must be configured with the Non-recursing RTP Diversion
Method. In addition, out-of-band DTMF should be selected unless the connected
iPECS device can detect inband signals (Auto Attendant/Voice Mail as an
example).
6. Note that since if a Virtual SIP CO Line is used a VoIP channel may be required for
the SIP Phone to use the SIP Trunk.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
Device Port Number Change Virtual Registration Device
ID, MAC Address check, Max Port, Soft Channel
STATION DATA
SIP User Table Index
Station IP Attributes
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO/IP Group
VoIP Attributes CO VoIP Mode
SIP DATA
SIP User ID Attributes
SIP CO Attributes RTP Diversion Method, DTMF Type
Related Features

SIP Trunk Service
Hardware
315
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.13 IP WAN Dialing after Answer
Description
The iPECS system permits sending and receiving DTMF signals after connecting to an
external VoIP party. The DTMF signal can be DTMF tone, Text String, or DTMF protocol
based on the system programming.
Operation
System
Operation is automatic based on the system database.
Conditions
1. The connected VoIP party must transmit DTMF digits in the mode selected in the
system database otherwise; the DTMF digits will not be recognized.
Programming
SIP DATA
SIP CO Attributes DTMF Type
Related Features
Hardware

IP Line
316
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.14 ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network)
Description
The iPECS system supports both BRI (Basic Rate Interface) and PRI (Primary Rate Interface)
ISDN circuits. Both the ETSI 30B+2D and NA 23B+D channel configurations are supported.
Through switches on the PRI Interface module, E1/T1 digital Line operation or PRI ISDN
operation is selected.
4.14.1
Calling/Called Party Identification
Description
The iPECS system receives calling party identification in the ISDN call Set-up message,
CLIP-Calling Line Identification Presentation. The answering party identification, which may
be different from the called party, is received in the ISDN connect message, COLPConnected Line Identification Presentation. When provided, the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP
Phones displays the identification, which is included in call records.
LINE RINGING
CLI 03438502821
The system will also compare the Calling Line Identification to the Speed Dial bins. If a match
exists, the Name of the Speed Dial bin may be displayed in place of the number.
For an incoming call, the received identification may be sent to the selected serial or TCP
port for output. The output will appear as below:
Output at ring start:
AA : BBBBBBBBCCC
Output at ring stop (abandoned):
AA : BBBBBBBBCCC : DDDDDDDDD(EEE)
Output at answer:
AA : BBBBBBBBCCC : DDDDDDDDD(EEE) -> FFF
Where:






AA – ISDN CO line number
BB…B –Calling/Connected Line Identification received
CCC – Called station
DD…D – Speed Dial name
EEE – Speed Dial bin number
FFF – Answering station
The system will send calling and answering party identification in the appropriate messages
to the ISDN based on the database. Identification messages may be restricted, not reported,
317
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
to the far-end user. Calling Line Identification Restriction and Connected Line Identification
Restriction may be enabled in the system database or you may activate restrictions with a
{CLIR} and {COLR} Flex buttons.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program {CLIR} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “81” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To program {COLR} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “82” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate CLIR or COLR, before placing or answering an ISDN call
1. Press the {CLIR} or {COLR} Flex button.
Conditions
1. This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN service area or may be a
subscription service.
Programming
STATION DATA
CLI Attributes CLIP Display, COLP Display
CO LINE DATA
CID/CPN Attributes  CLIP &COLP Table Index, Type of
Number for Calling Party Info
ISDN LINE DATA
ISDN Attributes CLI Print to Serial
Related Features
Hardware

4.14.2
ISDN Line
ISDN AOC (Advice of Charge)
Description
When ISDN Advice of Charge service is provided from the ISDN, the iPECS system will
deliver charge information for display in the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP Phones and include
the AOC in SMDR records. AOC is implemented in accordance with ETSI ISDN AOC
Specifications.
318
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Operation
System
ETSI standard AOC operation is automatic.
Conditions
1. AOC information, which is implemented based on ETSI AOC standard, can be
sent during call set-up (AOC-S), during the call (AOC-D) or at the end of call
(AOC-E).
2. This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN service area or may be a
subscription service.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
SMDR Attributes
CO LINE DATA
ISDN Attributes Advice of Charge
Related Features


SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Call Cost Display

ISDN Line
Hardware
4.14.3
Keypad Facility
Description
The ISDN Keypad Facility Information Element (IE) may enable you to activate certain ISDN
services (e.g. Off-Net Forward). To access this facility, your Station must be enabled and
have a {KEYPAD FACILITY} Flex button. When activated, the digits you dial are sent in the
Keypad Facility IE instead of the Called Party Number IE.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program {KEYPAD FACILITY} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “89” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate the keypad facility while on an ISDN line
1. Press the {KEYPAD FACILITY} button.
2. Dial desired digits; other actions disable the Keypad facility feature.
319
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Conditions
1. This feature can be activated or deactivated only after an ISDN Line is seized.
2. Once activated, the system will continue to send dialed digits as Keypad Facility IE
messages regardless of other ISDN messages. Thus, in the connected mode,
DTMF tones are not sent to the connected party, only the keypad message is sent.
3. If a Speed Dial bin includes the[MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button as the first entry,
the remaining digits in the Speed Dial number are sent in a Keypad Facility IE.
4. This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN service area or may be a
subscription service.
5. The system can handle only a single Call Reference; services that require
handling of two simultaneous Call References, cannot be supported.
Programming
STATION DATA
Flexible Buttons
Related Features


Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial


iPECS IP or LDP Phone
ISDN Line
Hardware
4.14.4
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)
Description
Up to eight (8) Subscriber Numbers (telephone numbers) can be served by a Basic Rate
Interface allowing Direct-Dial-In call delivery. This “Sub-Address” information is included as
digits in the Called Party Number Information Element.
When the MSN Sub-address information is received, the system references the MSN Table
for an index to the Flexible DID Table, which determines call routing. If no index to Flexible
DID Table is assigned then the call routes to all stations that have an idle {MSN} button
corresponding to the MSN Telephone Number received or to a button for the outside Line. If
none is available, the call routes employing the DID/DISA Destination.
The system will use the MSN number when a call is received using an MSN button on ISDN
or SIP Lines.
Operation
System
Operation of the MSN feature is automatic when configured.
320
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program an {MSN} button
[TRANS/PGM]+{FLEX}+[TRANS/PGM]+“85”+“#”’+MSN digits+[HOLD/SAVE]
Conditions
1. If the Called Party Number from the ISDN does not match an MSN Table entry, the
received digits are treated as defined for DID calls to determine an index to the
Flexible DID Table.
2. The MSN Table employs the outside Line number entry as a quick look-up
reference. If the Line number is programmed in the MSN Table, then only those
entries with the Line number are searched, otherwise the entire MSN Table is
searched for a match to the Called Party Number.
3. When assigning an {MSN} button the “MSN digits” should match one of the MSN
Table entries. To assign an MSN button on the phone, the MSN number must exist
in the system MSN Table.
4. An MSN loop button is overwritten by an individual CO line button, if it is exist. On
the other hand, an MSN loop button is not overwritten by CO Group button.
5. Multiple duplicate {MSN LOOP}buttons can be assigned on an iPECS IP or LDP
Phone.
6. If enabled in SMDR, the MSN number is output as the Account code for outgoing
calls employing an MSN button.
7. MSN Call Wait can be assigned to deliver the call to a busy station. If not assigned,
the call is routed using the DID/DISA Destination or is disconnected.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes MSN Wait
Flexible Buttons
CO LINE DATA
ISDN Attributes
ISDN LINE DATA
ISDN Attributes
MSN Table
SYSTEM DATA
SMDR Attributes Print MSN
Related Features

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

ISDN or SIP Line
Hardware
321
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.15 ISDN Supplementary Services
In many cases, the ISDN service provider offers enhanced services, to which a user may
subscribe. The iPECS system allows access to these ISDN “Supplementary Services”
implemented under the ETSI regime as described below.
4.15.1
ISDN Call Deflection
Description
When the ISDN Supplementary Service “Call Deflection” is supported, you can forward
incoming calls on the ISDN line directly through the ISDN without the need to establish a
connection through the system.
When Call Deflection is used, the system sends a call-deflection request message with the
telephone number to receive the call to the ISDN. The ISDN then sends incoming calls to the
desired telephone number. In this case, the system does not set-up a Line-to-Line
(Unsupervised Conference) connection for the call.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate ISDN Call Deflection to an external number
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial Forward condition (“1”~“4”, “#”).
4. Press [SPEED] button and dial the desired bin number.
5. Replace the handset to return to idle.
To deactivate ISDN Call Deflection
1. Press flashing [FWD] button, Call Forward will deactivate and the [FWD] button
LED is off.
Conditions
1. The ISDN must support the Call Deflection Supplementary Service as defined by
the ETS300-202/206/207 standard protocol.
2. ISDN lines that support Call Deflection must be assigned in the system database.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
ISDN Line Attributes ISDN-SS CD/CR
Related Features

ISDN Supplementary Services
322
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Hardware


4.15.2
ISDN Line
iPECS IP or LDP Phone
ISDN Malicious Call ID Request
Description
When the ISDN supports the Malicious Caller Id supplementary service, iPECS can request
the Calling Line ID (CLID) from the ISDN. The CLID is saved and output in the SMDR call
record. Malicious Caller Id is activated during an ISDN call and requires a {MCID REQUEST}
Flex button to access the feature.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program an {MCID REQUEST} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “*0” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To request MCID, while on an incoming ISDN call
1. Press the {MCID REQUEST}button; the CLID is output in the SMDR.
Conditions
1. The ISDN must support the Malicious Caller Id Supplementary Service as defined
by the EN300-130 standard protocol.
2. If the MCID request is successful, the SMDR call record will include the CLID
returned from the ISDN and the characters “MT”. If the request fails, the characters
“MF” are included in the record.
3. If the system is programmed to save SMDR records, the CLID is stored in the
system memory as part of the call record.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
MCID Request
SYSTEM DATA
SMDR Attributes  Save Enable
Related Features


ISDN Supplementary Services
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)


ISDN Line
iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
323
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.16 Line Monitor
Description
When a Line is configured in the system and the system determines that the service provider
connection is lost, the Line is placed in an Out-of-Service condition. In this state, the Line
cannot be employed for an outgoing call but incoming calls operate normally.
Operation
Operation of this feature is either automatic (when programmed) or by Web Admin.
Conditions
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Analog Attributes Analogue Line Monitor
Related Features
Hardware

Analog CO Line
324
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.17 Multiple Calling Line IDs
Description
Using an ISDN Line, sending your Id (telephone number) to the other party is referred to as
Calling Line Id Presentation (CLIP) or Connected Line ID Presentation. When you place or
receive a call, the system constructs your Id and sends the information to the service provider.
The Id consists of the Area Code + COLP/CLIP Table value + a Station CLI.
There are five Station CLIs associated with your station and each ISDN Line is assigned to
use one of the five. The five CLIs are identified as “Station CLI 1” through “Station CLI 5”. As
a default, the “Station CLI 1” is your station number. Each of the five Station CLIs can be
assigned up to 16 digits.
In addition to the Station CLI, each Line is assigned a COLP/CLIP Table entry number
(00~50). The corresponding Table value is a digit string of up to ten (10) digits. In addition,
each ISDN Line is assigned an Area code.
Note if the COLP/CLIP Table entry is set at 50, the “Station CLI 1” is always used and the
Area code and Table value are not added to the “Station CLI 1”. That is only the “Station CL 1”
is used as your Id.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic as configured.
Conditions
1. Your station can be assigned to restrict sending an Id for the call.
2. Your station can be configured to replace your Station CLI with the Station CLI of
the Attendant.
3. As a default, the Line is assigned to use the Station CLI (Station CLI 1) and ISDN
Lines use the COLP/CLIP Table entry 50 or “Station CLI”.
4. The ISDN Line can be assigned to use different Table entries for the COLP and
CLIP values.
5. For Transit calls, additional options are available to employ the CLI of the original
forwarding party.
6. The LCD of the station can display the CLI or COL Id if CLIP and COLP Display is
enabled.
7. Multiple Calling Line Ids applies to SIP trunks when the “From” Id is assigned to
use the Extension CLI.
Programming
STATION DATA
CLI Attributes Station CLI 1-5
CO LINE DATA
CID/CPN Attributes COLP & CLIP Table Index
325
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Type of Number for Calling Party Info
Related Features
Hardware
326
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.18 Outside Line Groups
Description
The outside Lines, in the system can be placed into groups for assigning access by stations
and common access dial codes as well as to separate the type of Line (analog, digital or IP).
There are 200 Line groups in the UCP.
Unused Lines are assigned to Group 201 in the UCP. Private Lines are assigned to Group
000.
Operation
Conditions
1. Unused outside Lines must be assigned to the appropriate group so that stations
do not accidentally access these lines.
2. Outside Lines in Groups 001 through 200 can be accessed individually by dialing
the code “88” and the Line number.
3. An outside Line in Group 000, which is the group for Private Lines, can be
accessed only with a Flex button assigned to the Line.
4. The system will select an outside Line from a group based on the Round Robin or
Last Choice method as configured in the system database.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes  CO PGM
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes  CO/IP Group
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes CO Line Choice
Related Features

Private Line
Hardware
327
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.19 Outside Line Preset Forward
Description
Each outside Line can be assigned a Ring-No-Answer Preset Forward destination. An
incoming call on the Line will be routed to the defined Forward destination. At expiration of
the Preset Forward timer, the call forwards to the defined Preset Forward destination, which
is an index to the ICLID Ring Assignment Table.
The destination can be a station or station group including an adjunct Voice Mail. When the
call forwards to an adjunct Voice Mail group, a predefined Voice Mail Id (VMID) is sent to the
VM system to identify the Mailbox to receive the call.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
Outside Line Preset Forward is disabled for calls initially routed to a station group.
Outside Line Preset Forward will override Call Forward No-Answer at a station.
Outside Line Preset Forward is disabled if the Preset Forward Timer is set to 0.
The outside Line Preset Forward destination cannot be the integrated Voice Mail
group.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Preset FWD Attributes Preset FWD Timer, Preset
ICLID Ring Table Index, Preset VMID Digit
ISDN LINE DATA
ICLID Ring Assignment
Related Features


Call Forward
ICLID Call Routing
Hardware
328
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.20 Outside Line Ring Assignment
Description
Each station in the system can be programmed to provide an audible signal when the system
detects an incoming call on specified Lines. Separate ring assignments are made for Day,
Night and Timed Ring operation mode. In addition, the audible signal at the station can be
delayed by 1 to 9 ring cycles allowing other stations to answer the call first.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1. Separate assignments are made for stations to ring in the Day, Night and/or Timed
Ring mode.
2. A busy station receives muted ring or Call Waiting tones as appropriate for the
station’s Off-hook ring assignment.
3. The system Ring mode can be selected manually by the Attendant or
automatically. In the Automatic mode, Day/Night selection is determined based on
the Automatic Ring Mode Selection table.
4. The LCD of the Attendant station will display Night and Timed Ring Mode and the
[DND] button LED will flash.
5. If an outside Line is not assigned to ring at any station, incoming calls on the
outside line will ring the first available Attendant.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
TABLES DATA
Auto Ring Mode Table
Related Features



Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Auto Service Mode Control
Off-Hook Signaling
Hardware
329
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
4.21 Private Line
Description
Your iPECS IP or LDP Phone can be assigned exclusive use of one or more outside Lines.
These “Private” lines are assigned to a special Line Group (group 000). To use a Line from
this group, your phone must be assigned a Flex button for the outside Line appearance.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place an outgoing Private line call
1. Press the {LINE} button assigned as the Private line, dial tone is received from the
Line.
2. Dial the desired number.
To answer an incoming Private line call
1. Press the flashing{LINE} button.
Conditions
1. Private lines will not recall to the Attendant station.
2. Private lines are not subject to Call Pick-Up except by an assigned Secretary with
an appearance of the Private line.
3. When put on hold, a Private line will recall the user after the appropriate Hold timer.
The user will receive recall for the Hold Recall time, and, if still unanswered, the
user will continue to receive recall for the Attendant Recall time. If the call remains
unanswered, at expiration of the Attendant Recall time, the call will be
disconnected and the Private line returned to idle.
4. A Private line will follow Call Forwarding only if the receiving station has an
appearance ({LINE} button) for the Private line. However, calls on a Private line
can forward to the Voice Mail permitting the caller to leave a voice message.
5. IP channels cannot be assigned as Private lines.
Programming
STATION DATA
Flexible Buttons
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Group
Related Features




Hold
Call Forward
Executive/Secretary Forward
Call Forward, Preset

iPECS IP and LDP Phones
Hardware
330
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5. IPECS PHONE
5.1
Answering Machine Emulation
Description
When a call is sent to a Voice Mailbox, the associated station can be assigned to notify you
and allow you to screen the call. Two methods of notification and call screening are provided,
Ring or Speaker mode.
In the Ring mode, you are notified by flashing of the AME (Answering Machine Emulation)
Flex button. You may press the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice message is stored.
In the Speaker mode, when the call is sent to the Voice Mailbox, the caller’s voice is
automatically broadcast over the speaker of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
You may terminate the screening leaving the caller in Voice Mail to record a message, talk
with the caller and record the conversation in the mailbox, or answer the call and disconnect
the Voice Mail.
Your iPECS IP or LDP Phone must be assigned with an AME Flex button for proper
operation.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign an {AME} button
Manual Mode:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “564” + “0” + [HOLD/SAVE]
Auto Mode:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “564” + “1” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To screen a call in the Manual mode
1. Press the flashing {AME} button, the caller’s voice is broadcast over the station
speaker and stored in the Voice Mailbox.
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail
1. Press the illuminated [SPEAKER] button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice Mail
1. Press the illuminated [MUTE] button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message
1. Press the illuminated {AME} button, the caller is connected and the Voice Mail
disconnected.
Conditions
1. AME is supported only on iPECS IP and LDP Phones and an {AME} Flex button
331
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
must be assigned on the phone.
2. If you answer a call using the {AME} button, the caller is connected in the normal
manner, the Voice Mail is disconnected and, with the integrated Voice Mail, any
message recorded by the caller is not stored.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
AME Feature
Related Features


External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
332
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.2
Issue 1.3
Auto Release of [SPEAKER]
Description
After completion of certain features, the [SPEAKER]button turns off automatically, returning
the iPECS IP or LDP Phone to idle.
Operation
System
Auto Release of the [SPEAKER] button operation is automatic. For the supported features,
refer to the conditions.
Conditions
1. This feature applies to all User and Attendant Programming except Custom
Message, outside Line Disable and Version Display. Auto Release of [SPEAKER]
button also applies to features including Call Park, Call Back, Call Forward and
Queuing.
2. If, during Station User Programming, erroneous data is entered, error tone is
received and the user must correct the error before the station will return to idle
automatically.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
333
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.3
Issue 1.3
Automatic Speaker Select
Description
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones programmed for Auto Speaker Select can access an outside
Line or an internal call by pressing the appropriate button without the need to lift the handset
or press the[SPEAKER] button. Audio from the call is sent to the speaker and the
microphone is active, as if you pressed the [SPEAKER] button to answer the call. This is
useful if you are receiving a call but want to place a call instead of answering the ringing call
or if you have multiple calls ringing at your phone, you can select the call to answer.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To access an internal or external system resource
1. Press a {FLEX} button for the Line or station.
Conditions
1. For iPECS IP and LDP Phones not equipped/assigned with speakerphone, the
user must lift the handset to be heard.
2. Paging while on the speakerphone will cause feedback from other nearby phones
or the local paging equipment. If Auto Speaker is enabled and a {PAGE ZONE}
button is pressed, the display will show "LIFT THE HANDSET". To complete the
page, the user must lift the handset within the predefined 5-second period or return
to idle.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Auto Speaker Selection,
Speakerphone
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
334
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.4
Issue 1.3
Background Music (BGM)
Description
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones can receive audio, generally music, from an internal or
external source while idle. Music from the source is received over the speaker and will be
shut-off during ringing, pages, or while the station is off-hook.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To Receive Background Music
1. Press [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “73”, the BGM code.
3. Dial the two (2)-digit (00-10)BGM source.
00 – no BGM
01 – Music 1 (Internal)
02 – Music 2 (External)
03 – System Announcement MOH 1
04 – SLT MOH 1
05 – SLT MOH 2
06 – SLT MOH 3
07 – SLT MOH 4
08 – SLT MOH 5
09 – System Announcement MOH 2
10 – System Announcement MOH 3
4. Press [HOLD/SAVE] to save your selection.
Attendant
To Transmit BGM through an External Page Port from an Attendant
1. Press [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “074” or “075”, the Attendant Station Program code for External Page Port 1
and2, respectively.
3. Dial the two (2)-digit (00-10) BGM source.
00 – no BGM
01 – Music 1 (Internal)
02 – Music 2 (External)
03 – System Announcement MOH 1
04 – SLT MOH 1
05 – SLT MOH 2
335
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
06 – SLT MOH 3
07 – SLT MOH 4
08 – SLT MOH 5
09 – System Announcement MOH 2
10 – System Announcement MOH 3
4. Press [HOLD/SAVE] to save your selection.
Conditions
1. The speaker volume is adjustable at the station by using the [VOL UP]/[VOL
DOWN]buttons.
2. BGM is delayed 1 second after a return to idle state.
3. Silence is provided if no BGM source is assigned.
4. For remote devices, BGM must be locally provided; BGM is not sent from the
iPECS UCP system to remote devices.
5. VSF MOH1 employs System announcement 201 and must be recorded properly.
System announcement MOH2 and MOH3 may use any unused System
announcement except for announcement 201 and 202. The announcement
number must be defined in Music Sources under System Data.
6. For SLT MOH, the SLT port must be connected properly and the station number of
the SLT port used for MOH must be assigned as the SLT MOH port.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Music Sources BGM Type, MOH Type, Internal/External
Music, Internal Music Type, SLT MOH 1-5,VSF MOH2-3
Related Features


MOH (Music-On-Hold)
Internal/External & All Call Page

An external music source properly connected to the iPECS UCP
module, refer to the iPECS UCP Hardware Description and Installation
Manual.
Hardware
336
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.5
Issue 1.3
Call Log Display
Description
Using an iPECS IP or LDP Phone with 3-Soft buttons, you can view a log of incoming,
outgoing and missed calls on the display. A Flex button must be assigned as a {CALL LOG}
button, which allows easy access to the Call Log menu.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {CALL LOG} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “57” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To access the Call Log menu
1. Press the {CALL LOG} button.
1. RECEIVED CALL
2. DIALED CALL
OK
2. Using the Volume Up/Down keys, select the desired log (received, dialed, or
missed).
123467890
24/07 14:51
BACKDELETEOK
Conditions
1. The number of records in the Call Log is limited by the Call Log attribute in the
System Data.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System AttributesCall Log Number, ICM Call Log, Number
of CLI Wait List
Related Features
Hardware

iPEC SIP and LDP Phones with LCD
337
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.6
Issue 1.3
Call Profile Routing
Description
Call Profile Routing is an extension of the Station ICR feature. You can configure and assign
up to ten (10) scenarios to each of the three (3) Call Profiles. Then you can activate a Call
Profile to route your calls.
The system will attempt to route your incoming calls to the first destination that meets the
scenario. If the destination does not answer in the Profile Timer, the call routes to the next
destination.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To create a Call Profile Scenario
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “24”, the ICR menu code.
or Log in to the Station Web Portal.
2. Select the desired Scenario number (0 - 9).
3. Select the type of Caller ID (0 – 5):
 Type 0 – Station CID
 Type 1 - All Station
 Type 2 – CO CID
 Type 3 - All CO call
 Type 4 - All call
 Type 5 - N/A
4. Enter the Scenario Start and End Date (YYMMDD).
5. Select day-of-week using Flex button:
 Flex button 1 (MON) – Flex button 7 (SUN)
 Flex button 8 (Holiday)
6. Enter scenario Start Time and End Time (HHMM).
7. Select Type of destination (0 – 6):
 Type 0 – Station
 Type 1 - Hunt group
 Type 2 - CO Line Number
 Type 3 - CO Group number
 Type 4 - CO Loop
 Type 5 - CO Transit
 Type 6 - N/A
8. Select Scenario Priority (0 to 9,0:highest priority).
9. Select Forward From Net (0/1).
10. Select Call Profile Table Index (0-3).
11. Select Call Profile Timer (10–60 seconds).
338
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To activate ICR Call Forward
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive a dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial the desired Call Forward code (0-4).
4. Dial “587”, the Station ICR activation code.
5. Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate/deactivate a Profile from your phone
1. Activate ICR Call Forward.
2. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “26”, the Call Profile menu
or Log in to the Station Web portal.
3. Select the Call Profile Table desired (“0”: ICR or “1”-“3”: Call Profile 1-3).
To change the Call Profile while away from your phone
1. Call to iPECS System (DISA CO Line).
2. Dial “#” to access your Voice Mailbox.
3. Enter your Station Number and Authentication code.
4. Dial “7” to set call forward.
5. Enter “1” to set Station Call forward.
6. Enter “587”, the Station ICR Code.
7. Enter “Call Profile Number” (0:ICR Forward, 1-3: Call Profile 1-3).
Conditions
1. Call Profile Routing is available on digital and IP Lines only and is applied to
outside calls that are routed to your phone as a Transfer, DID or DISA call. Calls
that are assigned to Ring to your phone are not subject Call Profile Forward.
2. The conditions associated with Station ICR apply to Call Profile Routing.
3. It is recommended that any hunt group route be set as the last call profile
destination. Once a call is routed to a Hunt group, only the Hunt group routing is
followed and further Profile routing is ignored.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Call Forward
Station Timer Station Forward No Answer Timer
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Call Forward No Answer Timer
Related Features


Call Forward
Station ICR

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
339
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.7
Issue 1.3
Call Wait for Internal & External calls
Description
Internal/external calls can be waited without busy if there are available associated flexible
buttons.
The indication of LED on button is blinking, the caller name/number is displayed on LCD, and
Audible Muted(Off Hook) Ring (or Tone) will be heard .
Station (DSS) button can have Internal call waiting, CO (Grp.)/Loop button can have External
call waiting, and specially ‘Unified-LOOP(U-LOOP)’ button can have both Internal and
External calls waiting according to setting option; OFF, For external / Internal, For external,
For Internal.
In case of external DID call, If you are busy on a call and you receive a DID call, the call will,
as a default, follow the reroute assignments for the DID call destination (PGM 167). The
system can be configured to queue the call to your station allowing you to end or hold your
active call to answer the DID call. DID call will queue for the DID/DISA No-answer time then
will route based on the reroute assignments.
The following table is overview of condition and operation for call waiting.
1st condition
2nd condition
Max.
waiting
Audible
LED
LIP/
LDP
MutedGreen:
UP.113 Station
available empty
Ring
steady/held/rec
LOOP(48),
Attributes
U-LOOP buttons,
all
Other
{Call Wait
or
Station/CO(GRP)/ Button(as
= For
Amber:
available
External/Intern (CO)LOOP
Normal/Fast
Flexible
buttons
al, For
flashing
Button)
External, For
Internal}
Red:
With or Without
N/A
Ring/ACD
P.191 Group
Normal/Fast
Button
Group Call
Attribute Ring
flashing
Queue
& ACD
Indication
{Indication =
ON}
Auto Hold: Station Data > Common Attributes(111) > “Automatic Hold = OFF/ON”
Auto Transfer: Station Data > Common Attributes(111) > “Auto Transfer By Button = OFF/ON”
SLT
Normal
Incoming
Camp-On
Normal
Incoming
Call Wait
Unconditionally
= ON
When busy after 2 normal calls
Name
/Number of
Waiting
Call for a
few
second,
back to
original
Off
NA
Hook
Signal
1 call
Tone
nd
Pickup 2 Incoming call, Switch between 2 picked-up Calls: Press [Hook Flash] 2 times continuously.
In case of pressing [Hook Flash] 1 time, it will make a new call and hang up, and then the call will be transferred
to the new call or after connected to new call => Broker Call by 1 time of [Hook Flash] / Conference by Fast 2
times of [Hook Flash]
340
2 calls
LCD
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Introduction of various types of call-queuing (incoming/making /talking/held call) buttons
• DSS button
 Assignment of a specific station number
 Call-queuing from/to the specific station number
 Presence of the station status
• CO channel button
 Assignment of a specific CO channel
 Call-queuing for an external calling/receiving/held call via the specific CO
channel
 Presence of the CO channel status
• CO-Group button
 Assignment of a specific CO-group number
 Call-queuing for an external calling/receiving/held call via the specific CO-Group
 Presence of the queued call on the button
• CO-LOOP button
 Assignment of a special type 'LOOP' for non-specific/random/whole-range of CO
channels
 Call-queuing for an external calling/receiving/held call via the button
 Presence of the queued call on the button
• MSN-LOOP button
 Assignment of a external DID telephone number
 Call-routing of an incoming external call with called party number to stations who
have MSN LOOP buttons with same DID telephone number as the incoming
called party number
 Call-queuing and presence of status of the incoming external call
 Call-queuing and presence of status of an outgoing external call which was
created on the button when make a call by pressing the button.
 Multiple buttons assignment with same or different MSN telephone number
 An option : MSN Wait = OFF/ON (second incoming MSN routing call allow =
yes/no)
• Unified-LOOP button
 Assignment of coverage of my station number
 Multiple buttons assignment
 A button can have an receiving/making/held call for both type of internal and
external call
 DSS/CO/CO-Group/CO-LOOP/MSN-LOOP button goes first than Unified-LOOP
button
 (An incoming call is presented on related DSS/CO/CO-Group/CO-LOOP/MSNLOOP button at first, the call is presented on an Unified-LOOP button at second
priority)
Do not need to enable "call-coverage-mode" feature for utilization of this button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
Keyset
To assign a {Call Wait} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “34” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate/deactivate call wait
Press the {Call Wait} button.
1. Dial activate/deactivate code, “0: Off”, “1:For External/Internal”, “2:For External”, or “3:
341
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
For Internal” respectively.
Web
To activate/deactivate call wait
[Call Wait] = the following options (PGM113: Call Wait )
- OFF: Deactivate Call wait for all calls
- For External/Internal: Activate Call wait for External & Internal calls
- For External: Activate Call wait for External call
- For Internal: Activate call wait for Internal call
To assign a {U-Loop} button
Web admin: [Station Data] => [Flexible buttons] => select ‘U-Loop’ Type and click [SAVE]
button.
Keyset : [PGM] + flexible button + Call-coverage numbering plan + My station number.
- Example) 671001 ('67' is call-coverage feature code, '1001' is my station number).
Call Wait Flow
1. One Unified-LOOP(U-LOOP) button can keep one incoming/making/talking/held
internal/external call.
2. An incoming call is acknowledged to be waited if there is an idle Unified-LOOP(ULOOP) button. First call to a station is acknowledged even without an idle button.
From second call, there need to be an idle U-LOOP or Station/CO(Grp.)/(CO)LOOP
button to accept the incoming call without reject it to ‘busy’.
3. To make a call, user can dial internal or external number with or without press of the
button.
If user presses a button to make a call then the button will be used for the call.
If user does not press a button then an idle button is automatically seized for the call.
 Make of internal call: [button] + dial station number
 Make of external call: [button] + co access code + external number
4. Auto-Hold: a talking in a button is automatically sent to being held when press the
other button. Station Data > Common Attributes(111) > Automatic Hold.
5. Auto-Transfer: can transfer a talking call to a new making call by press idle button to
make a call (ex. Operation: user is talking a call => press an empty U-LOOP button
and make a call => complete the transfer by on-hook). Station Data > Common
Attributes(111) > Auto Transfer By Button.
Call Waite Indication
1. Audible Muted Ring (Continuous/One-Burst/Silence by PGM111 Station Data
Programming > “Off-Hook Ring Type”.
2. LCD Display
A. Display Caller Name & Number of Waiting Calls
B. Sequential Display : Talking Call => 1st waiting call (for 6 seconds) => 2nd waiting
call (for 6 seconds) => … => back to talking call if there is no more waiting call
3. LED Flashing
A. Talking/Making : Green Steady
B. Held : Green Normal-Flash
C. Held Recall : Green Fast-Flash, or Red Fast-Flash to distinguish from 1st waiting’
Red Normal-Flash
D. Incoming Waiting :
342
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
 Single waiting : Amber Normal-Flash
 Multiple waiting : 1st waiting(Red Normal-Flash), from-2nd (Amber NormalFlash)
E. Differentiation of current LCD displayed Name &Number by LED: Amber FastFlash(for synchronization of Display and Flashing : Amber Fast-Flash button is
displaying now).
SLT
1. For SLT, maximum 2 normal calls and additionally one camp-on call can be waited.
2. Off-Hook Signaling Tone is presented when call comes in during a talking.
3. Pick-up 2nd call during a talking state: Hook-Flash x 2 times of normal interval
between Hook-Flashes. 1st Flash(transfer) + 2nd Flash(pickup waiting call or switch to
the other call).
4. Switch calls between one talking and the other one waiting call: Hook-Flash x 2 times
of normal interval between Hook-Flashes.
5. Camp-On Call : Can accept maximum 2 of normal incoming calls, and the 3rd call is
returned to ‘busy’ and then caller can indicate ‘Camp-On’ by press ‘*’. The SLT user
will hear Off-Hook signaling tone and pick up the camp-on call by 2 times of HookFlash on normal interval.
6.
7.
8.
9.
User can switch between 3 calls (2 normal incoming and 1 camp-on call) by press 2
times of Hook-Flash.
Transfer a talking call : 1 time of Hook-Flash and then make a new call
Switch of calls between on transferred call and a connected call(made) : 1 time of
Hook-Flash
Conference between SLT, transferred and a connected call(made) call : 2 times of
Hook-Flash on fast interval(within 2 or 3 seconds).
Recommended(by self-test) SLT Hook Flash Timer (P.182): SLT Hook Flash Bounce
Timer(1*100ms) / SLT Maximum Hook Switch Flash Timer(5*100ms) / SLT Minimum
Hook Flash Timer(7*10ms).
Conditions
1. Other routing such as Preset Call Forward applies to DID calls even if DID Call
Wait is active.
2. External DID calls will follow the call routing defined in PGM 167 after the
expiration of the DID/DISA no answer timer.
3. An iPECS IP or LDP Phone must have an appearance button for the DID line.
4. For external DID calls, Assigning the ICLID Timer, which enables ICLID routing, for
a DID line, disables DID Call Wait.
5. Combination with exist DSS/CO-Individual/CO-Group/CO-LOOP/MSN-LOOP
buttons.
1) Priority.
- For internal call: DSS > Unified-LOOP.
- For external call: CO-Individual > MSN-LOOP > CO-Group > CO-LOOP >
Unified-LOOP.
2) An incoming internal call.
- The call is acceptable if there is appropriate DSS button or an idle UnifiedLOOP button.
- Via DSS button first if there is associated DSS button.
3) An incoming external call.
343
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
- The call is acceptable if there is an appropriate CO-Individual or idle MSNLOOP or idle CO-Group or idle CO-LOOP or idle Unified-LOOP button.
- Via one of above buttons according to priority.
4) Making of internal call.
- In idle state, if dial a station number by dial pad.
 One of DSS button or Unified-LOOP button is seized automatically for
the call.
- Seize DSS button and dial : the DSS button is seized.
- Seize Unified-LOOP button and dial.
 If there is DSS button, the DSS button is seized.
Or, the pressed Unified-LOOP button is seized.
5) Making of internal call.
- In idle state, if dial CO-access-code and external number by dial pad.
 One of CO-Individual/CO-Group/CO-LOOP/Unified-LOOP button is
seized automatically for the call.
- Seize CO-Individual/CO-Group/CO-LOOP button and dial : the COIndividual/CO-Group/CO-LOOP button is seized.
- Seize Unified-LOOP button and dial.
 If there is CO-Individual/CO-Group/CO-LOOP button, the COIndividual/CO-Group/CO-LOOP button is seized.
Or, the pressed Unified-LOOP button is seized.
6) Auto-hold and auto-transfer are implemented also using previous DSS/COIndividual/CO-Group/CO-LOOP/MSN-LOOP buttons.
- On internal/external talking state, the call is transferred to the right-next
call of making by pressing of CO-Individual/CO-Group/CO-LOOP/MSNLOOP/Unified-LOOP
Programming
STATION DATA
CO LINE DATA
SYSTEM DATA
CLI Attributes Call Wait
Analog Attributes ICLID Ring Timer
DID/DISA Destination
System Timers DID/DISA No Answer Timer
Related Features




Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
ICLID Call Routing
Intercom (ICM) Call
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
344
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.8
Issue 1.3
DND –One-Time DND
Description
While on a call, if you wish not to be interrupted by another call, pressing the DND button will
activate One-time DND. For the duration of the active call, your phone will be in DND. Onetime DND can be activated while you are on a call or receiving ring for a new call. In this
case, pressing the DND button will terminate the ringing and the call is routed based on the
following precedence:
 Previous or active Call Forward busy.
 Preset Call Forward busy.
 Station Call Coverage.
 Direct Transfer to Voice Mailbox.
 Return busy signal and disconnect.
When you complete your active call, DND is cancelled and the [DND] LED is extinguished.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate One-Time DND while ringing
1. Press the [DND] button, the [DND] LED lights, station goes to DND state.
System
Deactivation
1. When the station returns to idle, DND is disabled and the [DND] LED extinguishes.
Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Outside Line recalls will override One-Time DND.
Your station must be permitted DND to activate One-time DND.
A station cannot reject a call from the Attendant using One-time DND.
One-time DND is not available to the Attendant.
One Time DND cancels existing Callback queues.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes DND, Call Forward
Preset Call Forward Transfer to Mail box
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Call Forward No Answer Timer
Related Features



Call Waiting/Camp-On
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call Forward
345
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual


Call Forward, Preset
Station Call Coverage

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
346
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.9
Issue 1.3
Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment
Description
You may program a telephone number directly to a Flex button without the need to assign the
number to a Speed Dial bin. In this case, the system automatically allocates the telephone
number to the highest numbered unused Station Speed Dial bin.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a telephone number to a Flex button
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the desired Flex button.
3. Press the [TEL NUM]soft button or, for 24D and 24DH phones, press the [ICM]
button.
4. Press the outside Line button or dial the Line access code.
5. Dial the telephone number.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
7. Dial the name to be associated with the number (optional).
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To place a call to the assigned telephone number
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the assigned Flex button.
Conditions
1. When a Flex button is assigned with a telephone number, the system will allocate
the number to the highest available Station Speed Dial bin. If no bin is available,
you receive error tone when attempting to assign the telephone number.
2. The telephone number may include any of the special Speed Dial instructions
([MESSAGE/CALLBACK], {FLASH], display security, etc.).
Programming
Related Features

Station Speed Dial

iPECS IP and LDP Phone
Hardware
347
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.10 Flexible LED Flash Rates
Description
The flash rates used with the various buttons on the iPECS IP and LDP Phones can be
adjusted on a system wide basis to meet your needs. Up to 35 different functions can be
assigned any one of 15 different flash rates.
Operation
System
System implements flash rates automatically based on database entries.
Conditions
1. Available Flash rates and functions, which can be assigned, are given in the
iPECS UCP Administration & Programming Manual.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
LED Flashing Rates
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
348
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.11 Group Listening
Description
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones have a built-in speaker. If allowed, you may employ the
speaker to monitor a call while using the handset to converse with the outside party. This
enables a group of people in the room to listen to both parties in the conversation.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
While on a call using the handset
1. Press the [SPEAKER] button, speaker activates, the speakerphone microphone
will be muted while the handset is off-hook.
Conditions
1. While using the speakerphone, lifting the handset will turn off the speakerphone.
To activate Group Listening, the [SPEAKER] button must be pressed while the
handset is off-hook.
2. With Group Listen active, pressing the [MUTE] button will mute the handset
microphone. The connected party is still heard over both the handset receiver and
the speaker.
3. If full speakerphone operation is desired and permitted, with Group Listen active
simply place the handset on-hook.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Group Listening
Related Features


Speakerphone
Mute

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
349
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.12 Intercom Signaling Mode
Description
You can set the signaling received when your iPECS IP or LDP Phone receives an incoming
ICM call while the station is idle. There are three signaling modes available.
H - Call announce with Hands free answerback
When an ICM call is received, you hear a brief splash of tone followed by the caller’s voice.
You may respond to the caller without the need to “Lift the handset” or “press the [SPEAKER]
button”.
P - Call announce with Privacy
When an ICM call is received, you receive a brief splash of tone followed by the caller’s voice.
To respond you must lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
T - Tone ringing
An ICM call will cause your iPECS IP or LDP Phone to provide audible ICM ring tone. You
must lift the handset or press the[SPEAKER] to answer the call.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To change ICM Signaling Mode
1. Press [TRANS/PGM] button, the [SPEAKER] button LED lights steady.
2. Dial the Station User Program code “13”, confirmation tone is received.
3. Dial the desired ICM Signaling Mode code (“1” for H, “2” for T or “3” for P).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. Message Wait, Callback, Call Forward and Attendant Override will ring in the tone
mode, regardless of ICM Signaling Mode you select.
2. The ICM signaling Mode Selection does not affect Page announcements.
3. The default ICM Signaling mode is Tone ring and the active mode is stored in
battery-protected memory.
4. A SLT always functions in the Tone ring mode.
Programming
Related Features



Intercom Call (ICM Call)
Paging
Message Wait/Call Back
350
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual



Call Forward
DND Override
Intrusion

• iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
351
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.13 Microphone Mute
Description
You can turn off the microphone of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone, which will stop audio
transmission from the handset, speakerphone or headset microphone, “Mic Mute”.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To Mute the Microphone
1. Press the [MUTE] button, the [MUTE] button LED is ON and the microphone
(Handset, Speakerphone, Headset) is muted; the connected party receives silence.
To activate the microphone
1. Press the illuminated [MUTE] button, the [MUTE] button LED is OFF, and the
microphone is activated, transmitting audio to the connected party.
Conditions
1. Changing from speakerphone to handset or vice versa during a mute condition
returns the microphone to an active status; your voice is transmitted to the
connected party.
2. Returning to idle or placing another outside Line or intercom call will change the
mute status to its normal active microphone condition.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Headset Ring, Speakerphone, E&MIC
Headset
Related Features



Speakerphone
Group Listening
Headset Compatibility

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
352
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.14 Off-Hook Signaling
Description
When you receive a call while you are on an active call, you will receive the assigned Offhook signals. For ICM calls, a Camp-On, Voice-Over Announcement or Off-hook ring signal
may be received. For outside calls, you will receive a muted ring or a single tone burst. This
signal is delivered to the iPECS IP or LDP Phone speaker. SLTs will only receive camp-on
tones.
Operation
System
Operation of Off-hook ring signals is automatically controlled.
Conditions
1. While using the speakerphone, a Camp-On tone is provided over the speaker in
place of the assigned Off-hook ring Signal.
2. Activating DND or One-Time DND places the station in DND, terminating any Offhook signaling.
3. Off-hook ring signals terminate when the call forwards, or is answered or
abandoned.
4. A station, which is receiving Off-hook ring signals, will receive normal ring upon
return to idle status.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Off-Hook Ring Type
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Off-Hook Ring Type
Related Features




Call Waiting/Camp-On
Outside Line Ring Assignment
DND (Do Not Disturb)
DND –One-Time DND

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
353
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.15 On-Hook Dialing
Description
Using your iPECS IP or LDP Phone equipped with a Speakerphone, you can place as well as
receive calls while the handset is on-hook.
With Automatic Speaker Select, you need not press the speaker button to initiate a call,
simply dial the number or press a button to activate the Speakerphone automatically.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate On-Hook Dialing
1. Place desired call (dial station ICM number, select a Line and dial, etc.) the
[SPEAKER] button LED lights and the call is processed.
Conditions
1. When you place a call in using On-hook dialing, you activate the Speakerphone
and, you must press the illuminated [SPEAKER] button to return to idle.
2. When the speakerphone is used, the microphone is active unless the [MUTE]
button is pressed and the [MUTE] button LED is ON.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Auto Speaker Selection
Related Features





Mute
Speakerphone
Automatic Speaker Select
Headset Compatibility
Group Listening

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
354
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.16 Outside Line Name Display
Description
When you receive or place and outside call, the Line number is displayed in the LCD. If the
Line is assigned a name and Name display is enabled, the Line name is displayed instead of
the number.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To display the Line name
1. Press the outside Line button, or dial a Line/Group access code, the LCD displays
the Line name.
Conditions
1. Each outside Line is assigned a name of up to 12 characters in the system
database.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes CO Name Assign, CO/IP Name
Display
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone w/Display
355
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.17 Prime Line Immediate/Delayed
Description
When you go to an off-hook state, the system normally provides ICM dial tone. If desired, a
station can be assigned to access a different pre-assigned system resource (Prime Line).
The Prime Line can be any of the Idle Line Settings:
 Seize an outside Line
 Call another station
 Activate a Flex button feature
 Call to pre-assigned Hunt group
 Call to pre-assigned Station Speed
 Call to pre-assigned System Speed
Prime Line access can be defined as immediate or delayed. When assigned immediate, upon
an off-hook event, the system provides access to the Prime Line. With Delayed Prime Line,
you receive normal Intercom dial tone for the Prime Line Delay timer and, after the delay, the
Prime Line is accessed. This allows you to make a selection overriding the Prime Line.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To access the station’s Prime Line
1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] button and take no action, Prime Line as
assigned will be accessed.
Conditions
1. Any of the station’s Flex buttons may be assigned as the Prime Line. When you lift
the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button, the system will act as if you preselected the button prior to going off-hook.
2. Selection of another Flex button or Feature button just prior to an off-hook event
will override the Prime Line assignment.
3. A SLT can be assigned an Idle Line Selection with a Speed Bin Number.
4. When Delayed Prime Line is set, you must wait, taking no action until the Prime
Line is accessed. You will receive ICM dial tone during this period and may dial
any valid numbering plan digit(s), select a Flex button, or feature button.
5. If the Prime Line Delay Timer is greater than the Dial tone time-out, the Delayed
Prime Line will not activate. It will be necessary to reduce the delay timer or extend
the Dial tone time-out.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Prime Line
Idle Line Selection
356
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Prime Line Delay Timer
Related Features



Speakerphone
Intercom Call (ICM Call)
Station Flexible Buttons

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
357
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.18 Ring Tone Selection and Download
Description
You can select one of Ring tones so that the iPECS IP Phone ring can be distinguished from
other nearby phones. Eight tones are stored in the iPECS IP Phone permanent memory. The
first four tones are fixed and the 5th through 8th Ring tone can be downloaded from a library
of 10 tones stored in the system’s protected memory. After downloading the tone from the
system memory, it can be selected as the Differential Ring Tone.
If using an LDP Phone, you can select one of 15 Ring tones stored in the phone.
Operation
iPECS IP Phone
To download a Ring Tone from the system memory
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “15”, Ring Tone Download code.
3. Dial the desired Ring tone location, “5”~“8”.
4. Dial digits “00” through “10” to hear the Ring Tones.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To select a Ring Tone
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “11” for Intercom Ring tones, “12” for Line Ring tones.
3. Dial the digit (“1”~“8”) to select the Ring Tone.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
LDP Phone
To select a Ring Tone
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “11” for Intercom Ring tones, “12” for Line Ring tones.
3. Dial the digit (“1”~“15”) to select the Ring Tone.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The downloadable ring tone files are stored in system memory as *.wav files with a
maximum length of 4 seconds.
Programming
Related Features


Station User Programming & Codes
Differential Ring

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
358
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.19 Save Number Redial (SNR)
Description
The last dialed number on an outside call may be stored (up to 48 digits) in a buffer for future
redial. This number is saved in memory until you request a new number be stored. Numbers
dialed for subsequent calls do not affect the Save Number buffer.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To save a dialed number, after dialing the number on an outside call on the LDP phones
1. After dialing and before hanging up, press [SPEED] button twice.
To save a dialed number using the LIP-8000/8000E/9000 series menu
1. After dialing and before hanging up, press the right Navigation button, then the
next 3-Soft button menu displays.
2. Press the [SAVE] soft button.
To dial a saved number
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial “#”.
To dial a saved number using the LIP-8000/8000E/9000 series menu
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Dial “#”.
Conditions
1. The saved number can be a maximum of 48 digits.
2. Dialing the saved number will automatically seize the outside Line that was used
for the original call. If the Line is busy, a Line from the same group will be selected
and the saved number dialed. If all Lines from the group are busy, you will receive
the All Lines busy tone and may queue.
3. To erase a Save Number Redial, prior to dialing a number use the Save Number
procedure, this will erase the Save Number Dial buffer.
4. If there is no {LINE} button available at the phone, the call will be presented on a
{POOL}, or {LOOP} button.
5. Save Number Redial is protected from power failure.
6. Manually dialing a Flash during an outside Line will cause only those digits after
the Flash to be stored and re-dialed as the Save Number Redial.
Programming
359
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Related Features




Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
LNR (Last Number Redial)
CO Line Flash

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
360
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.20 Serial DSS/BLF Console
Description
The iPECS IP & LDP Phones can be connected to a Serial DSS/BLF Console to provide
additional Flexible buttons for your use. This can be particularly useful for an Attendant or
Secretarial answering position.
The Console is attached to the phone through a serial cable connection and thus does not
use another station port on the system. For more information about DSS models except the
below, ask your dealer.
 LIP-8012DSS-12 button Console with paper button designation label
 LIP-8012LSS-12 button Console with LCD for button designation label
 LIP-8048DSS-48 button Console with paper button designation label
 LIP-8040LSS-40 button Console with LCD with Triple color LED
 LIP-9012 DSS has 12 flexible buttons with tri-color LED. The DSS button kit
uses a paper label for the button designations.
 LIP-9024 DSS has 24 flexible buttons with tri-color LED. The DSS button kit
uses a paper label for the button designations.
 LIP-9024 LSS has 12 flexible buttons with tri-color LED. The LSS button kit uses
an LCD for the button labels and has two flexible button pages to represent 24
total flexible buttons. The two lower buttons control the page view. The page
button LED will flash when there is new activity under a button on the page. You
can press the page button at any time to change the flexible button page view.
The DSS models employ a paper label strip to designate the function of each button. The
LSS model employs an LCD to designate the button function. The designation for a button on
the LSS model employs standard designations such as STA xxx for a {DSS/BLF} button but
can be modified in the system database to meet your needs.
With some restrictions, you may equip your phone with up to four (4) Serial Consoles. For
installation details, refer to the iPECS UCP Hardware Description and Installation Manual or
Quick Installation guide of each phone.
Operation
iPECS IP Phone
Flex buttons on the Serial Console operate the same as the buttons on the phone.
Conditions
1. The maximum number of Serial Consoles supported in an UCP system is 500 and
no more than 200 can be the LSS model.
2. The iPECS IP Phone model LIP-8004 does not support a Serial DSS/BLF Console.
3. The LIP-8048DSS must always be powered by external adaptor available from
Ericsson-LG Enterprise.
4. An iPECS IP Phone can only provide power to two Serial Consoles, the remaining
361
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
two Consoles must be powered by the external adaptor.
5. A Linked pair secondary station cannot have a Serial Console.
6. When configuring Flex buttons from the phone, the Serial Console Flex buttons
are not used, use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to scroll. For example,
when you press the [VOL UP] button the Flex buttons on the phone will represent
the first buttons on the first Console. Note that even though a Console may have
only 12 buttons, the system allocates 48. When programming Flexible button
labels for an LSS, the1st Console starts from button 49, the 2nd starts from button
97, the 3rd Console starts from button 145, 4th starts from button 193.
7. As a default, the 48 button Console is assigned with button Map 1 to 4 depending
on the position of the Console. The 12 button Consoles are not assigned a map.
8. If DSS configuration is changed and the phone restarts, programmed DSS data is
initialized from the changed DSS.
9. While idle, the [VOL UP]/[VOL DWN] buttons control the contrast of the LCD of
both the iPECS IP Phone and the LSS model serial.
10. Your station must be enabled to employ a Serial Console, if not enabled, any
connected console will not function.
11. The LIP Phones can also be associated with the standard LIP-8040LSS-40 button
Console with LCD designations. A maximum of nine (9) such consoles can be
associated with a station.
12. LDP-7048DSS-48 button Console with paper button designation labels may be
used with the LDP 7000 series phones. LDP-9048DSS-48 button Console with
paper button designation labels may be used with an LDP 9000 series phone.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Serial DSS Usage
Flexible Buttons LSS Label
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP & LDP Phone with Serial DSS/BLF Console
362
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.21 Silent Text Message
Description
You may use Silent Text Messaging to respond to a Voice Over call without disconnecting
the existing call. Silent Text Messages are sent by pressing a pre-programmed message
button or the[DND] button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program a {TEXT MESSAGE} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “51” + Display Message code (“00”-“20”)
+ [HOLD/SAVE]
To respond to an Off-Hook Voice Over call with a Text message
1. Upon receiving the announcement, press the desired {TEXT MESSAGE} or
the[DND]button, the text message is sent to the display of the calling party and the
OHVO call is terminated.
Conditions
1. Silent Text Messaging sends the DND display message, “STA IN DO NOT
DISTURB” displays in the LCD of the calling Station.
2. When Silent Text Messaging is used to respond to an OHVO call, the existing call
will not be disconnected.
3. When a SLT places the Voice Over call, the receiving station will receive the “NO
DISPLAY AVAILABLE” message and error tone to indicate Silent Text Messaging
is not available to the SLT.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Voice Over
Related Features




Call Waiting/Camp-On
Group Listening
Voice Over
Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages

iPECS IP or & LDP Phone
Hardware
363
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.22 Speakerphone
Description
Your iPECS IP or LDP Phone is equipped with speakerphone circuitry enabling the telephone
to be used hands-free in two-way conversations.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate the speakerphone
1. Press the [SPEAKER] button, [SPEAKER] LED lights steady.
To switch from Handset to Speakerphone
1. Press the [SPEAKER] button, [SPEAKER] LED lights steady.
2. Replace Handset, Speakerphone activated.
To terminate a speakerphone call
1. Press the [SPEAKER] button, [SPEAKER] LED extinguishes.
Conditions
1. If Automatic Speaker Select is enabled for the station, pressing a DSS, outside
Line or Speed Dial button will automatically activate the speakerphone.
2. The [MUTE] button LED indicates the status of the Microphone, when lit the
Microphone is inactive.
3. When Group Listen is enabled, pressing the [SPEAKER] button while using the
handset will send audio to both the Handset and Speaker. However, only the
Handset microphone is active. In order to activate the Speakerphone Microphone,
the Handset must be placed on-hook.
4. Each iPECS IP and LDP Phone equipped with Speakerphone is allowed/denied
Speakerphone operation in the system database.
5. When Headset operation is assigned for the station, the Speakerphone is disabled
and the [SPEAKER] button activates the Headset audio path instead of the
speaker.
6. The LIP-8002 phones are not equipped for speakerphone operation but do support
On-hook dialing.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Headset Ring, Speakerphone, E&MIC
Headset
Related Features


Mute
Group Listening
364
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual


Automatic Speaker Select
Headset Compatibility

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
365
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.23 Station Flexible Buttons
Description
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones incorporate a field of “Flex” buttons as well as the fixed
feature buttons. The Flex buttons are assigned in the system database to access features,
functions and resources of the system. Specifically, Flex buttons can be assigned as:

An Empty button has no system database assignment.

A {DSS/BLF} button places One-touch ICM call to a designated station and displays
status of the station.

A Flex Numbering Plan button activates the feature associated with the assigned
digits from the Flexible Numbering Plan.

A Speed Dial bin button accesses and dials the number from the assigned Speed
Dial bin.

A Pool button accesses an outside Line from the Line group designated for outgoing
calls. A Pool button is used primarily to provide an outgoing call appearance when a
direct Line appearance is not available. It may be used as the last choice for an
incoming outside call. The Pool button LED provides the status for the duration of
the call only.

A Loop button provides an appearance for an outside call when a direct Line
appearance button is not available. The Loop button LED provides the status for the
duration of the call only.

A Station User Program Code button, access or activate the special features
available with the Station User Program Codes, see section 5.25.

An outside Line Appearance button provides access to the individual Line assigned
to the Flex button. The Line button LED provides the status of the outside Line.
With the exception of Line buttons, you can assign the feature or function of the button from
your iPECS IP or LDP Phone. If allowed in the database, you can also assign or reassign
Line buttons.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button at the station
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the desired Flex button.
3. Dial the digits from the Station or Flexible Numbering Plan.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Or,
Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
Press the desired Flex button.
Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
Dial the digits from the Station User Program Code.
366
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The {LOOP} and {POOL} buttons provide a status indication for the call as long as
the station has supervisory control.
2. If there is no available {LINE},{LOOP} or {POOL} button for a call, the station will
not ring for an incoming outside call; transfers to the station immediately recall the
initiator and recalls are routed directly to the Attendant.
3. A station may have multiple {LOOP} and {POOL} buttons.
4. When all outside Lines in a group are busy, any {POOL} buttons associate with
the group will show busy, otherwise, {POOL} buttons will only display the status of
an activate call.
5. {POOL} buttons will access a Line from the designated group using the Round
Robin or Last Used method as assigned in the database.
6. The priority for the appearance of an outside call transfer is first a direct Line
appearance ({LINE} button), if not available a {LOOP} appearance is employed, if
not available a {POOL} appearance is used. If there is no appearance available,
the transferring station recalls immediately.
7. Station User Program Codes are defined in section 5.25.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLANS
Flexible Numbering Plan
STATION DATA
Flexible Buttons
Related Features


Flexible Numbering Plan
Station User Programming & Codes

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
367
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.24 Station Individual Call Routing (ICR)
Description
Station ICR is an extension of Call Forward that permits you to establish scenarios to route
your incoming calls. Each of the ten scenarios defines rules to route incoming calls based on
Time, Day of week, Date and Caller ID to your desired destination. Each scenario is assigned
a priority of 0 to 9. When you receive an incoming call, the System will search the ICR
scenarios, then route the call according to the destination in the highest priority-matching
scenario. If no matches are found, the routing assigned for the call is used.
Scenarios may be established from the Station Web portal, contact your Ericsson-LG
Enterprise representative for details or scenarios can be configured from an iPECS IP or LDP
Phone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To create a scenario
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “24”, the ICR menu.
or Log in to the Station Web portal.
2. Select the desired Scenario (0 - 9).
3. Select the type of Caller ID (0 – 5):
 Type 0 – Station CID
 Type 1 - All Station
 Type 2 – CO CID
 Type 3 - All CO call
 Type 4 - All call
 Type 5 - N/A
4. Enter the Scenario Start and End Date (YYMMDD).
5. Select the Day-of-week using the Flex buttons:
 Flex button 1 is Monday – Flex button 7 is Sunday
 Flex button 8 is for holidays
6. Enter scenario Start and End time in 24-hour format (HHMM).
7. Select Type of destination (0 – 6):
 Type 0 – Station
 Type 1 - Hunt group
 Type 2 - CO Line Number
 Type 3 - CO Group number
 Type 4 - CO Loop
 Type 5 - CO Transit
 Type 6 - N/A
8. Enter the specific Station, Hunt group, Line number, etc.
9. Select Scenario Priority (0 to 9).
368
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
10. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to store the scenario.
To activate ICR Call Forward
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive a dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial the desired Call Forward code (0-4).
4. Dial “587”, the Station ICR activation code.
5. Replace the handset, return to idle.
Conditions
1. Any station allowed access may define scenarios in the Station’s Web portal.
2. The conditions as listed under Call Forward apply.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common AttributesCall Forward
Station Timer Station Call Forward No Answer Timer
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Call Forward No Answer Timer
Related Features

Call Forward

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Hardware
369
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.25 Station User Programming& Codes
Description
You can program an array of functions and features, access status information, and assign
special features codes to Flex buttons of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone. The Station User
Program Codes used for these purposes are fixed as listed below.
370
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
In addition, a Station User Program Menu display is provided by the iPECS IP and LDP
Phone display to assist you during programming the Station User Program Code features
and functions. The [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons are used to scroll through the menu
items and the dial pad is used to enter a selection. The codes are also used to assign a
function or feature to a Flex button.
The Station User Program Menu displays are illustrated below.

First top-level Menu selection
[1] RING/NEWKEYSET
[2] COS

Under selection [1] Ring, select 1~5 as below
[1] STA RING TYPE
[2] CO RING TYPE
[3] ANSWER MODE
[4] CALL COVER ATTR
[5] STA RING DOWNLOAD
[9] EAR-MIC HEADSET
[0] ENBLOCK MODE
[9] STA RING TYPE

Under selection [2] COS (Class of Service), select 1~3 as below
[1] COS DOWN
[2] COS RESTORE
[3] WALKING COS
[4] ICR SCENARIO
[5] LIP KEYSET STAT
[6] CALL PROFILE

Next top-level Menu selection
[3] MSGRET/MOBILE-EXT
[4] WAKE UP TIME

Under selection [3] MESSAGE RETRIEVE, select 1~0 as below
[1] MESSAGE RETRIEVE METHOD
[2] MESSAGE RETRIEVE EXAMPLE
371
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
[3] AUTH REGISTER
[4] DID DISA CALL WAIT
[5] CHOICE EXEC/SEC MSG
[6] SEND BRIEF SMS MESSAGE
[7] REG MOBILE-EXT
[8] ACTIVE MOBILE-EXT
[9] REGISTER MOBILE-CLI
[0] VM MOBILE NOTIFY

Under selection [4] WAKE UP TIME select 1~2 as below
[1] SET WAKE UP TIME
[2] WAKE UP DISABLE

Next top-level Menu selection
[5] MESSAGE
[6] HEADSET

Under selection [5] MESSAGE, select 1~5as below
[1] SET PRE : CUST MSG
[2] PGM CUSTOM MSG
[3] ACTIVE CONF-ROOM
[4] DEACTIVE CONF-ROOM
[5] CONF-GROUP
[6] USER GREETING

Under selection [6] HEADSET select 1~2 as below
[1] HEADSET OR SPK MODE
[2] HEADSET RING MODE

Next top-level Menu selection
[7] SUPPLEMENTARY
[*] SYSTEM
372
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual

Issue 1.3
Under selection [7] SUPPLEMENTARY, select 1~9 or “*” as below
[1] LCD DISPLAY LANGUAGE
[2] MFIM VERSION
[3] BGM
[4] REGISTER STA NAME
[5] DISP PHONE IP ADDR
[6] CHANGE PHONE IP ADDR
[7] DISPLAY MAC ADDR
[8] NETWORK CONFIG
[9] DISP PHONE VERSION
[*] DISP ADD-ON PACKAGE

Under selection [*] SYSTEM, access Admin
[#] ENTER ADMIN
[6] SET FORCED FWD DEST
[7] FORCED FWD TO DEST
[8] REGISTER BLUETOOTH
[9] BLUETOOTH USAGE
[0] HOTDESK LOGIN
[*] HOTDESK LOGOUT
[#] ENTER ADMIN
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Station User Program Code to a Flex button
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button, the Station User Program Menu is displayed.
2. Press the desired Flex button.
3. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
4. Dial the desired Station User Program Code and additional inputs that may be
required.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
373
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
To activate a Station User Program Code feature or function
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button, the Station User Program Menu is displayed.
2. If desired, use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] to display the desired menu item, or
dial the desired Station User Program Code with additional inputs as required.
Or,
1. Press the assigned Flex button.
Programming
Conditions
Related Features











Station Flexible Buttons
Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Two-Way Record
Station Message Wait/Call Back
CLI Message Wait
Wake-Up Alarm
Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages
Headset Compatibility
Attendant Station Program Codes
Mobile Extension

iPECS IP or LDP Phone w/Display
Hardware
374
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.26 Two-Way Record
Description
With your iPECS IP or LDP Phone, you can record any active conversation to your Voice
Mail mailbox or an external server such as the IP Call Recording server. All calls including
incoming, outgoing, internal, external, conference, conference rooms and conference group
calls can be recorded. A {RECORD} button must be assigned to access the On-demand Call
Recording feature.
When the recording destination is an iPECS IPCR server, recording can be paused(Secret)
Flex button and the Recording Announcement can be activated using configured Flexible
buttons.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a flexible button as a {RECORD} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “80” + recording destination (VM Group,
UCS Client, or recording server) + [HOLD/SAVE]
To assign a {Secret} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “80” + recording destination (IPCR
server group) + “1” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To assign a {Announce} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “80” + recording destination (IPCR
server group) +”2” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate Two-Way Record while on a call
1. Press the {RECORD} button, record warning tone heard, and recording starts.
To mute Two-Way Record while on a call
1. Press the {Secret} button, recording and tones stop.
Press the {Secret} button to restart recording.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a call
1. Press the {RECORD} again.
Or,
2. Hang-up, return to idle.
To manage the recordings, use the procedures for the Voice Mail, as outlined in the UCS
Client User Guide, the iPECS IPCR User Guide or the third party guide, as appropriate.
Conditions
1. The {RECORD} button LED will flash at 240 ipm while recording.
2. This feature is available when using the integrated VM, IP CR, third-party SIP
server, or using an external AA/VM, which employs the SMDI communications
375
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
mode. When an external AA/VM system employs the in-band (DTMF) mode, TwoWay Record is not available.
3. With the Feature Server or integrated VM, internal calls can be recorded as well as
external calls.
4. Use of this feature when the Two-Way Recording Warn Tone is disabled may be
interpreted as a violation of federal, state, or local laws, and an invasion of privacy.
Check applicable laws in your area before recording calls using this feature.
5. If a destination for the recording is not defined for the {RECORD} button, the
Automatic Talk Recording Destination defined in the VM Attributes under Station
Data is employed.
6. On-demand recording using a Voice Mailbox or hard drive records the call from the
point in time when the {Record} button is pressed. When using the IPCR server,
the entire call will be record as long as the {Record} button is pressed before the
call is terminated.
7. The UCS Client can record one call at a time and must be idle. While recording, if
the UCS Client places or receives a call, recording terminates.
8. When call recording begins, you and the connected party will receive a Call
Recording confirmation tone and the tone may repeat at intervals.
9. The UCS Client used for recording must be operating in a ‘Local’ mode not remote.
10. A third party SIP Voice Mail or recording server may be used to record calls. In this
case, the Recording Destination should be assigned with the Station group of the
SIP server.
11. When you activate call recording to an iPECS IPCR the entire call is recorded as
long as the call is active when you activate recording. It would be expected that
other SIP recording servers would provide similar On-demand recording.
12. The IPCR Agent Table in the iPECS UCP must be configured when using the
IPCR application or a third-party SIP recording server.
Programming
STATION DATA
VM Attributes Two Way Record, Automatic Talk Recording
Option, Automatic Talk Recording Destination
CO LINE DATA
Common Attributes Auto Call Recording Destination
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Record Warning Tone
Related Features







External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Conference
Conference Group
Multi-Party Voice Conference
Conference Room
Auto Call Recording
376
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Hardware



iPECS IP or LDP Phone
Integrated VM, IPCR, Feature Server or External SMDI based AA/VM
system
UCS Client Softphone
377
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
5.27 Voice Over
Description
Using an iPECS IP or LDP Phone while you are off-hook on a call (internal or outside), you
may receive a voice announcement through the handset receiver with the existing call. The
Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO) is muted so as not to interfere with the existing conversation.
You may respond to the Voice Over calling party using Camp-On response or use Silent Text
Messaging to respond.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
Placing a Voice Over (OHVO) while receiving busy
1. Dial “#” or press a pre-programmed {OHVO} button.
2. After splash tone, begin announcement.
Responding to a Voice Over announcement
1. Use Camp-On response procedure or Silent Text Messaging or One-Time DND.
SLT
Placing a Voice Over (OHVO) while receiving busy
1. Dial “#”.
2. After splash tone, begin announcement.
Responding to a Voice Over announcement
1. Use Camp-On response procedure.
Conditions
1. When you respond to a Voice Over via Camp-On, all conditions and options
available to Camp-On apply.
2. Voice Over may be used to notify you of a transferred call (Intercom or outside) by
announcing the call then releasing to complete the transfer.
3. When a call is transferred with Voice Over, you will receive muted ringing after the
transfer is complete.
4. The Pre-defined or Custom Text Display Message feature may be used in
response to a Voice Over announcement and the conditions associated with these
features apply.
5. Both the originating and receiving station must be programmed to allow OHVO
calls.
6. When Silent Text Messaging is used to respond to a Voice over call, the existing
call will not be disconnected.
7. If you are in conference, using the Speakerphone or Group Listen, Voice Over is
not available. Camp-On will be activated and a Camp-On tone sent to your phone.
378
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Voice Over
Related Features




Call Waiting/Camp-On
Group Listening
Silent Text Message
Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages

iPECS IP or LDP Phone to receive Voice Over
Hardware
379
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6. ATTENDANTS
6.1
Active CPU (UCP) Display
Description
When the system is equipped for CPU Redundancy, the System Attendant can determine
and change the active and standby CPU.
Operation
System Attendant
To assign a Flex button for Active CPU Display
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “078” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To view the active UCP
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “078” the Active CPU Display code, the active CPU is displayed.
Or,
1. Press the {Active CPU Display} Flex button to display the active CPU.
To Change Standby UCP to Active UCP
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “078” the Active CPU Display code.
3. Dial “#” to change the standby iPECS UCP module to active.
Conditions
1. The system must be equipped with and properly programmed in Redundancy Data
for Redundant Processor operation and for the Attendant to display or change the
active UCP.
2. The System Attendant can assign a Flex button to indicate when the back-up
iPECS UCP module is active. When assigned, the LED of the Flex button will turn
ON indicating the back-up UCP is active.
Programming
REDUNDANCY DATA
Redundancy Attributes CPU Redundancy Usage
Related Features

Redundant System Processor
Hardware
380
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.2
Issue 1.3
Alternate Attendant
Description
This feature allows an Alternate answer point while the Attendant station is in an unavailable
mode. When in the unavailable mode, the next available Attendant in the Attendant group will
receive Attendant calls and recalls.
Operation
Attendant
To assign a flexible button to activate {ALT ATD} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “562” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To toggle the Attendant Unavailable feature
1. Dial “562”, the Attendant Unavailable code or press {ALT ATD} button.
Conditions
1. Alternate Attendant activates the DND feature at the Attendant station and affects
all calls to the Attendant station.
2. A Flex button can be assigned to activate Alternate Attendant. The {ALTATD}
button LED indicates the status of the Alternate Attendant feature, ON indicates
the Attendant is unavailable.
3. A station, which is receiving calls forwarded from the System Attendant, cannot
use the Alternate Attendant feature.
4. All except for one Attendant can activate Alternate Attendant. When the last
Attendant attempts to activate this feature, error tone is received.
5. An Attendant forwarded to an unavailable Attendant is also considered to be in the
unavailable Attendant mode.
6. When there is a queued Attendant call, the [HOLD/SAVE] button at unavailable
Attendant stations will flash but no audible ring is provided and the station cannot
retrieve the call. When an Attendant changes from unavailable to available status,
any queued Attendant calls will be available to the Attendant.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware
381
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.3
Issue 1.3
Attendant Call & Call Queuing
Description
Any station can call the Attendant by dialing the Attendant Call code “0”. When an Attendant
call experiences a busy, the call is queued to the Attendant group. The call will be delivered
to the first available Attendant.
Operation
To call the Attendant
1. Dial “0”, the Attendant Call Code.
Condition
1. Call routing order follows the order of entry in the Attendant Assignments program.
2. The Attendant is informed of a queued Attendant call by the [HOLD/SAVE] button
LED flashing. The calling intercom party will receive ring-back tone or MOH, as
configured in the system.
3. Calls to the Attendant’s station intercom number are sent to the station dialed as
with any intercom call.
4. When an Attendant calls another busy Attendant by dialing the station number,
busy tone is received and Camp-on is available.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment
Music Sources MOH Type
System Attributes Attendant Call Queued Ring Back Tone
Related Features


Attendant Positions
Intercom Call (ICM Call)

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
382
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.4
Issue 1.3
Attendant Positions
Description
The iPECS UCP system has the capacity for 50 Attendants (1 System Attendant/49 Main
Attendants). Attendants have enhanced call and control capabilities and are designated to
receive dial ’0’ calls from other users.
There are two different types of Attendant as follows,
 System Attendant - The first station in the Attendant Group. In addition to Main
Attendant features, the System Attendant is commonly used for System Attendant
Programming, Admin Programming and Day/Night/Timed Mode control.
 Main Attendant – Attendant group stations other than the first station of the
Attendant Group.
Operation
Condition
1. As a default, the first Attendant (System Attendant) is assigned as Station 1000
(logical number), and others are not assigned. In the UCP, the first digital phone
port is designated as the System Attendant and is Station number 1000.
2. Attendant calls (dialing “0”) and recalls are routed to first available attendant.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment System Attendant, Main Attendant
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
383
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.5
Issue 1.3
Attendant Recall
Description
Unanswered or abandoned outside calls that remain unanswered for the Hold or Transfer
Hold timer, as appropriate, will recall the station placing the call on hold. If the call remains
unanswered for the assigned Recall time, the first available Attendant will also receive recall.
The Attendant and station will receive the recall signal for the Attendant Recall Timer period
after which the system will disconnect and return the outside Line to idle.
Operation
System
Attendant recall operation is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Timers Attendant Recall Timer, I-Hold Recall
Timer
Related Features



Hold
Hold Recall
Call Transfer

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
384
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.6
Issue 1.3
Attendant Station User Program Codes
Description
Using the Attendant Station User Program Codes, the Attendant can print SMDR and Traffic
reports on-demand, assign Authorization Codes, control certain user features, record System
announcements, enable/disable Auto Service Mode Control, etc. Items are available using
the Program Code directly or scrolling the multi-level display menu. The following indicates
the menu displays, including the digit for selecting the item, the item description and further
required entries. The various levels of the display menu are indicated by indentation. For
additional information, reference Appendix A of the iPECS Administration & Programming
Manual.
Note also, some Program Codes are only available to the System Attendant or stations
allowed access to the Attendant Program code “0”.
[1] PRINT
[1] SMDR
[1] PRINT SMDR STA BASE
station range input
[2] DELETE STATION BASE
station range input
[3] DISPLY CALL CHARGE
[4] ABORT PRINTING
[5] PRINT LOST CALL
[6] DELETE LOST CALL
[2] TRAFFIC - System attendant only
[1] PRINT ALL SUMMARY
enter Analysis time & type
[2] PRINT ALL PERIDICLLY
enter Analysis time, type & Print time
[3] ABORT PERIDIC PRINTING
[4] PRINT ATD TRAFFIC
enter Analysis time & type
[5] PRINT CALL SUMMARY
[6] PRINT CALL HOURLY
[7] PRINT H/W USAGE
385
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
enter Analysis time & type
[8] PRINT CO SUMMARY
enter Analysis time & type
[9] PRINT CO HOURLY
enter CO group number
[2] COS
[1] SET ICM ONLY MODE
enter station range
[2] RESTORE COS
enter station range
[3] AUTHORIZATION
System Attendant only
[1] REGISTER AUTHORIZATION
enter station
[2] ERASE AUTHORIZATION
enter station
[4] DATE AND TIME
[1] SYSTEM DATE TIME SET
System Attendant only
[2] LCD DATE MODE CHAGE
System Attendant only
[3] LCD TIME MODE CHAGE
System Attendant only
[4] ATD SET WAKE UP TIME
enter station range
[5] ATD WAKE UP DISABLE
enter station range
[6] USE PX TIME/DATE
Network time/date (0-2)
[7] ATD HOTDESK LOGIN
[8] ATD HOTDESK LOGOUT
[5] MESSAGE
[1] SET PREUSTOM MESSAGE
386
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
enter station range &Message (00~20)
[2] DND/FWD/MESSAGE CANCEL
enter station range
[3] CUSTOM DISP MESSAGE REG
enter Message (11~20)
[4] Monitor Conference Room
[5] Delete Conference Room
[6] REC System ANNCEMENT
enter VSF slot number (001-999)
[7] SUPPLEMENTARY
[1] REG STATION NAME
enter station number
[2] ISOLATE CO FAULT
[3] AUTO D/N/T PGM
select enable/disable
[4] EXT PORT#1 BGM EN/DI
select 0-2
[5] EXT PORT#2 BGM EN/DI
select 0-2
[6] LCD Display Language
select language
[7] PTT Login / Logout, station range
enter station range
[8] Display CPU REDUNDANCY STATE
[9] FONT SET
enter station range
[0] CONTRAST SET
enter station range
[8] EMERGENCY HISTORY
[9] USB
[1] USB Upgrade
[2] USB DB Download
[3] USB DB Upload
387
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
[#] WHTU SUBSCRIBE
Operation
Attendant
To activate an Attendant Station User Program Code feature or function
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button, the Station Program Menu is displayed.
2. Dial “0” to access the Attendant Station Program codes.
3. Enter desired code or use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DWN] button to display the desired
menu item and enter the desired code.
4. Dial additional inputs, if required.
Condition
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment System Attendant, Main Attendant
Related Features











SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Traffic Analysis
Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock
Authorization Codes (Password)
System Clock Set
Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Dial-by-Name
Auto Service Mode Control
Back Ground Music
Station User Programming & Codes

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
388
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.7
Issue 1.3
Cabinet Alarm
Description
The Cabinet Alarm alerts the Attendant of a fault in the fans or power supplies in a cabinet.
The alarm notification displays the cabinet number. The cause of the fault, cabinet fan, PSU
or PSU fan is shown on the Cabinet Attributes Web Admin page. The alert may be
terminated at the Attendant’s phone by dialing the Alarm Reset code or, if assigned, pressing
the {ALARM RESET} button.
Operation
When an alarm condition occurs, the Attendant phone will display
CABINET XXX STS FAULT
System Attendant
To assign a Flex button as an {ALARM RESET} button to terminate the Alarm Signal
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “565” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To terminate an Alarm Signal while idle
1. Dial the Alarm Reset code, “565”, confirmation tone is received and the display
returns to normal.
Or,
Press the {ALARM RESET} button.
Conditions
1. The PSU serial port must be connected to the gateway or UCP Module identified
in System Data  Cabinet Attribute.
2. If the serial monitoring cable of the PSU is connected to a WTIM, refer to the
Description and Installation Manual for proper DIP-switch settings; DIP-switch 3 of
the WTIM must be set to the OFF position.
3. The notification identifies the cause of the alarm as FAN1 or FAN2 for the Main
Cabinet fans, PSU1 or PSU2 for a power supply fault or PSU1 FAN or PSU2 FAN.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Cabinet Attributes (197) Cabinet Status Check
Related Features


Alarm Signal/Door Bell
Emergency Call Attendant Alert
Hardware
389
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.8
Issue 1.3
Call Forward, Attendant
Description
As with other stations, Attendants can forward calls to other stations in the system. Calls may
be forwarded unconditionally, on busy or no answer.
Operation
Attendant
To activate Call Forward
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive intercom dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial ‘0’ ~ ‘5’, the Call Forward type.
4. Dial the station number to receive forward calls.
To deactivate Call Forward
1. While idle, press the [FWD] button.
Or,
1. While Off-hook, press the [FWD] button.
2. Dial ‘#’.
Condition
1. The Conditions of the Call Forward feature apply.
2. If the System Attendant activates Unconditional Call Forward, the receiving station
will receive Attendant calls and recall ring. In addition, if the receiving station is an
iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, the receiving station will be able to activate
features normally reserved for a Main Attendant.
3. The system requires at least one Attendant be available at all times. The last
available Attendant cannot activate Call Forward to an Attendant that has activated
the Alternate Attendant feature.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Assignment Call Forward
Station Timers Station Forward No Answer Timer
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment System Attendant, Main Attendant
Related Features


Call Forward
Alternate Attendant

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
390
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.9
Issue 1.3
Call Forward, Off-Net
Description
The System Attendant can forward incoming outside calls to a remote “Off-Net” location.
Calls forward via a Speed Dial bin. When a call is received, the system will automatically
place a call using the Speed Dial number, dialing the number and connecting the incoming
call in an Unsupervised conference.
Operation
System Attendant
To activate Off-Net Call Forward
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial ‘5’, the Off-Net Forward feature code.
4. Dial the outside Line access code of the Line to forward.
5. Dial the Speed Dial bin to use to place the outgoing (Off-Net) call, the LED of any
Off-Net forwarded outside Line button at the Attendant stations will flutter at a rate
of 240 ipm while active.
To deactivate Off-Net Call Forward
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [FWD]button.
3. Dial “5”, Off-Net Forward code.
4. Dial the outside Line access Code.
5. Dial ‘#’.
Conditions
1. The System Attendant can forward any Line, Line Group or all outside calls using
the appropriate Line access code. In addition, a Flex button assigned to a Line or
group may be employed in place of the Line access code to forward calls.
2. The conditions of the Unsupervised conference feature apply.
3. The conditions of the Call Forward Off-Net feature apply.
4. When enabled, calls that forward Off-net will receive the Off-Net forward prompt.
5. When enabled, Lines that forward Off-net may receive DTMF tones as the Off-Net
call is placed.
6. To utilize Off-net forward of incoming calls on analog CO lines to another analog
CO line, a valid Open Loop Detect Timer should be assigned for the analog CO
lines. This is to prevent CO line lock up in case the analog CO lines do not provide
proper disconnect signals for the system to detect.
7. To enable this feature, Day/Night/Timed COS of DISA COS (PGM 166) must be
set on the available value to allow the CO line (ex. The value is 1).
391
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Assignment Call Forward, Off-Net Forward
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Off-Net Prompt Usage, Repeat DTMF
Tone
Attendant Assignment System Attendant
System Timers Unsupervised Conference Timer
DISA COS  Day/Night/Timed COS
CO LINE DATA
Analog Attributes Open Loop Detect Timer
Related Features


Call Forward
Unsupervised Conference

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
392
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.10 Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Description
The system clock automatically controls the Ring Mode. Ring assignments are applied based
on the time of day and day of week. Four modes of ring (Ring Assignments) are provided
Day, Night, Timed and Scenario.
The Attendant controls the system Ring Service mode changing from Auto Service Mode to
Day, Night, Timed or Scenario service mode. Based on the service mode selected, different
ring assignments, COS (Class of Service) and answering privileges are invoked for the
system users.
Operation
System Attendant
To change Day/Timed/Night Ring Mode manually
1. Press the [DND] button.
2. Dial “1”~”5” to select the desired mode (1: Day mode, 2: Night mode, 3: Timed
mode, 4: Auto Service mode, 5: Scenario mode).
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To set Day/Timed/Night Ring/Scenario Mode automatically (Auto Service Mode Control)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code “073” to set Auto Mode control.
Conditions
1. Only Attendants can change Day/Timed/Night/Scenario Ring Mode for the system
manually and program the Auto Ring Mode Selection Table (Weekly Time table).
2. Stations receive incoming ring for outside Lines based on the database
assignments and the system mode (Day/Night/Timed/Scenario) when the call
arrives.
3. When the Auto Ring Selection Table is programmed, the ring, COS (Class of
Service) and Line access mode are changed automatically based on the times
assigned in the table.
4. The System Attendant always has manual control of the system mode by
enabling/disabling the Auto Service Mode Control.
5. To employ the Scenario mode, scenarios must be assigned in the System Call
Routing program.
Programming
CO LINE DATA
CO/IP Ring Assignment
SYSTEM DATA
External Control Contacts
393
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
System Call Routing
TABLES DATA
Auto Ring Mode Table
Related Features






System Clock Set
Outside Line Ring Assignment
LBC (Loud Bell Control)
Dialing Restrictions
Auto Service Mode Control
System Call Routing

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
394
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.11 DSS/BLF Consoles
Description
Two types of DSS/BLF Consoles are available and can be used with an Attendant station
Serial Consoles and standard Consoles. For details on the Serial console operation, refer to
section 5.20.
The system allows an unlimited number of standard DSS/BLF Consoles LIP-8040LSS to be
installed in the system. Up to nine(9) standard DSS Consoles may be associated with a
station connected to an iPECS UCP. However, the maximum of DSS consoles may be
different according to the models of phone. Each button on the console can be assigned as
an outside Line, DSS/BLF or feature button.
For ease of programming, each console is assigned to a button “Map” in the system
database. The Administrator or user may then change individual Flex buttons as desired.
Operation of the DSS/BLF Console Flex buttons is the same as Flex buttons on the iPECS IP
and LDP Phones.
Operation
Conditions
1. Each standard DSS Console is assigned to operate in connection with a specific
station.
2. There is no limit to the number of standard DSS Consoles in a system beyond the
basic system capacities. The DSS Console employs a station number in the
system.
3. Assignments for the DSS button Maps are detailed in the below. Note that the
individual button assignments can be changed as with the iPECS IP and LDP
Phone Flex buttons.
Table DSS/BLF button maps — iPECS UCP
MAP 1
Flex 1
Atd Override
Flex 2
All Call Page
Flex 3
Call Park 01
Flex 4-
Station Group 1
Flex 5
Camp-On
Flex 6
Int All Call Page
Flex 7
Call Park 02
Flex 8
Station Group 2
395
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Table DSS/BLF button maps — iPECS UCP
Flex 9
Release
Flex 10
Ext All Call Page
Flex 11
Call park 03
Flex 12
Station Group 3
Flex 13~40
Station 100~127
MAP 2
Flex 1 ~ 40
Station 136~175
MAP 3
Flex 1 ~ 40
Station 184~223
Programming
STATION DATA
Station Type  DSS Map
Flexible Buttons
Related Features


Attendant Positions
Station Flexible Buttons

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
396
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.12 Disable Outgoing Line Access
Description
The System Attendant can place outside Lines out-of service, disabling outgoing calls on the
Line. This is normally done should an undetected fault in the carrier or system circuit interrupt
service over the Line. Incoming calls continue to be processed normally.
Operation
System Attendant
To disable/enable Outgoing Line access (toggle)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “072”, the Isolate Line Fault code.
3. Press the {Line} button of the line(s) to be disabled, confirmation tone is heard and
the status for the selected Line(s) is changed.
Conditions
1. The System Attendant may disable a busy Line. The feature will take effect after
the desired Line goes to idle.
2. Once the Line is disabled, all Attendant appearances for the disabled Line will
flutter at 240 ipm, other stations will indicate the Line as busy and the LED is ON.
3. The outside Line status is stored in battery-protected memory in case of a power
failure.
4. Multiple Lines may be enabled/disabled without redialing the Isolate Line Fault
code. Confirmation tone is heard after each Line is enabled/disabled.
5. When the system detects a fault on a Line, the Line is disabled for outgoing access
automatically.
6. Incoming calls on a disabled Line will continue to operate normally.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment
Related Features

Attendant Positions

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
397
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.13 DND Override
Description
A station in the DND generally cannot receive an incoming call. The Attendant or the
Secretary station of an Executive/Secretary pair however may override the DND status to
signal the station of an awaiting call. A Flex button assigned for Intrusion is required.
Operation
Attendant
To assign a Flex button as an{ATD INTRUSION} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “86” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate DND Override while receiving DND tone
1. Press the {ATD INTRUSION} button, the call signals at the station DND.
Conditions
1. An Attendant may use Override to transfer an outside call to a station in DND.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment
Related Features



Intrusion
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Executive/Secretary Forward

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
398
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.14 Emergency Call Attendant Alert
Description
When a station places a call to an Emergency number, the Attendant receives an emergency
call alert. The alert includes an alert tone and display of the Emergency call information,
which continues until the Attendant resets the alert. The information includes the calling
station number, time and date. The system stores data on the most recent Emergency calls
(up to 16). The Attendant can review the history at any time.
A Flex button on the Attendant phone can be used to reset the alert and terminate the alert
tone.
Operation
System
Operation of the alert is automatic.
Attendant
To assign a Flex button as an {ALARM RESET} button to terminate the alert
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “565” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To assign a Flex button as an {Emergency Call History} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “08” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To terminate an alert signal while idle
1. Dial the Alarm Reset code, “565”, confirmation tone is received and the Alert
terminates.
Or,
Press the {ALARM RESET}button.
To view the Emergency Call History
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
3. Dial “08”, the Emergency Log code. The display shows the first emergency call
logged in the history.
EMERGENCY STA NO XXXX
MM/DD HH:MM (xx)
4. Use the [VOL UP] and [VOL DOWN] buttons to scroll through the call history.
5. After viewing a call history record, the record is marked as “READ” as below.
EMERGENCY STA NO XXXX
MM/DD HH:MM READ (xx)
6. If a record remains unread, the Attendant will receive alert tone upon returning to
idle as notification that a record has not been reviewed.
399
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Emergency CO or Group
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Emergency Call ATD Notify
TABLES DATA
Emergency Code Table
Related Features



Alarm Signal/Door Bell
Emergency Call E-911 (Caller Location) Support
Emergency Call

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
400
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.15 Feature Cancel
Description
The System Attendant can cancel features such as DND, Call Forwarding and Pre-defined or
Custom Messages that are active at other stations.
Operation
To deactivate DND/Call Forward/Pre-selected Message for other stations
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “052”, Attendant Feature Cancel code.
3. Dial the desired station range or, for one station, enter the station number and “*”.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is heard and Attendant station
returns to idle status.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment
Related Features




Call Forward
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Attendant Positions
Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
401
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.16 IP-Attendant
Description
The IP-Attendant is a Windows based PC application that provides a visualization of the
Attendant functionality to simplify Attendant control of features and functions including
displays of call, user and system status. IP Attendant incorporates the PC Mic and Speaker
for audio so that a separate desktop phone is not required.
For further information on IP-Attendant, refer to the IP-Attendant Installation and User Guide.
Operation
System Attendant
Operation of the IP-Attendant is provided in the IP-Attendant Installation and User Guide.
Conditions
1. IP-Attendant requires installation of a system Lock-key.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment
DEVICE LOGIN
Station User Login
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
402
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.17 Intrusion
Description
An Attendant can intrude upon an active station conversation. When the Attendant intrudes
an Intrusion Tone is provided, if assigned, and a conference is established between the
Attendant, the station, and the connected party.
Intrusion can only be activated using an {ATD INTRUSION} button.
Operation
Attendant
To assign an {ATD INTRUSION} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “86” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate Attendant intrusion while receiving busy on an Intercom call
1. Press {ATD INTRUSION} button, Intrusion Warning Tone is provided to the busy
station and the Attendant join the conference to the call.
Conditions
1. If an Attendant or Secretary of an Executive/Secretary pair presses the {ATD
INTRUSION} button while receiving DND tone, the system will activate DND
Override.
2. The conditions of the Conference feature apply.
3. If ‘Privacy’ option is ON, then Attendant can’t intrude to the station.
Programming
STATION DATA
Common Attributes Override Privilege
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Automatic Privacy, Privacy Warning
Tone
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
403
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.18 LCD Display Format Control
Description
The System Attendant can select the format of the time and date provided in the LCD of all
iPECS IP and LDP Phones in the system.
The System Attendant can select (toggle between) two formats for both time and date. The
formats are:
Date: Month/day/year or Year/month/date
Time: 12-hour or 24-hour
Operation
System Attendant
To change the LCD Date Format (toggle)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “042”, the Date Display Format code.
To change the LCD Time Format (toggle)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “043”, the Time Display Format code.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
Attendant Assignment
LCD Display ModeLCD Date, Time Display Mode
Related Features


Attendant Positions
System Clock Set

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
404
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
6.19 System Clock Set
Description
The System Attendant can set the system Time/Date.
Operation
System Attendant
To set the system clock
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “041”, the Attendant Station Program code.
3. Dial six (6) digits for the Date (MM/DD/YY) or [HOLD/SAVE] to skip the Date.
4. Dial four (4) digits for the Time (HH/MM) or [HOLD/SAVE] to skip the Time setup.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is heard and the Attendant
station returns to idle status.
To synchronize the system clock to the ISDN
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “046”, the Attendant Station Program code.
3. Dial “1” to synchronize the Date and Time to the ISDN.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is heard and Attendant station
returns to idle status.
Conditions
1. The time is entered in the24-hour format.
2. If an NTP (Network Time Protocol)server is assigned, the system will check the
time every ten (10) minutes. If the system time is more than 10 seconds off, the
system time is synchronized with the NTP server. This will override the Attendant
setting.
Programming
SYSTEM DATA
System Attributes Network Time & Date
Attendant Assignment
System Date &Time
Related Features






LCR (Least Cost Routing)
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Auto Service Mode Control
Automatic System Time Synchronization
Automatic System Daylight Savings Time
Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is
recommended
Hardware
405
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
7. SLT (SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE)
7.1
Broker Call
Description
Broker Call allows a SLT user to engage in two (2) calls, alternating between the two parties,
so that the conversation with each party is private.
There are two types of Broker Call:
Transfer Broker call – the second call is originated by the SLT
Camped On Broker Call – the second call is camped on the SLT
Operation
SLT
To activate a Transfer Broker Call
1. Make or receive an intercom or external call.
2. Momentarily press the hook-switch, intercom dial tone received and active call is
placed in Exclusive hold state.
3. Place second call.
4. To alternate between calls momentarily press the hook-switch.
To activate a Camp-On Broker Call
1. Make or receive an intercom or external call.
2. Receive a Call Waiting/Camp-On tone.
3. Momentarily press the hook-switch, intercom dial tone received and the active call
is placed on Exclusive Hold.
4. Dial the Camp-On Answer feature code “*621”, camped on call is connected.
To alternate between the calls
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Camp-On Answer feature code “*621”.
Conditions
1. After a hook-switch flash, if the call results in an error, busy, no answer or an
abnormal state, the SLT user may momentarily press hook-switch to retrieve the
held call.
2. During a Transfer Broker Call, if the SLT user goes on-hook, the Broker Call
parties are connected completing a Call Transfer.
3. During a Transfer Broker Call, if the active caller disconnects from the SLT user,
the SLT user receives error tone and may go on-hook, then the SLT user receives
recall and can retrieve the held call by going off-hook. If the held party is an
406
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Issue 1.3
outside call, the SLT user receives error tone and may go on-hook to receive recall
and retrieve the held call.
During a Camp-On Broker Call, if the SLT user goes on-hook, the active call is
disconnected and the held call recalls to the SLT.
During a Camp-On Broker Call, if the active party disconnects from the SLT, the
SLT user receives error tone. The SLT user may momentarily press the hookswitch to retrieve the held party or go on-hook and receive recall.
If the SLT user presses the hook-switch twice in less than 2 seconds, a 3-way
conference is established.
For a Camp-On Broker call, after a hook-switch flash, the user must begin dialing
prior to expiration of the dial tone timer or the SLT will receive error tone.
If the SLT goes to an on-hook state with a call on hold, the SLT will receive recall
ring automatically.
The SLT Flash mode must be set to Transfer.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes SLT Flash Mode
Related Features





Message Wait/Call Back
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Exclusive Hold
Call Transfer
Conference
Hardware
407
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
7.2
Issue 1.3
Howler Tone
Description
When a SLT station goes off-hook and does not initiate dialing within the Dial tone timer,
delays dialing between digits in excess of the inter-digit time or stays off-hook at the
completion of activating a feature or program, the station will receive howler tone as an error
indication and the call attempt will be abandoned. In order to complete the call, the user must
return to the on-hook state and restart the call.
Operation
System
The system will deliver howler tone automatically, as required.
Conditions
1. Howler Tone is sent after a period, of about 30 seconds of error tone.
2. Lockout occurs when howler tone starts.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Howler Tone
Related Features

Intercom Lock-Out
Hardware
408
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
7.3
Issue 1.3
SLT Flash Mode
Description
When the SLT user momentarily presses the Hook-switch, a Flash is generated. The
operation of the Flash function can be configured to for the following operation:
 0: Flash Transfer - Flash detected, outside Line is held and dial tone is received.
 1: Flash Drop - Flash detected and outside Line is disconnected.
 2: Flash Ignore - Flash detected but Ignored.
 3: Hold Release - Flash detected, the outside Line is held and the dial tone is
received. If the SLT user goes on-hook, the held Line is disconnected.
Operation
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes SLT Flash Mode
Related Features


Call Transfer
Hold
Hardware
409
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
7.4
Issue 1.3
SLT Message Wait Indication
Description
All SLT devices will receive a “Stutter” dial tone as an audible indication of a Message
Waiting. In addition, industry standard Message Waiting telephones may be connected to the
system. The system will flash the Message Wait lamp when a messaging is waiting.
Operation
System
The system switches the 90 VDC lamp ON and OFF for assigned SLTs indicating a
Message Wait.
Conditions
1. The system switches a 90 VDC supply ON and OFF to flash the SLT’s neon
Message lamp.
2. Although the SLT Battery Feed is removed during the 90 VDC ON cycle, the
system will recognize a SLT Off-hook event.
3. The SLT must incorporate a 90 VDC neon lamp that is connected directly across
the tip and ring of the voice network.
Programming
STATION DATA
Station Type
Related Features

Message Wait/Call Back

SLT w/90 VDC Neon lamp
Hardware
410
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
7.5
Issue 1.3
SLT Name Entry
Description
A SLT user has the capability to program a name. When placing an internal call, the Name is
sent to the called party in place of the station number.
Operation
SLT
To register the name at the SLT
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “74”, the Name Program Code.
4. Enter name, refer to Station Speed Dial, Alphanumeric Chart.
5. Momentarily depress the hook-switch, receive confirmation tone.
To delete the name at the SLT
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “74”, the Name Program Code.
4. Momentarily depress the hook-switch, receive confirmation tone.
Conditions
Programming
STATION DATA
Station Name Display
Related Features


Dial-by-Name
Station Speed Dial
Hardware
411
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
7.6
Issue 1.3
Transfer CLI to SLT
Description
A SLT phone may receive the Caller Id of the transferred outside call in place of the station
number transferring the call. The transferred call Caller Id is sent after the transferring station
hangs up to complete the transfer.
Operation
The Caller Id is automatically sent to the SLT when configured.
Conditions
1. For proper operation, use of the Original CLI should be assigned to the Transfer
CLI.
Programming
STATION DATA
Terminal Attributes Send SLT CLI Info
CLI Attributes FAST CLI For Transfer Call
Related Features
Hardware

SLT w/display
412
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
8. SIP EXTENSION
8.1
SIP Phone Support
Description
The iPECS UCP incorporates basic SIP Extension service connecting SIP phones through a
VoIP channel using IETF’s standard RFC-3261 SIP protocols. SIP phones, including the
Ericsson-LG Enterprise SIP phones, register for service with or without authentication. After
registration, the SIP phone can place and receive calls, place calls on hold, transfer calls and
will have access to the features of the system through the Flexible Numbering plan using the
procedures applicable to a SLT. Some of the features supported are listed below.
In addition to the Numbering Plan features, for the Ericsson-LG Enterprise SIP phones, the
Call Forward and DND features can be synchronized using proprietary methods so that when
you activate the feature at the ELG SIP phone, the system is informed and can activate the
feature properly within the system. When Feature sync is not enabled or a 3rd party SIP
phone is employed, the phone may activate the internal Forward or DND feature but the
system cannot properly inform status to others users or control routing.
Account Code Entry
Attendant Call
Broker Call, the SIP phone must support Call Wait
Call Forward, requires Feature Sync to employ UCP Call Fwd feature.
Call Park using Unscreened (Blind) Transfer
Call Pick-Up, Group & Directed
Call Transfer, screened and unscreened, Call Waiting/Camp-on, the SIP phone
must support Call Wait
Conference Group
Conference Room
Do-Not-Disturb (DND), the SIP phones may have internal DND
Door Open
DSS/BLF, supported by Ericsson-LG Enterprise SIP phones
Emergency Page
Emergency Calling
Integrated Voice Mail
Last Number Redial
Paging
Internal/External Page
Meet Me Page
All Call Page
413
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Station ICR
Station & System Speed Dial
Universal Night Answer
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Wake-Up Alarm
Operation
SIP Phone
SIP phone operation generally follows the SLT procedures. Refer to the SIP phone user
guide for operation of features of the phone.
System
Operation of SIP phone provisioning is automatic when configured.
Ericsson-LG Enterprise SIP phone
To activate One-Time Call Forward while receiving ring with Feature Sync active
1. Press the Call Forward button.
2. Dial destination number, ringing stops and the call Forwards.
To activate One-Time DND while receiving ring with Feature Sync active
1. Press the [DND] button, the ringing call is rejected.
Conditions
1. A lock-key is required to use a 3rd party SIP phone, contact your local Ericsson-LG
Enterprise representative.
2. SIP phones must be configured in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction
and have an appearance of the station assigned in the iPECS UCP system.
3. If Call Wait is supported by the 3rd party SIP phone, when the phone is busy, a
second call can be delivered to the phone. Call Waiting operation will vary based
on SIP phone, system Call Wait setting and the type of call (internal or external).
4. In addition to the feature set supported for 3rd party SIP phones, the Ericsson-LG
Enterprise SIP phones support Voice Over, Intrusion, and Forced Hands-free ICM.
5. SIP phones provide for an End-of-dialing entry much like a mobile phone.
Generally, a Send or the ‘#’ button is employed at the end of dialing. In addition,
SIP phones generally incorporate a programmable Digit Map that can be used to
recognize the end of dialing so there is no delay in sending digits.
6. With most SIP phones, a second Station appearance can be assigned to a button.
In this case, a virtual MAC is used in the system configuration.
7. Ericsson-LG Enterprise and most 3rd party SIP phones support 3-party conference
through a built-in mixer. For operation, refer to the SIP phone user guide. When
Conference is not supported by the SIP phone, the phone will have access to the
Conference Room and Group features for conferencing using the MCIU or MCIM
channels.
414
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
8. For SIP Phones, the system must have available MCIU or MCIM channels to serve
the features listed below.
a. Conference Room
b. Conference Group
c. Voice Over
d. Intrusion
e. Automatic/On-demand Two-Way Recording
9. Ericsson-LG Enterprise takes no responsibility of the compatibility of any 3rd party
SIP phone with the UCP system. It is the user’s responsibility to assure compatible
operation.
10. Configuring authentication will require the SIP phone provide authentication at
registration and during the initiation of a call.
11. SIP phones require an available VoIP DSP channel, built-in the UCP or from a
VOIM, to relay Page announcements, BGM and MOH packets.
12. Third party SIP phones may activate Call Forward or DND locally. In this case, the
system is not informed of the Call Forward or DND status of the phone. Call
Forward and DND employing the UCP can be accomplished using the SLT
operation. With Feature Sync active and the station allowed Call Forward and
DND, Ericsson-LG Enterprise SIP phone will notify the iPECS UCP of the feature
status.
13. A system VoIP channel is required to support local SIP phone features. A VoIP
channel is required to serve below features.
a. DSP for generation of Busy/Error/Confirm/Ring-Back/Hold/ Page/Warning/
OHVA/Intrusion/Dial tones from system to SIP Phone.
b. Relay of Music On Hold from system to SIP Phone.
c. Relay of Paging from/to SIP Phone.
d. Voice RTP Packet Relay between private LAN and public WAN, local and
remote, NAT resolution.
Note that since a VoIP channel is required for a SIP Trunk, an additional channel
is not required by the SIP Phone to use the SIP Trunk.
Programming
SIP DATA
SIP Common Attributes
SIP Phone Attributes
SIP Phone Provisioning
Related Features
Hardware
415
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
8.2
Issue 1.3
SIP Phone Provisioning, Ericsson-LG Enterprise
Phones
Description
The Provisioning feature automatically configures the Ericsson-LG Enterprise SIP phones
from the UCP database Provisioning Tables. When the SIP phone powers up, it will
download the configuration file from the system and apply the configuration to the phone. A
table may include the MAC address of a specific phone, in which case the table is only
available to the SIP phone with the assigned MAC. When no MAC address is assigned, the
table is employed by all SIP phones of the type (model) entered as the “Conf Type”.
If the Provisioning Tables are not used, the system must be configured with the SIP Phone
attributes as with any SIP phone and the SIP phone must also be configured separately to
match. Characteristics that can be configured from the Provisioning Tables include:
 Registration Timer
 SIP Phone’s local port
 Proxy Port
 Transport type
 Codec priority
 Network Time Server and DST
 Default Volume levels
 Digit Map.
For more information on these parameters, refer to the SIP phone Installer Guide available
from your local Ericsson-LG Enterprise representative.
In addition, Feature Sync can be enabled so that when the SIP phone activates DND or Call
Forward, the information is sent to the iPECS UCP system and the system will activate the
appropriate feature. This also permits the SIP phone to activate One-time Call Forward and
One-time DND while receiving ring.
Operation
System
Operation of SIP phone provisioning is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. Provisioning is only available for Ericsson-LG Enterprise SIP desktop phones.
2. The download employs TFTP as the file transfer protocol.
Programming
SIP DATA
SIP Common Attributes
SIP Phone Attributes
416
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
SIP Phone Provisioning
Related Features
Hardware

IP8800E series phone
417
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
8.3
Issue 1.3
SIP Virtual Mobile Extension
Description
Virtual Mobile Extension (VMEX) is a proprietary regional FMC (Fixed Mobile Convergence)
implementation, which combines mobile service with SIP Call services and the iPECS UCP
system functionality. Calls from the VMEX are directed from the Mobile Switching office to the
carrier’s SIP Call server and delivered to the iPECS UCP for routing. The iPECS UCP routes
the call internally or externally or activates a feature based on the digits received in the SIP
“Invite” message.
When the iPECS UCP receives a call for the VMEX, the call is directed to the VMEX over a
SIP trunk to the carrier’s SIP Call server, which routes the call to the Mobile switching office
to the VMEX. Support for SIP Subscribe and Notify provide status updates to other devices
within the iPECS UCP.
Operation
System
Operation of VMEX is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. VMEX service is regional specific and functions only where the carrier service is
implemented in accordance with the iPECS UCP functionality.
2. The VMEX station must be virtually registered as a VMEX SIP station and employs
SIP for signaling.
3. A VoIP channel is required to support proper operation of the VMEX as with any
SIP Extension.
Programming
SYSTEM ID &
NUMBERING PLAN
Device Port Number Change Virtual Registration
SIP DATA
VMEX Station Data
VMEX Connection Table
TABLES DATA
Mobile Extension Table
Related Features
Hardware
418
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
9. IPECS UCS CLIENT
9.1
iPECS UCS Premium & Standard Client Support
Description
The iPECS UCP incorporates iPECS UCS Standard Client (PC & Mobile) service based on
the built-In UC functionality. All features of the Client are available to the UCS Standard
Client including one-to-one collaboration and video calling, Conference manager, Presence,
and Instant Messaging.
The iPECS UCP supports iPECS UCS Premium Client (PC & Mobile) service with iPECS
UCS Server installed separately. The addition of the UCS Server provides for six (6) party
collaboration and video calling as well as Lync integration.
Please refer to the iPECS UCS Client and UCS Server manuals for the detailed information
on the features and operations.
419
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
9.2
Issue 1.3
Call Control with UC Client
Description
UC Client can call control with my favorite station number (Destination Station number : DSN).
There are two kinds of way. One is No voice(NV) Way and the other with voice(WV) Way
NV Method is that voice and call are happened in DSN. UC Client cannot speak with each
other. WV Method is that DSN and UC Client can talk alternate respectively.
Operation
System
Operation of Call Control is automatic when UC Client is logged in
1. UC Client should be registered in ADM 446.
2. User should set DSN password in UCP web ADM 227.
3. UC-Client user must set DSN and password(PWD) in setting before log in.
4. If UC Client logged in successfully with DSN and PWD, UC Client can control call of
DSN. NV can control simultaneously with DSN. WV can control DSN with IP Bridge
mode.
5. If user wants to change the DSN, system moves automatically it from the member of
previous P.G.
Conditions
1. UCP makes automatically Personal Group(P.G) when UC client log in first time
with DSN. Master is DSN and Member is UC-Client by default.
2. DSN and PWD is optional for WV. If it’s not added in WV, UC-Client is used standalone.
3. If you want to change the Master and Member, you should set it in ADM 260
before log in. (This is modified after P2 1.1.8 or P1 1.0Di version. Master is UC
client and member is DSN in previous version.)
4. If DSN is already the member of other P.G, user cannot assign DSN for NV.
5. If UC Client is already the Master of other P.G, user cannot assign DSN for NV.
Programming
Station Password
Web ADM 227  Set DSN Password
UC Client Registration Web ADM 446
Personal Group setting Web ADM 260,261
Related Features
Hardware
420
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
9.3
Issue 1.3
Mobile Native Voice Support for UCS Mobile client
Description
UCS mobile is an extension itself but UCS mobile client in a native voice mode has an
extension of the associated station.
UCS mobile client with a native voice can control 6 features like MEX On/Off, Voice Mail
forward On/Off and ACD On/Off by using a http. If UCS mobile client uses this feature, it must
be activated on the associated station.
In case of an inbound call, a caller makes a call to a internal station, which is associated with
UCS mobile client then a ring starts to the station and the mobile client. Then if UCS mobile
client get the call, the call will be connected through a Native Call (3G/LTE).
While conversation, UCS mobile user can search his or her UCS Mobile Client phonebook
and transfer the call to an internal user.
In case of an outbound call, a mobile client has two options : One is a call through mode and
the other is a native call mode.
A called party will receive the CID of the station in case of a call through mode, otherwise a
calling party will receive the CID of mobile phone number.
Operation
To activate or deactivate features
1. User can select each menu in the UCS client window.
2. Then the selected feature should be activated or deactivated on the associated
station.
To transfer a call
1. While conversation using UCS client, user can search the desired station to transfer
in the mobile client phonebook.
2. Transfer a call by selecting a transfer menu.
Conditions
1. Mobile client with native voice mode can send the associated station number and
password when registered. Then a personal group is configured by UCP system
automatically to support the presence of the associated station.
2. Otherwise, a system administrator should configure a personal group consisting of
mobile client and the associated station, a mater station. And also the Linked Pair
Mode attribute of PGM261should be set to ON.
Programming
Station Group Data
Personal Group (PGM 260)
421
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Personal Group Attributes(PGM261)
Table Data
Mobile Extension Table(PGM236)
Related Features
Hardware
422
Issue 1.3
iPECS UCP
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.3
Thanks for purchasing iPECS UCP
The contents of this document are subject to
revision without notice due to continued progress
in methodology, design and manufacturing.
Ericsson-LG Enterprise shall have no liability for
any error or damage of any kind resulting from the
use of this document
423
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement